B-65012E03 AC Spindle Motor Series (SPVH) Descriptions 1987

..
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series

<S series/P series/VH series>
DESCRIPTIONS
B-65012E/03
© FANUC LTD, 1987
I~~ ~I~ ~I~~II~\

1
111~111111~Ill 1I~11111
This manual describes following models.
S ':'les name Model name
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR MODEL 1S, MODEL 1.5S,

S series MODEL 2S, MODEL 3S,
MODEL 6S, MODEL 8S,
MODEL 12S, MODEL 15S,
MODEL 18S, MODEL 22S,
MODEL 1S/15000, MODEL 2S/15000,
MODEL 3S/12000, MODEL 6S/12000,
MODEL 8S/8000, MODEL 12S/8000,
MODEL 15S/8000, MODEL 18S/6000,
MODEL 22S/6000
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR MODEL 8P, MODEL 12P,
P series MODEL 15P, MODEL 18P,
MODEL 22P, MODEL 30P,
MODEL 40P, MODEL 50P
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR MODEL 6VH,
VH series MODEL 8VH,
MODEL 12VH
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to

describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not
be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so
many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as
possible in this manual should be regarded as "impossible".
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. AC SPINDLE MOTORS series
1• GENERAL • • • . • . • . . . . • • . . • . • . • . • . • • . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . • . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. FEATURES . • . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . • . . 3
3. SPECIFICATION • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • • • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . 4
3 .1 Specifications • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . 4
3.2 Output/Torque Characteristics...................... . .............. 6
4. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER ....•... . ....•... 14

4 .1 Configuration • • • • • • . • . . . . . . • . . . • . • . . . . . • • • . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • • . . • 14
4.2 Order Specification Drawing Number .............. . ....•.......•.... 15
5. CONNECTIONS ........... .. ............................................. 21
6. CAUTIONS IN USE . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . • . •••. • . . . • . •. . . . . . •. •. ••. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •• 26

7 .1 AC Spindle Motor Model lS . • • • . • . . . • . . • . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2 AC Spindle Motor Model l.5S ...........•...•..... ~ .....•.......•... 27
7. 3 AC Spindle Motor Model 2S . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . 28
7.4 AC Spindle Motor Model 3S ..•••.•...•••..•...•.. . ••..•..••..• . ....• 29
7. 5 AC Spindle Motor Model 6S . . . • . • . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . 30
7.6 AC Spindle Motor Model 8S ....•••....................•........•.... 31
7. 7 AC Spindle Motor Model 12S, 15S . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 32
7 .8 AC Spindle Motor Model 18S, 22S . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.9 AC Spindle Motor Model lS/15000 (Flange type) .........•.......•... 34
7.10 AC Spindle Motor Model 2S/15000 (Flange type) .....•.... . ..•... • ... 34
7.11 AC Spindle Motor Model .3S/12000 (Flange type) .......•...•.•••.•.•. 35
7 .12 AC Spindle Motor Model 6S/12000 (Flange type) .••........•......... 35
7.13 AC Spindle Motor Model 8S/8000 (Flange type) •.................•... 36
7.14 AC Spindle Motor Model 12S/8000, 15S/8000 (Flange type) •........•. 36
7.15 AC Spindle Motor Model 18S/6000, 22S/6000 (Flange type) ...... .. .•. 37
II. AC SPINDLE SERVO UNITS series
1. GENERAL . . • . • . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2. FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • . . . . . • . • . . . . • . . . • • • . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • 41
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER .......••...•.•.. 42

3.1 Models lS - 3S . • • • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 42
3.2 Models 6S - 22S •.••....•..••..••.•••. • .•....... • •.•.....••...... . • 43
3.3 Order Specification Drawing Number . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.3.1 Models 1S - 3S, Model 1S/15000, Model 2S/15000
(high-speed model) •.•••.••••.••..•...••.••..•...•••. ,'. . . . . . . . . 44
3.3.2 Models 6S - 22S, Models 3S/12000 - 22S/6000
(high-speed model) . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4. SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . . • . • . • • • . . • . . . 47

4. 1 Specifications • • . • . • • . . . . • . . . • . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • • . . . . • • . . . • 47
4.2 Major Component Functions and Application .....•.........•.. • .•.... 49
4. 2. 1 Spindle control unit . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • . • • . • • . . . . • . • . • . • . . . . • . • • • 49
4.2.2 Resistance unit (Models lS - 3S) .•...••.•••••.....••.•.•..•••• 52
4.2 .3 Resistor unit selection standard ..•••.•.. ••• .•••.•...•... •. ... 53
4 . 2.4 Types of connectors ... . ..••. .•••• ..•••..••...•••... • .........• 56
4.2.5 Fuse ... . .. .......•. •.. . •... ....... . .....•........• . ••... ...... 58
4.2.6 Spindle orientation control circuit (option) .. • ..•..••.• ••••. • 58
4 . 2 .7 Speed gain switching circuit (option for Models 6S - 22S) ..... 58
4 . 2.8 Power transformer (option) .......•.••••.•...•.•.••..••• •• ..•. • 58
4.2.9 Unit adaptor (option only for models 6S - 22S) •·····••:···•··· 61
5• INSTALLATION ••.•.......•..•.•.•••.•••...••...•.....•...•.......•..... 62
5 .1 Environmental Conditions ..... .. ....•......•.•... • .. .•••• .•..•..... 62
5 .1.1 Ambient temperature ...••............•••...••••••.•.•..••••.... 62
5 . 1 . 2 Humidity .....•...•.•...•....•.•...•.••••..•••.•..•••.•...•.•.. 62
5 .1. 3 Vibration...-:' .............•..........•.........•.•..•..• . .••..... 62
5. l . 4 Atmosphere ...•...•.....•.....•....•••.•.•••..••....•.•..•....• 62
5. 2 Input Power and Grounding ..•••..•.•.•...••..•....•••..••.....•.... 62
6. UNIT CALORIFIC VALUE •.. . • ............... . .... .•• .•. .. .. .....• . . ... ... 64
6 .1 Calorific Value of the AC Spindle Servo Unit • •..•..•.... . .. • ..... . 64
7. COOLING •........•.......•...•........... . ...... .....•. .•....•..•. .•. . 65

7 .1 AC Spindle Servo Unit . .......... . .. .•. ..•. •..• ... .. •...•...... . •.. 65
7.2 Cooling the Resistor Unit (Models lS - 3S, Model lS/15000,
Model 2S/ 15000) .... .... ... . .....•. . •....•.. . ••..••.••...•......... 67
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND MAINTENANCE AREA •....•.•..............•. . . ... 68

8. 1 External Dimensions •.•• .. .• . . ..•.•......•.•....•... •••••.. .•.. . ... 68
8.1.1 AC spindle servo unit models lS - 3S, model 1S/15000,
model 2S/15000 (orientation using position coder) ............ . 68
8.1. 2 AC spindle servo unit models lS - 3S, model 1S/15000,
model 2S/15000 (orientation using magnetic sensor) •• .• •• .....• 69
8 . 1. 3 Resistor unit (order specification: A06B-6052-K050) .••.....•.. 70
8 .1. 4 Connector ................ ... .. ........... .. ....... .... .... . . . . 70
8 .1. 5 AC line filter (order specification: A81L- 0001-0083/3C) ...... . 71
8 .1. 6 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, 8S, 12S, model 3S/12000,
6S/ 12000, 8S/8000, 12S/8000, model 8P, 12P, 15P, 18P,
model 8VH (with unit adaptor) .•••• •.•...•••............... . . . . 72
8 . 1. 7 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, 8S, 12S, model 3S/12000,
6S/12000, 8S/8000, 12S/8000, model 8P, 12P, 15P, 18P,
model 8VH (without unit adaptor) •...•...••....•....•.•...•.... 73
8 . 1.8 AC spindle servo unit model 15S, 18S, 22S, model 15S/8000,
18S/6000, 22S/6000, model 22P , 30P, 40P, model 12VH
(with unit adaptor) . .. • ... .. .....• ••.• . .•• .. ••..... .. • .. ·.• • ... 74
8.1. 9 AC spindle servo unit model 15S, 18S, 22S, model 15S/8000,
18S/6000, 22S/6000, model 22P, 30P, model 12VH
(without unit adap tor) .... . ...... .•. .. . • .•...•.•....... . ..• . .. 76
8.1.10 Unit adaptor (models 6S - 12S , order specification:
A06B- 6059- K031) .•..................•...•........•...•......... 78
8.1.11 Unit adaptor (models 15S - 22S, order specification :
A06B-6059-K032) .... •.. ... .•.• •.•.•......•.....•.•............. 80
8 .1. 12 Power transformer, models 1S - 3S (order specification:
A06B-6052-J001) .• ... . ......• . .. ••. ........•.....•. .• .. ...•. ... 82
8 . 1.13 Power transformer, models 6S, 8S (ord~r specification: _
A06B-6044-J006) .••.....• . • . •.. ..... ...• ... •..•.•....•••. .•• . .• 83
8 . 1.14 Power transformer, models 12S, 15S (order specification:
A06B- 6044- J007) • • • . • . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • . • . . . • • . . • • • • . . . . . . • • . • . • . • 84
8.1.15 Power transformer for Models 18S, 22S (order specification:
A06B-6044-JO 10) .•.. ..•.. ••...••......•..••. . .•...•••.......•.•- 85
8. 2 Maintenance Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8,2,1 AC spindle servo unit models 1S, 1.5S, 2S, 3S, 1S/15000,
2S/15000 (orientation using position coder) ..•..•.•.••••..•••• 86
8,2,2 AC spindle servo unit models 1S, 1.5S, 2S, 3S, lS/15000,
2S/15000 (orientation using magnetic sensor) •••••••.••.•...••. 87
8.2.3 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, BS, 12S, model 3S/12000,
6S/12000, 8S/8000, 12S/8000, model 8P, 12P, 15P, 18P,
model 8VH (with unit adaptor) • . • . • . . . • • • • • . . • • . . . • • • • . . • . . • . • • 88
8.2.4 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, BS, 12S, model 3S/12000,
6S/12000, 8S/8000, 12S/8000, model 8P, 12P, 15P, 18P,
model 8VH (without unit adaptor) ••.•..•.•••••••....•••••..•..• 89
8.2.5 AC spindle servo unit model 15S, 18S, 22S, model 15S/8000,
18S/6000, 22S/6000, model 22P, 30P, model 12VH
(with unit adaptor) •.••••.•... , , •• , • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 90
lBS/6000, 22S/6000, model 22P, 30P, 40P, model 12VH
(without unit adaptor) •...•..•••...••••••.•.•..•.•...•..•.•.•• 91
8.3 Panel Hole Machining Diagram and Mounting ..•.•••••••••...•.•....•. 92
8.3.1 AC spindle servo unit model lS, l.5S, 2S, 3S, model lS/15000,
2s/ 15 ooo •••••.•..•.•.••..••••••••.••••••••.•.••••• ·• • • • . • • • • • • • 92
6S/12000, BS/8000, 12S/8000, model 8P, 12P, 15P, 18P,
model 8VII . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 93
lBS/6000, 22S/6000, model 22P, 30P, 40P, model 12VH .•..••••••• 94
9. CONNECTION •....•...•.....••......•........ , ••...•• , •••.•...•.••.•...• 95

9 .1 Connection Diagram ...•.•.•.•.................•.•.••...•.••..•••••• 95
9.1.1 Models lS - 3S, lS/15000, 2S/15000 ...•••......•.••.•••.••••.•• 95
9.1.2 Models 6S - 22S, 3S/12000 - 22S/6000, 8P - 40P, 8VH, 12VH .•.•. 96
9.2 Cable Routing .•........••••••••..................• . ••..•••.•...... 97
9.2.1 Cable routing diagram of models lS - 3S, lS/15000, 2S/15000 . .. 97
9.2.2 Cable routing diagram of models 6S - 12S, 3S/12000, 6S/12000,
BS/8000, 12S/8000, BP, 12P, 15P, 8VH ..•••.•.•••••••.•......•.• 98
9.2.3 Cable routing diagram of models 15S - 22S, 15S/8000,
18S/6000, 22S/6000, 22P, 30P, 40P, 12VH •••...•.•....••••...••• 99
9, 3 Detailed Connection Diagram , •••• , •••••.••..•••••••...•.•......•• , . 100
9. 3 .1 Connection of power source ••.....•....•...•..•.. . • . .....•.•••• 100
9.3.2 Connection of AC spindle servo unit and magnetics cabinet .•... 102
9.3.3 Connection of AC spindle servo unit and AC spindle motor ..•••• 108
9.3.4 Connecting AC spindle servo unit with unit adaptor
(Models 6S - 22S) .•...•....•...•••....•...••••.•....•..•..•••. 110
9.3.5 Connection of AC spindle servo unit and resistor unit •....•.•. 112
10. DESCRIPTIONS OF INTERFACE SIGNAL ••••.•.•....•••.•..•.••••.••.••••• •• 114

10. 1 Interface Signal Standards .••••••••.•..••••••••.•...•........•.•. 114
10 .2 Spindle Control Signals .•.•.•...•• •. •• . ••.•••••........•.•••..••• 116
10.2.1 Emergency stop signal (ESPl, 2) •••••••••..•.••.••..•.••..•... 116
10.2.2 Machine ready signal (MRDYl, 2) .............................. 117
10. 2. 3 Forward rotation command signal (SFR) .••....•.•..••••••..•••• 119
10.2.4 Reverse rotation command signal (SRV) •••..•.•.•.•.•..•••••••. 119
10.2.5 Analog voltage signal (DA2, E) • •••••.•.•.•..••••••••.. •. ..... 120
10 • 2 • 6 +15 V power ( +15V, E) . . . . . . • . • . • . • . • . . . . • . • . . • . • • • • • • • • • . . • . . • 121
10.2.7 Spindle rotation speed override (OVRl, OVR2) •.•...•..•••••.•• 121
10.2.8 Torque limit command signals (TLMl, TLML, TLMH, OT) •••••••••• 123
10. 2. 9 Alarm reset signals (ARSTl, 2) .............................. . 124
10.3 Orientation Signal (ORCMl, 2) ..•••.•.•..••...•.••.....••.•.••••• 124
10.4 Spindle Control Output Signals ••••.••••.•.•••••.••..••.•..•..•.•• 124
10.4.1 Speed arrival signals (SARI, 2) ••...•••••••.••••..•...••.•... 124
10.4.2 Zero-speed detecting signals (SSTl, 2) .•••••...•••••...•.••.. 127
10.4.3 Speed detecting signals (SDTl, 2) ..•.•.•••.•••....•...••••... 127
10.4.4 Load detection signal (LTDl, 2) ...••...•••...••.•.••••...•••. 129
10.4.5 Spindle alarm signals (ALMl, 2) .•.•••.••.•.•.•.••...•••••.... 129
10.5 Alarm Content Signals (ALB, AL4, AL2, ALl) ••••.•••••...•.... . .•.• 131
10.6 Speed Indication Voltage Signal (SMl, OM) •••.•.•.•.....•••.•..••• 134
10.7 Load Indication Voltage (LMl, OM) •.••.•.••.••..•.•••...•..•...... 135
11. RIGID TAPPING ....................................................... 138
III. AC SPINDLE MOTOR P series
1. GENERAL ............................. .................... ........... . 141

2. FEATURES ....... .. .................................................... 141
3. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • • . • . . • . • • . . . . • . 14 2
4. OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS ....••.•.••••.•.•...•....•.•.•.•... . .......•.•. 143
5. ORDER SPECIFICATIONS . . . • . • • • . . • • • . • • . • . • . • . • • . • • • . • • . . • . • • • . • . . • . • . . 14 7
5.1 AC Spindle Motor •......•••••..•••••.••.•.•...• . ••••.....•.•....•.• 147
5. 2 AC Spindle Servo Unit . . . . • . . . • • • • • • . . . . . . • . . . . . • • • • . • . . . • . . . . . • . . • 150
6. CONNECTIONS .......................................................... 152
7. PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO USE . . . . . . . . • • • . . • • • . • . • . . . . . . . • • . • . • • • . . . . . . . . 153
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS .•..•••••••..•.•.. . • • .•••••.•.•.•..•..••••... •. ... 154

8 .1 AC Sp ind le Mo tor Model BP • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 154
8.2 AC Spindle Motor Model 12P, 15P ..•••...•.•....•.•...•..•••........ 155
8.3 AC Spindle Motor Model 18P, 22P ..•.. . •.•..•.........••••.•.....•.. 156
8.4 AC Spindle Motor Model 30P, 40P ....•••.•.••••.•.. . •••.•.•••....... 157
8.5 AC Spindle Motor Model SOP (Foot Mounting Type) •••...........•.•.. 158
8. 6 AC Spindle Servo Unit •••.....•......•.••••...•.•....•••••...••..•. 158
IV. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR VH series
GENERAL e ♦ ■ ■ ■ • ♦ a a I ♦ ■ ■ a • ■ ♦ ♦ a • ♦ • ♦ ■ ♦ ■ ■ a ■ a ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ■ ♦ ■ ♦ • ♦ a ■ ■ ♦ ■ e ■ ■ • ♦ • • ♦ e I ♦ ■ a a ■ e 161
2. FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 161
3. SPEC I FI CATIONS . • . • • • . • • • • . . . • . • . . • • • . • • • • • • • • . . . • . . . . . • . . • • • . • . . • . . • . 162

3 .1 Specification Table . • . • • . • . . . . . . . • • • • . . . • • • • . . . . . • . • . • • . . • • • • . • . • . 162
3 .1. 1 AC spindle motor VH series . . • . • . . . . . • • • . . • • . . • . • . . . • . • • . • . . . . . 162
3.1.2 AC spindle servo unit VH series ...•...•••..•...•.••.....•••... 163
3.1.3 Miscellaneous ...•••.•••• •• .•....•••.•.•.••••...•....•••..••.•. 163
3. 2 Oil Air Lubrication Conditions .................................... 164
3.3 Motor Cooling Conditions •••.••.• •• ...••.•.•••.••...•...•••.••••.•• 164
3.4 Reference Drawing for Piping Parts ...•••••..•.••.......•• •. . . ..•.. 164
3.5 Output ,_Charac teristics •••...•....... . •.••.•...••..... • .•......•••. 165
4. ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER .....•.••••• . ..•••.•...•.. •..••. ••• 166

4 .1 AC Spindle Motor .•••••..•...••••.•..•.•• • •••.•••••.....••.•••.•.• 166
4. 2 AC Spindle Servo Unit . • . . . • • . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . • • • . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . 166
5. OUTER DIMENSIONS . . • . • . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • • • . . . . • . • • • . . . • 16 7
5. 1 AC Spindle Motor . • • • . • . • • • • • . • • . • • • . • • • • • . . . . . • . • . • • . • . • . • . . . . . • • 16 7
5.1.1 Model 6VH (liquid cooling type) .••••.•.• ...• ...••••.••. • .•••.. 167
5.1.2 Model 8VH (liquid cooling type) ...•••.•......•.•••.•••••...... 167
5.1.3 Model 12VH (liquid cooling type) •.•••..•........• • ............ 168
V. SPINDLE ORIENTATION
1. GENERAL • • • • . . . . . . . . . . . • . • • . . . . . . • • . . . . . . • . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • 1 71
2• FEATURES . . • • . . . . . . • . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . • . .,.. . • . . . . . . • . • . . . . • . . . . 1 71
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION • . . . . • . . • . . . • • . • . • . . . . . . . . . • • • . • 17 2

3.1 Position Coder Type (Stop Position Internal Setting) ......•.•....• 172
3.2 Position Coder Type (Stop Position External Command) ••.•.•....• . .• 172
3.3 Magnetic Sensor Type .•.•.•...••.•••.•.•• ••......• ... .•.•. .. • •..... 173
3. 4 Order Specification Drawing Number • . • . . . • . • . • • . • • . . . . • . • . . . • • . • . . . 174
3.4 . 1 For models lS - 3S .•..••••.•..••...••..••••.•.•••.•..•.•...•.. 174
3. 4. 2 For models 6S - 22S . . • • . • • • • . • . • . • . • • . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . 17 6
3.4.3 Built-in sensor signal conversion. circuit •..•........ • ...••... 177
4. SPECIFICATIONS •.••••..••••.•.•..••.•.• . . .• ••••....•.... ..•.....• .•.. . 178

4 .1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 8
4.2 Specifications .......•••.••.•••.. .•.••.•. ••... . ••.••. • .••.....•. • . 180
4.2.1 Position coder system .••.•..•.•• •. •.•..•..•....•.••••......•.. 180
4.2.2 Magnetic sensor system .•.•.••.•.•... • .•••......•.•••.•.•••..•. 182
5. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS •....•••.••.•••..•...•....•••...• .• .. . ••••. ~ . . . . . . 184

5.1 Orientation Control PCB••••••·••·•··••·••••• • ·•·······•••·· ••· ····· 184
5.1.1 Models lS - 3S (position coder) ..•.••.......• .....• .• •.• ••.... 184
5.1.2 Models lS - 3S (magnetic sensor) .••..••.•........... . .•..•...• 184
5.1.3 Models 6S - 22S .•.•....•...........•...•.....••••...•........• 185
5. 2 Position Coder ••...•. • •••.••.•••.......•.•..••••.•....•.....••.... 185
5.2.1 Position coder C, D, G (with 160 x 160 flange) ........... . •.•. 185
5.2.2 Position coder E, F, H (without flange) ... ••... •........•..... 186
5 . 2.3 Position coder J, K, L (with 68 x 68 flange) ... • ••...•.••..•.. 186
5. 3 Magnetic Sensor ..••..••••....•.• ..• ••......... •. . . .•..........• . .. 187
5. 3. 1 Types of magnetic sensor • . • • • . . • . . . . . • . • . • • • . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . 18 7
5.3.2 Magnetizing element ••..•.•... •. ••..•.••.•...•....••......••... 188
5.3.3 Magnetic sensor .• .•............•.•.•.•....• • .••............ •. . 191
5.3.4 Precautions on use •.•..•...•••.•.••....•.......••.....•...••.. 191
6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM • • . • • • . • . . . . • . • • • . • . • . . . . . • . . . . • • . • . . . • • . . . . . . . • . . • 19 2
6 . 1 Interface (For position coder) ••.••..•.•.•.•••.•.....•.. •. • . ..•. • . 192
6 . 1.1 Connection when synchronous feed position coder is
concurrently used for lathes and machining centers ....•••... •. 193
6.1.2 Connection for machining center spindle orientation only
(No connection to NC) ............. . ....... . ................... 194
6.1.3 Stop position external command connection ..• . ..•.•......•..... 195
6.2 Interface (For magnetic sensor) ••.••..•.•.....••••••.•.•.•.••....• 196
6 .2.1 Magnetic sensor connection •.•.... . ••••....•......• . •.••••••... 197
I
7. INTERFACE SIGNALS • . . . . • • • . . . • . • . . . . . • . • • • • • . . • . • . . . . . . . • . . . . • • • • . . • . • 198
7.1 Description of Signals (up to 2-stage speed change gear spindle) •. 198
7 .1.1 Orientation command signal (ORCMl, 2) •. . .•••.•........ • ••.••.. 198
7 .1. 2 Orientation completion signal (ORARl, 2) •••..........•..•••••. 199
7 . 1.3 Spi ndle high-speed/low-speed signal (CTH) • •. ..••.•••..•••• •• •. 200
7.2 Description of Signals (When 3-stage speed change gear spindle) •. . 200
7. 2 .1 Spindle medium speed signal (CTM) •.••.•••••.•.••••••...•...•.. 201
7. 3 Sequences . . • . . . • • . . • . . • . . • • • . . • • • • . . . • • . • • . . . . . • • . • • • . . • . • . • . . . . . . 201
7. 3 . 1 Orientation command while stopping . .• .•. ••.••••..••..•••....•• 201
7.3.2 Orientation command during high-speed rotation •..••..•••.••••. 202
7 . 4 Descrip tion of Signals (Stop Position External Command Type of
Position Coder System) .....••...•...•..........•.•....•...•.. . ..• 203
7.4.1 Stop position command signals (HOl to Hl2-0L) .....• . .•. . ... ... 203
8. DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS . • . . • . . • • • . . • • . . • . • • • . . . • . • . • . • • . . . • • . . • . . • • . . 205

8. 1 Position Coder . . • • • . • . • • • • • . . • . • . . . • • . . • • . . . • . • • . . • • • • • . . • • . • • . • • • 205
8. 2 Magnetic Sensor • • . • . . . • . . • • . . . • • . • • . . • • . • • • • . . . • . • . . . • . . • . . . • • . . • . 207
9. TWO-MAGNETIC SENSOR ORIENTATION . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . 215

9 .1 General .... . ...•.•. .• ..••... •..• ..•• • ... ••.. •.... .••• ••. ...•• . ••.• 215
9.2 Configuration ............... . .............................. . . ..... 215
9. 3 Change-over Circuit . . • . • . • • • • • • • • • • . • . • • • . • • . • • • • . • • . • • . . • . . . • . . . . 216
9 . 3.l Selection signal of magnetic sensor (SB signal) ••• •• . .• .•. . .•. 216
9 . 3 . 2 Signal change-over relay . . • . • . • • • . . . • • . . . • • • . . • • . • . . . . . . . . • . . . 216
9.4 Fine Adjustment for Stop Position .......... . ..••..••••.•..•..••.•. 217
VI. SPEED GAIN SWITCHING CIRCUIT
1. GENERAL . •. .••..•....... .• • . • . . . • . • • . . • • . • . • . • . . • . . • . • . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . 221
2. FEATURES . . • • . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . • • . . • • . • . • . • • . . . . • • • . . • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . 221
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS • •..•••.•••••..•••..•.........• 221

3 .1 Configuration ..•...•...•••.. . .• .• .•.• ... ...• . .•••.••••.••••.. . . ••. 221
3 . 2 Order Specifications ..• •..• ...•.•.•• • .•....• •• •. . . •...•..• ••.. .. •• 22 1
4. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . • . • • • • • . . • • • • . • • • • • • . . • . • . • . • . • • • . . • . • . • . . • • • • • . . 222
5. DESCRIPTIONS OF INTERFACE SIGNALS • • . • • • . • . . . • • • . • • • . . • . . . • . . . . . . • . • . . 222

5 . 1 Forward Rotation Command Signals (SFR, OS) .•.•.••...•••...• . •...•• 222
5. 2 Orientation Command Signals (ORCMl, ORCM2) • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . • . . 222
6. OPERATION WHEN USING THE SPEED GAIN SWITCHING CIRCUIT .•••...•...•.•.• 223
6 .1 Operation at ~he Time of Stop •.......•....•.•......•.........•.•.. 223
6 . 2 Operation as from Rotating at High Speed •••...•.• .•. .......• ••.•. • 223
VII . BUILT-IN SENSOR SIGNAL CONVERSION CIRCUIT
1. GENERAL . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . • . . • . • . . . . • • • • • . • • . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . • • . . . . • . • . . 22 7
2. FEATURES . . . . . • . . . . • . . . • . • . . • . . • . . . . • . . . • . • . . . . . . . • . • • • . . • . • . . . . • . . • . . 227
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS .....••..••...•...•••••......•. 227

3 .1 Configuration ..• •. .•..••..•.••••.••••..•.•...•...•...••........... 227
3.1.1 When position coder sys tem orientation is used .•........•.•... 227
3.1.2 When position coder system orientation is not used ....•...•... 227
3 . 2 Order Specifications .••••.•.•.•.••....•......•.. •.. ..••••...•..... 228
3.2.1 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit •..••••.•.......•.... 228
3.2.2 Built-in sensor built-in type AC spindle motor ....•...•....... 228
4. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . • • . • . . • . . . • • • • . . • . • . . • • . . . • . . • . . • . . . . 229
4.1 Position Coder Output Signal •. • ....•.•.•.•...•. •. .•••.•.•.•...••.. 229
4 .1. 1 Number of detection gear teeth and output pulses •.....•....•.. 229
4.1.2 Output signal specifications (connector CN2 signal)
at constant speed of 1500 rpm •.•...••.•.•........•••..•••..•.• 229
4.1.3 Output circuit configuration ••.•••. •• ••....•....•••••.•.•...•• 230
4. 2 Input Power Source ••....•••.••••.•.•..•.••.••••••••••..•••..•....• 230
4 .3 Maximum Speed for Use ..••..•..•..••..•.••••.•••.••.•.••••••••.•... 230
4. 4 Temperature Range for Use . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . . • . • • . • . 230
5. ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • . . . • . • . • • • • • • . • • • • . • . • . . • • • • • . • • . . . . . • • . . . • • 231
5.1 Configuration of Output Signal (Speed Detection Signal) •...•.••••• 231
5.2 Offset Adjustment (Position Detection Signal) •••....•••..•.•.••••. 231
5. 3 Example of Wave Pattern ......••••••.••...•.•.••..•..•• ... ..•.. . .•. 231
6. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND EXAMPLE OF MOUNTING .•...•••••••••••••.••.•.•• - 232

6.1 Built-in Sensor Signal Conversion Circuit •.•.•.•••.•••...•..•.•.•• 232
6.2 Built-in Sensor Built-in Type AC Spindle Motor ....•......•....•.•. 232
6. 3 Example of Mounting . . • • . . • . . . . . . • . • • • • . • . • • • . • . . . . . . • • • • . • . • . . . . • . 232
7. CONNECTION . • • . . . . . . . . • . • . . • • • • • • • . . . . • • • • • . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . • . . . • 233
7.1 When using Position Coder Method Orientation . • .•.•....•...•.•..•.• 233
7.2 When not using Position Coder Method Orientation ....•••........•.• 233
7.3 Details of Connection between Each Unit .....•.•••••••..........•.. 234
7.3.1 Built-in sensor and connector (Motor) (Cable symbol: KIO) ..... 234
7.3.2 Motor and built-in sensor signal conversion circuit
(Cable symbol: Kll) .•.•••.••...•.•.••.•...•......•....•...•... 235
7.3.3 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit and position coder
method orientation circuit (Cable symbol: K02) .•.•...•.•.....• 236
7.3.4 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit and AC spindle
servo unit (Cable symbol: K03) .....................•.••••.•. • . 237
7.3.5 Position coder method orientation circuit and NC
(Cable symbol: K04) .... . ••.•.•.•.•.••••••••.•......•.... •• ••.. 238
7.3.6 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit and NC
(Cable symbol: KOS) ...•.••........••.............••.•.•... . •• • 239
8. CABLE • . . . . . . • . • . • • . . . . • • . • . • . . . . • . • . • . . . . . . • . • • . . • • . . . • • • . . . . . . • . . • • • 240
8. 1 List of Cables . • . • • • • • • • . • • • . . • . • . . . . . . • . • . • • • • • . . • . • • . • . . • • . . . . • 240
8,2 Details of the Cable (KIO) ••••• • ...•••.•..•.......••••.••••••••••. 241
9. NOTE ................................................................. 243
VIII. OUTPUT CONVERSION CONTROL
1. GENERAL ... .. ...................... ........... ....................... 251
2. COMPONENTS AND ORDER DRAWING NUMBER ••••.•••••••••.••..•••••.•••••••.. 251

2 .1 Components ........................................................ 251
2. 2 Order Drawing Number ••..•••••.•..••..••••.• ••. .•••••.•.•••••• ••• .• 251
3. SPECIFICATIONS . • • . • . . . • • • • • • • • • • . . • • • • • . . . • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • . • . . . • • . . • . . 252
4• EXTERNAL DRAWING . • • • • • • • • . • • . . • • • • • . • • . . . . • • . • • • . . . • • • • • • • • • • • . . . . . . . 25 3
4.1 AC Spindle Servo Unit S Series (when an output switching control
circuit is mounted) ••••••...••••••••.•.••...•...•••• • •.•.•.••••.•• 253
4.1.1 AC spindle servo unit models 6S - 12S
(without unit adaptor) ...•..•...••.•••..•.....•.•...•...•.•••• 253
4.1.2 AC spindle servo unit models 15S - 22S
(without unit adaptor) ...••••...•••••••.•••.•.....••.•.•.••••. 254
4.1.3 Outline drawing of the output conversion control circuit ..•.. . 255
5. INSTALLATION 255
6. CONNECTION . . . . . . . • • . . . • . • • . . . • • . • . • • • . • . . . . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . • • . • . . . . . . . . 25 6
6 .1 a) Connection Diagram (Type A) • • • • • • • • . • • . • • • . • • • • . • . • • • • • • . • . • . • . 256
6.1 b) Connection Diagram (Type B) .•••••.••••••.•• •• ••••.••••.•••.•••. 257
6. 2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
7. EXPLANATION OF INTERFACE SIGNAL . • • • • . • • • • . • • • . • • • . • • • • . • • • . • • • . • • . . . . 259

7 .1 Input Signals • •••••••.••• • .•••..••. ••• .. • .••••••.•.•••..••.••... • . 259
7.1.1 Conversion demand signal (SELl, 2) .••.•.•••.••.•.•••••••.••... 259
7.1.2 Power cable status confirmation signal (MCFl, 2) •.•.•....•••.• 259
7. 2 Output Signals . . • • . • . . . . . • . . • . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . • • • . • . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . 260
7.2.1 Speed detection signal (SDTl, 2) .•..•.. .• . •.•..• .•.•.••... .•.• 260
7. 2. 2 Power cable conversion signal (CHPl, 2) .•.•.•..••.•..•.•.•.... 260
7.2.3 Conversion completion signal (CFINl, 2) ....••.. .. ....•.....• . . 261
8. SEQUENCE . . • . • . • . . . . . . . • . . . • • . • . • • . . • • • . . • • . . . • . • . • . . . • • . • . . . . . • . . . . • . 262
8.1 Low-speed Output (LOW) - High-speed Output (HIGH) •.•.•.•...••••••. 262
8.2 High-speed Output (HIGH) - Low-speed Output (LOW) ••..... . •..•.•... 263
9. EXAMPLE CONNECTION FOR THE ELECTROMAGNETIC CONTACTOR SWITCHING

CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10. PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO USE ........................................... 265
IX. SPINDLE SWITCHING CONTROL CIRCUIT
1. OUTLINE . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION •••....•.•.•.•.••.•.....•....••. 269

2 .1 Configuration ....•.•.••• . .• •....••••..•..•..•..••..•..••••.••.•..•• 269
2 . 2 Order Specification ••• • .• •• .•.•..•••.• •. .•.•.• ••• . •.• ...••. .•• ...• 270
3. SPECIFICATIONS .•.•....•.••...•.. : • • • . • . • • . . • . • • • • . • • • • . • . • . • . . • • • . . . • 2 71
4. OUTER DIMENSIONS •..•...•••.•••••••...••...•.......••.......••........ 272

4.1 Spindle Switching Control Circuit ..•..•••.......•....•...•...•...• 272
5. CONNECTIONS • • •....•.•.•. . ............•....•........•......•.•...•.•.. 273

5.1 Connections .............. .. ........................... ...... ...... 273
5.2 Signal Distribution .••...•..••.•••.•.•....•.••••••..••..••...••..• 274
6. INTERFACE . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . • . • . . . . . • . . . . . 2 7 5
6. 1 Input Signal • • • . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . • • . . . . . • . . • . . • • . . . • • . • • . • • . • • • . • • • 2 75
6 . 1.1 Selector demand signals (SELl, 2) •.•..•••.••..••.•.•.•..•. • ••. 275
6.1.2 Power line status confirmation signals (MCFl, 2) ••.•.•.•.••••. 275
6. 2 Output Signals • •.•.•• • ••..••..•.••••••. •.•.•..• ...• .•.••..• ....... 276
6. 2 .1 Power line selector signal (CHPl, 2) .......................... 276
6 . 2 . 2 Sele ctor completion signal (CFINl, 2) .•.•...•...•....•.•.••.•. 276
7• SEQUENCE . . . . . . • • . . . • . . . • . • . . . • • • . • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • . . • . • . • . . . . . . 2 7 7
8. IMPORTANT POINTS FOR USING SPINDLE SELECTION CONTROL •..••..•.......•. 278

APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 281
APPENDIX 2 TECHNICAL DATA • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 286
APPENDIX 3 EXAMPLE OF COOLING FAN MOTOR OF UNIT

(Used in July, 1990 or earlier) •...•••.••••.•.•.•...•..•••.•. 323
APPENDIX 4 GROUNDING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 324

I. Ac SPINDLE MOTOR S series
1. GENERAL
The FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR S series have been specially developed as highly
reliable and high-performance variable-speed AC spindle motors for the most
advanced CNC machine tools. By using the new stator cooling system which
directly cools the electromagnetic steel sheet, the compact FANUC AC spindle
motor allows high power output and high-speed revolution.
2. FEATURES
Based on the long-time field experience as the spindle motors for CNC machine
tools and accumulated technologies, the FANUC AC spindle motor S series have a
variety of excellent features as shown below.
1) The motor is compact, light-weight and furnished with digital control for
much higher performance.
2) The rotor inertia of the AC spindle motor is made smaller to shorten the
acceleration/deceleration speed. Further, optimum control enables highly
efficient cutting.
3) The motor incorporating the position coder required for synchronous feed of
·the spindle and Z axis and machining rigid tapping can be used.
4) Improvement in machining of the motor housing enhances the accuracy of the
mounting part. And improvement of the cooling fan motor and that of the
sealing structure of the housing enhance the reliability and
environment-proof characteristics.
- 3 -
3. SPECIFICATION
3.1 Specifications
1) AC spindle motor S series
Table 3, 1 (al Specification Table
:------__:els 15 1.55 25 35 65 85 125 155 185 225

It
Continuous rated kW 1. 5 1. 1 ·2. 2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22

output (*l) (HP) (2 . 0) ( I. 5) (J. 0) (5 . 0) (7.4) (10) (14 . 7) ( 20 . 1) (211,8) (29.5)
..
Output 30-minute rated (* l ) kW 2.2 3.7 J. 7 5 .5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 26
power (15-minute rated)(*3)(!1P) (3.0) (5. O) (5.0) (7 .4 ) (10) (14 . 7) (20,1) (24 . 8) (29.5) (34 .9)
50% ED rated kW 2,2 3.7 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18,5 22 26

output (*1,*2) (HP) (3.0) (5 .O) (5.0) (7.4) (10) (14 . 7) (20, 1) (24.8) (29.5) (34 . 9)
Base speed rpm 3 , 000 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500
Rotating
speed 4,500 4,500 4,500
Maximum speed rpm 8,000 8,000 8,000 6,000 6 ,000 4,500 4,500
6,000 6,000 6 , 000
Output torque 47,7
(Continuous rated torque N.m 4. 77 6.82 14.0 23 .5 35.0 70 95.4 117. 7 140
(kg.cm) (49) (69). (143) (240) (357) (487) (714) (974) ( 1201) (1428)
at constant torque range)
GD 2 kg.m 2 0.012 0.017 0.031 0 . 059 0.086 0.11 0.36 0.36 0.51 0.51
N.m.sec 2 0.003 0.004 -0.0082 0,015 0.022 0.027 0.091 0,091 0 . 126 0. 126
Rotor inertia
(kg.cm.-se~ 2 ) (0. 03) (0 . 04) (0.08) (0.15) (0 . 22) (0 . 28) (0.93) (0.93) (1. 29) (1. 29)
Weight kg 18 24 27 46 60 BO 110 110 143 143
Cooling system To t ally enclosed fan cooled
Installation The output shaft should be horizontal or vertically down\lard.
Allowable overload capacity

120% of 30 minute-rating
(1 min.)
Insulation Class F
Ambient tempera ture 0 - 4o•c
Vibrations VS
Noise 75 dB (A)
Painting color Munsell system N2.5
Accessories Pulse generator and thermostat
' (*!) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200V/220V/2 30VAC).If the input voltage
fluctuates, it is possible that the rated output cannot be obtained even when such fluctuations are
within the allo\lable fluctuation range .
(*2) The cycle time is 10 minutes, 50% ED: ON 5 min, OFF 5 min. For model 1.55: 30% ED, ON 3 min, OFF 7 min .
(*3) For models 15 and 25 data is in IS-minute rated output. For model 1. 55 data is in 10-minute rated
output.
- 4 -
2) AC spindle motor S series (high-speed model)
Table 3.1 (bl Specification Table
Models 15/ 25/ 35/ 65/ BS/ 125/ 155/ 185/ 225/
Items 15000 15000 12000 12000 8000 8000 8000 6000 6000
Continuous rated kW 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18,5 22

output (*l) (HP) (2.0) (3 , 0) (5.0) (7 . 4) (10) (14. 7) (20 .1) (24. 8) (29.5)
30-minute rated kW 2.2 3. 7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18 . 5 22 26

Output (15-minute rated) (HP) (3.0) (5 .0) (7.4) ( 10) (14.7) (20 . l) (24 . 8) (29.5) (34.9)
(*l, *2, *5)
50% ED rated out- kW 2. 2 3 .7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 26

put (* l, *2, *5) (HP) (3.0) (5 .O) (7. 4) (10) (14. 7) (20 .1) (24 . 8) (29.5) (34.9)
Base speed rpm 3000 3000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
Rotation
speed Maximum speed rpm 15000 15000 12000 12000 8000 8000 8000 6000 6000
Output torque (*6) N.m 4. 77 7 23.5 35 . 0 47. 7 70 95.4 117. 7 140

(kg.cm) (49) (71. 4) (240) (357) (487) (714) (974) (1201) (1428)
GD2 kg.m2 0.012 0.031 0.059 0.086 0.11 0.36 0.36 0.51 0.51
N.m.sec 2 0.003 0 . 008 0.015 0.022 0 . 027 0 . 091 0 . 091 0 . 126 0 . 126
Rot or inertia (kg. cm. sec 2) (0 .03) (0 . 08) (0.15) (0.22) (0.28) (0. 93) (0.93) (1.29) (1 .29)
Weight kg 18 27 46 60 80 110 110 143 143
Allowable radial load kg 40 50 100 150 200 250 450
Vibration vs
Noise 75 dB
Cooling system Totally enclosed outer fan type
Cooling fan 56 W 68 W
Installation The output s haft should be horizontal or vertically downward .
Allowable overload capacity

120% of 30-min. rating
(for l min , )
Insulation Class F
Ambient temperature 0 - 40"C
Accessories Pulse generator, thermostat
No. of built-in sensor pulses

(optional) 512 p/rev 1024 p/rev
Bearing lubrica tion Grease
(* l) The rated output is guarant eed at t he rated input voltage (200V/220V/230V AC) . If the i nput voltage
fluctuates, it is possible that the r ated output cannot be obtained even when such fluctuations are
within the allowable fluctuation range .
(*2) Models 15 and 2S are 15-min. rated.
(*3) With a cycle time of 10 minutes and 50% ED : the ON period will be 5 min. and the OFF period 5 min.
(*4) The servo unit is not equipped with the cooling fan for the radiator.
(*5) Guaranteed when separately stipulated thermal conditions for the servo uni t are satisfied.
(*6) Output torque is expressed as "Continuous rated torque in the rated torque range."
- 5 -
3.2 Output/Torque Characteristics
1) S series
MODEL 1S
Output Torque
kW kg•m
1.0
2.5 I 0.8
2.2kW
I/ I \
15 min, 50% ED operating zone 0.6
I/ 15 min, 50% ED
operating zone
'\
I l.SkW I
I'--_ ~ ~
1.5
I
IV \ I I
Continuous
0.4 .... ...____
0.5
/1/
I/
operating zone
0.2 - Continuous
operating zone
I I I
I' ........_
-- r--.
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 rpm
Motor speed Motor speed
MODEL 1.5S
Output Torque
kW
kg.m
4 .---..---.---,-----,--~-----.---, 3.---..--~--r-----.--.---..--~-~
3.7 kW
IO min, 30% ED operating zone

3 1----H'---+-- -l------11---1----!--->J..-----I
2.2kW ·
I.I kW
Continuous operating zone
0 I 000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 BOOOrpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 BOOOrpm
MODEL 2S
Output Torque
kW kg,m
3 .---,----,---r-----.--,---..-- ~---,
3.7kW
15 min, 50% E
3 1---++-+-opernting zone -!---+-----1-- 1
I 2
2.2kW
1.BkW
Continuous
operating zone
Continuous · /
operating zone
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 rpm
- 6 -
MODEL 3S
Output Torque
kW kg,m
6 ~ - -r - - -~ ---r-----.-- ---.---~ 4~- - ~ - - . - - - - r -- - - - . - - ---,----,
5.SkW
30 min, 50% ED
operating zone
3.7kW
Continuous
opera ting zone
operating zone
O c__ _.,___ _..,__ __,.____ __,.____ __,.____ _ _. rpm

0 O.__ _l_0,.__0_0_ _2_0_._0_0_ _3_0.J.0_0_ _4_0.J.0_0_ _
5 --'00_0_ _6__,00~pm
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
MODEL 6S
Output Torque
kW kg-m
7.5k\V 5 ~=====+::::;-.-----,-- ---,-----,---~
30 min, 50% ED
0 perating,_z_o_n_e_,__ _-1-~..,_,
1-- -H ~ -
6 1
5.SkW
5.5kW
Continuous
operating zone
3.7kW
o.__ _ .,_____.,____ _ _,.____ _ _,.______,.____~ rpm 0 .__ _..,___ _ _,.____ __,.____ __,.____ __,___ _ __ rpm
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 0 I 000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
M ODEL 8S
Output Torque
kW kg-m
1 2,---- - - , ~ -- - ~- - - ~ - - - - r ---, 8,------,~ -- -,--- - -. - -- --r--~
1 l k\V
30 min, 50% ED ·
opera ting zone
8 1 - - - - + +- - - + - 7.5 kW + ----+--I
operating zone
rpm O0 ' - ---1--'00'-0-- - 2-0,.__0_0 _ _ _J_O.L0_0_ _ _4_ 0J.0_0_ 4....1S ori pm

1000 2000 3000 4000 4500
- 7 -
MODEL BS
Output Torque
kW kg•m
!0r---.----,r---,----,---,----.
12 - - ~-- ----,-,-k-W-----~
30 min, 50% ED
operating zone
I I
8 ,___ _.,,___ _,.__ _ 7 .5 kW - - -+---<
Continuous
operating zone
0 I 000 2000 3000 4 000 5000 6000 rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000rpm
MODEL 12S
Output Torque
kW kg•m
16~------------,.-----~
I Sk\V
10~======~====..- --,- - ---r- - - - , - -~
30 min, 50% ED
30 min, 50% ED operating zone
,___ __,__,'--_o~
p~e_ra_t_in~g_z_o_n_e_ _ _ __ _, Bt--- - - - + - -- -'M- -- - r - -- -i----i
12
I lkW
Continuou~
6 1-----1-4+---op'-e_ra_,_tin
--"'g_z_o _nc-+----+----1
Continuous
operating zone
2t------+- -- - - ; -- - - ; - - - - - i ----i
1000 2000 3000

rpm
4000 4500
o~--
0
~1000
- -- ~---~------
2000 3000
r prn
4000 4500
MODEL 12S
Output Torque
kW kg•m
20 - - - - --,--- -r-- - , - -- --,-- --, 1 2.----.- --.---r---,-----,----,
30 min, 50% ED
I 6 f - - - - + - - - 1 - 15 kW operating zone 30 min, 50% ED
opera ting zone
11 kw
7.5 kw
4500
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 rpm
- 8 -
MODEL 15S
Output Torque
kW kg•m
20.----,-----r-----.--~--.--~ 15 , - - - - . - - - - - . - - - - . - - - - . - ,
18.5 kW
30 min., 50% ED
operating zone
lSt----t-t-,rT-t---~l~STkW.:.:..._ _--+----l
Continuous
operating zone
0--------~----'-----'---'
0 1000 2000 JOOO 4000 4soorpm
0
o-----1-o~o-o---,2-,o"=o-=o---J-o....o-o---4-o..,o-o__,4soo rpm
MODEL 15S
Output Torque
kW kg-m
24 ,-----,-- ----.---,------,---, - - - - ,
30 min.,50% ED
I 8.5 kW operating zone 12t---t-----.-t---t------~=-=----;
Continuous 30 min., 50% ED
I 6 f----t--+---t 15 kW ,operating zone_ operating zone
15 kW
11 kW
4500
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 •1000 5000 6000rpm
MODEL 18S
Output Torque
25 rk~W- - - . --,3~0=-m~i-n-.,~S~O~ lta·m
%-:E=D- -- - , - - , lSr- -- , -- - - , - - -- , -- - -,---,
operating zone 22 kw
Continuous
operating zone
o,.__ ___._____._____.____....____.
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500r,rn 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 rpm
- 9 -
MODEL 22S
Output Torque
30~k_W_ _- - r - - - - - , - - - - - - r - - - - - , - - - , 20rka~•-m_ _r - - - . , . . . - - - - , - - - - - r - - - ,
30 min., 50% ED
operating zone 26kW
22 kW
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 rpm

o~---'-----'-----'-----'--__,
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 rpm
2) S series (high-speed model)
Model 1S/15000
(kW) Torque kgm

3
1.0
50%ED, 15-min. rated (2.2kW) 0.8

2
I
I
0.6
Continuous rated (l .5kW) '
1.5 kW
0.4
l.lkW
0.2
0 L--- ---''-----'----'----L---......J rpm rp m

0 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000 0 5000 10000 15000
Mot or speed
MODEL 2S/15000
(kW) Torque kgm

5
4 1 - - ----i 50%ED, 15-mu°i. rated (3.7kW)
1.0
Continuous rated (2.2kW)

2
0. 5
1
rpm
rpm
3000 6000 9000 12000 15000
0 5000 10000 15000
Motor speed
- 10 -
MODEL 3S/12000
(kW) Torque kgm
8 A----.---,---.----.-- -.--, 5.0
4.0
6
50%ED, 30 min., rated (5.SkW)
3.0
4
2.0
2 . 2 kW
2
1.0
1.1 kW
rpm
2000 400 0 6000 8000 10000 12000 rpm 0 2000 4 000 6000 8000 10000 12000
Motor speed
MODEL 6$/12000
Output Torque
kW kg• m
8 5
4
6
4
3. 7 kW
2
2.2 kW
0
0 2000 400 0 6000 8000 I 0000 I 200 0r p a 0 2 000 4000 6000 8 000 I 0 000 12000 r p11
MODEL 8S/8000
Output Torque
kW kg•m
16 8
12 e,
I I llW
I
' "
30-m!n., 50%ED operating zone
8
\
I 7 . 5kW
I I
Continuous
.......... " " 7.5kW
'-....
4
4
Ii operating zone
5 . 5kW
2
0
0
f I 0 0 0 2000 3000 4000 5 000 6000 7 000 6000 r P•
0
0 I 000 2000 3000 4000 5 000 &0 00 7 000 6000 r p a
- 11 -
MODEL 12S/8000
Output Torque
kW kg•m
10
7.5kW
5.5kW
')
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000• pa
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 BOOOrpa
MODEL 15S/8000
Output Torque
kW kgm
20 ,----18.5-----,------c-=-----,-
kW 30-min., 50%ED operating zone 15r---,--r----.---.--,-----,---r--,
7.5 kW
4
0 0 '----'---'-- - ' -- -'---J..._---'--'-- -.J

0 I 000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 rpm
MODEL 18S/6000
Output Torque
kW kgm
30 ,--- ~---r----,--,---~-~ 15 ~-~----~---r- - ---
251--- +-- -+-----1---l--- -1----1
22 kW 30-min., 50%ED operating zone
18.5 kW -+- ----l

15
5
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 rpm
Motor speed
Motor speed
- 12 -
MODEL 22S/6000
Output Torque
kW kg m
30,-----,---r----,---.----,---, 20 , - - --r----.------,- -,-----,----,
26 kW 30-min., 50%ED operating zone
22 kW 15
18.5 kW
5
5
0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000rpm
- 13 -
4. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER
4.1 Configuration
The AC spindle motor comprises the motor and accessories.
(1) AC spindle motor (basic)
(2) Key (accessory)
(3) Signal connector (housing, contactor) (accessory)
The accessories are stored in the terminal box.
The specifications of the connection cables between the motor and the AC spindle
servo unit are described in the Appendix 1 of this manual. The cables should be
prepared by the MTB.
- 14 -
4.2 Order Specification Drawing Number
1) AC spindle motor S series
Nomenclature Spec. Dwg. No Remarks
Flange mount- A06B-0750-Bl00 Exhaust rear

ing
Model 1S A06B-0750-Bl01 Exhaust front
Foot mounting A06B-0750-B200 Exhaust rear
A06B-0750-B201 Exhaust front
Flange mount- A06B-075 l-Bl00 Exhaust rear

ing
Model 1.5S A06B-0751-Bl01 Exhaust front
A06B-0751-B200 Exhaust rear

Foot mounting

ing

Foot mounting

ing

ing
- 15 -
A06B-0755-Bl00 4500rpm, Exhaust rear

Flange mount-
ing
A06B-0755-Bl01 4500rpm, Exhaust front
A06B-0755-B200 4500rpm, Exhaust rear

Foot mounting
A06B-0755-B201 4500rpm, Exhaust front
Model 8S
A06B-0755-Bl00#0 100 6000rpm, Exhaust rear
Flange mount-
ing
A06B-0755-Bl01#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust front
A06B-0755-B200#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust rear

Foot mounting
A06B-0755-B201#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust front
A06B-0756-B l00 4500rpm, Exhaust rear

Flange mount-
ing

Foot mounting
Model 12S
A06B-0756-Bl00#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust rear
Flange mount- ~ yp(
ing
A06B-0756-Bl01#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust front
/
/ ------ ---
Foot mounting
~ A06B-0756-B200#0108
3·1o
6000rpm, Exhaust rear
A06B-0756-B20l#(N8t 6000rpm, Exhaust front

.;a ~•o
A06B-0757-Bl00 4500rpm, Exhaust rear
Flange mount-
ing

Foot mounting
Model 15S
A06B-0757-Bl00#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust rear
Flange mount-
ing
A06B-0757 - Bl01#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust front
A06B-0757-B200#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust rear

Foot mounting
A06B-0757-B201#0100 6000rpm, Exhaust front
- 16 -
A06B-0758-Bl00 Exhaust rear

Flange mount-
ing

Foot mounting

ing
Model 22S A06B-07 59-BlOl Exhaust front

Foot mounting
2) AC spindle motor S series (high-speed model)
AC spindle motor S series (High-speed model)
Naine Spec. No. Remarks
Model Flange A06B-0750-Bl04 15000rpm, has key,

1S/15000 mounting nb oil seal, exhaust rear
A06B-0750-Bl94 15000rpm, has key,
no oil seal, exhaust rear
A06B-0750- B105 15000rpm, has key,
no oil seal, exhaust front
A06B-0750-Bl95 15000rpm, has key,
A06B-0750-B304 15000rpm, no key,
A06B-0750-B394 15000rpm, no key,
A06B-0750-B305 15000rpm, no key,
A06B-0750-B395 15000rpm, no key,
2S/15000 mounting no oil seal, exhaust rear
A06B-0752-Bl94 15000rpm, has key,
A06B-0752-Bl05 15000rpm, has key,
A06B-0752-Bl95 15000rpm, has key,
A06B-0752-B304 15000rpm, no key,
A06B-0752-B394 15000rpm, no key,
A06B-0752-B305 15000rpm, no key,
A06B-0752-B395 15000rpm, no key,
- 17 -
Name Spec. No. Remarks
A06B-0753-Bl94 12000rpm, has key,
A06B-0753-Bl05 12000rpm, has key,
A06B-0753-Bl95 12000rpm, has key,
A06B-0753-B304 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0753-B394 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0753-B305 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0753-B395 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0754-Bl94 12000rpm, has key,
A06B-0754-Bl05 12000rpm, has key,
A06B-0754-Bl95 12000rpm, has key,
A06B-0754-B304 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0754-B394 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0754-B305 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0754-B395 12000rpm, no key,
A06B-0755-Bl94 8000rpm, has key,
A06B-0755-B304 8000rpm, no key,
A06B-0755-B394 8000rpm, no key,
A06B-0755-B305 8000rpm, no key,
A06B-0755-B395 8000rpm, no key,
no oil seal , exhaust front
- 18 -
Name Spe c. No. Remarks
Model Flange A06B- 0756-Bl04 8000rpm, has key,
12S/8000 mounting no oi l seal , exhaust rear
A06B- 0756-Bl94 8000rpm, has key,
no oil seal , exhaust rear
A06B-0756-B l 05 8000rpm, has key,
no oil seal , exhau s t fro n t
A06B- 0756- Bl95 8000rpm, has key,
A06B- 0756- B304 8000rpm, no key,
A06B-0756- B394 8000rpm , no key,
A06B-0756- B305 8000rpm, no key,
no oil seal, exhaust fron t
A06B- 0756-B395 8000rpm, no key,
Model Flange A06B- 07 5 7-Bl04 8000rpm, has key,
A06B- 0757-Bl94 8000rpm, has key,
A06B- 0757- Bl05 8000rpm, has key,
no oil seal, exhaust f ront
A06B- 0757-Bl95 8000rpm, has key,
no oil seal, exhaust fro nt
A06B-0757- B304 8000rpm, no key,
n o oil seal, exhaust rear
A06B- 0757- B394 8000rpm, no key ,
A06B-0757-B305 8000rpm, no key ,
A06B- 0757-B395 8000rpm, no key,
Model Flange A06B-0758-Bl00#0100 6000rpm, has key ,
A06B- 0758- Bl90#0100 6000rpm, has key,
A06B- 0758-Bl01#0100 6000rpm, has key ,
no oil seal , exhaust f r ont
A06B- 0758-B l 91#0100 6000rpm , has key ,
A06B-0758- B3 00#0100 6000rpm, no key,
A06B-0758-B390#0 100 6000rpm , no key,
A06B- 0758-B3 01#0100 6000rpm, no key,
A06B- 0758- B391#0100 6000rpm, no key,
- 19 -
Name Spec . No. Remarks
Model Flange A06B-0759- Bl00#0100 6000rpm, has key,

A06B-0759-Bl90#0100 6000rpm, has key,
A06B-0759-Bl01#0100 6000rpm, has key,
A06B-0759-Bl91#0100 6000rpm, has key,
A06B-0759- B300#0100 6000rpm, no key,
A06B- 0759- B390#0100 6000rpm, no key,
A06B-0759-B301#0100 6000rpm, no key,
A06B-0759-B391#0100 6000rpm, no key,
- 20 -
5. CONNECTIONS
Models 1S - 22S
u
Primary winding
w
OG
- Connector connections
+5V
(j) Blue CZ) Black
ov <D Red
PB PA + 5V
r------- PA
Pulse
generator
!I.
,~-~
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _J
RA
® White © Green © Yellow
PB - RB RA ov
RB
ss @ ® G)
OH2 ss OHi
:OH i] Overheat
OH2
FMU
signal
-
Connector specifications
AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK Connector
Motor side Cable side

FMV Fan motor
Housing 350782-1 350720-1
FMW
Contact 350706-7 350689-6
The pulse generator and overheat signals are connected to the AMP connector.
The others employ screw terminals. The AMP connector and contact are furnished
with the motor.
Screw sizes for terminal connections
Terminal name
Model
u, V, W, G FMU - FMW
1S - 15S MS M4
18S - 22S MB M4
- 21 -
6. CAUTIONS IN USE
1) Terminal box
a) Models 1S - 15S
The plastic terminal box is newly employed, and the conventional metallic
side plate is now eliminated. Directly mount the conduit connector using
the nut as shown below.
Conduit connector (elbow, etc)
Rubber cap
b) Models 18S, 22S

Construction is same as that of conventional types.
/--=---o--xr 0
y
j Upper cover
Pull out the cable through the hole on the side plate (1).
Cable can be routed through either right or left side by changing the side
plates (1) and (2) with each other.
- 22 -
2) Allowable radial load
Use the motor output shaft below the allowable radial loads shown in the
table below. For high-speed models, refer to the list of specifications.
Motor model Allowable radial load Output shaft side bearing
Model 1S 40 kg
6206
Model 1.5S 90 kg
Model 2S 90 kg
6208
Model 3S 150 kg
Model 6S 200 kg 6308
Model 8S 300 kg 6210
Model 12S, 15S 300 kg

6312
Model 18S, 22S 450 kg
Note) The above allowable radial load is a value obtained by applying

load at the end of the output shaft, When the center of belt
tension is out of the output shaft end, the allowable radial load
becomes smaller than the above value.
When using belt to transmit power, adjust the tension so that it does not
exceed the above allowable value. In case load is applied in the thrust
direction by helical gears, the shaft will move in the thrust direction.
Therefore, do not apply thrust load as a rule.
3) Mount the motor so that cutting oil or lubricating oil is not directly
splashed to the motor main body.
4) Dynamic balance
The motor rotor is dynamically balanced with the balancing machine und·e r the
mounting condition of a half key (1/2 the key thickness shown in the outer
dimensions drawing) keyed on the shaft.
Since the AC spindle motor is a high-speed rotating motor, its slightest
unbalance causes noticeable vibrations. Pay particular attention to dynamic
balance of motor shaft gears and pulleys as well as other high-speed rotating
shafts.
For high-speed operation, use a keyless motor.
- 23 -
Pulley Full key
\ ',
. , ....
... ...
N
-
Motor shaft
"°
Hl
H2
• Motor balance conditio n
ir(D 1/ 2) 2 H l •p X Rl=Ml X rl p; Density

;r ( D 2/ 2 ) 2 H 2 • p x R 2 = M2 x r 2
* Balance correction
5) An oil seal is mounted to the flange type motor output shaft. Keep the
lubricating oil level lower than the oil seal lip, so that lubricating oil
will not spill straight on the lip.
Since the seal effect may be lost with lubricating oil spilled directly on
the lip even in forced lubrication, mount a fringer as illustrated below.
Fringer
Gear
Fringer mounting example
- 24 -
6) Points to be noted when the AC spindle motor is used in a dry environment
The seal effect, regarding the oil seal which is mounted in the front flange
section of the flange type, is activated in the state where the lubricating
oil is distributed on the flange surface in the same manner as inside an oil
lubricated gear box. However, if it is rotated at high speed in the state
where the lubricating oil has not been distributed by the belt drive, etc.
(dry state), a shrill sound may be emitted from · the contact section of the
oil seal and the shaft. In this case, the lip section will be damaged, and
the coil spring tightening the lip section will slacken off.
In order to prevent the above occurrence, when using the AC spindle motor in
the dry state, detach the coil spring tightening the lip section and use in a
state of reduced friction between the lip and the shaft. Even when the coil
spring is detached, there will be no lessening of the dustproof effect for
sludge, casting particles, etc.
Oil seal
Coilspring
- 25 -
7. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
7.1 AC Spindle Motor Model 1S

a) Flange type
MS screw (4)
Terminals for fan motor
(FMU, FMV, FMW) s for power line
G)
tor connector
166 5
~ Air in
I' ~
18
(Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical downward in use.

2. Use hexagon bolts MS, length 20 mm or less as mounting bolts.
3. The motor in which cooling air flow direction is reversed is also available.
b) Foot mounting type

MS screw (4}
(FMU, FMV, FMW) Terminals for ower line
(U/V/W/G)
Pulse enera tor connector
166 . ..
IJd Q
Air in
'll
In case of shaft without key,

tliere is no tip tap.
"
(Note) l. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical dowaward in use.
2. Use hexagon bolts MB, length 20 mm or Jess as mounting bolts.
3. The motor in which cooling air !low direction is reversed is also available.
- 26 -
7.2 AC Spindle Motor Model 1.5S
a) Flange type
MS screw (4)
(FMU, FMV,FMW)
or connector
Air in
'!,
r-7
c:, ri
fl
Air out
14-4>9 on it> 145 . _ I_ _ __ _ _ ~3~6"'-e_ _ __ _ ___,
Lil e::.,.
there is no tip tap.
C28 j6'.!
~~~-~.....
::.fl.\.1±:
~ . dep. 1"'"0_ _.,,,"'1
Oil seal
(Note) 1. Tlte output shaft should be horizontal or vertical downward in use.

2. Use hexagon bolts MB, length 20 mm or less as mounting bolts.

MS screw (4)
(FMU, FMV, FMW)
Air in
'!,
r-7
¢ D
Air out
ldO
2 19

2. Use hexagon bolts MB, length 20 mm or less as mounting bolts.
- 27 -
7 .3 AC Spindle Motor Model 2S
a) Flange type
MS screw (4)
(FMU, FMV, FMW) Terminals for power line
(UV W G)
Pulse generator connector
ii
·~~=='"=;'.":t-
2-M6
dep.lO
~ Rt
- il
h . .
t ere!Snotiptap.
O
L oil sea1
2. Use hexagon bolts MIO, length 35 mm or less as mounting bolts.

MS screw (4)
Terminnls for fun motor
(FMU, FMV, FMW) Terminals for ower line CTJ/V/W/G)
113.5
Airin
"'
0
"'
Air out
_M
2 6
\ dep. lo
q~ •
In cas~ of sh_aft without key ,
there 1s no tip tap.
-
RI- O
(Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontnl or vertical downward in use.

3. TI1e motor in which cooling air flow direction is reversed is also available.
- 28 -
a) Flange type
M5 screw (4)
Terminals for power line CTJ/V/W/G)
s ,. "'
OH2 55 OH i
11.
~~ ~
~o
3-M4 dep. RI-
•
•o
Incas~ of s~aft without key ,
there 1s no tip tap .
10 on,t,
Oil seal

2. Use hexagon bolts-MIO, length 35 mm or less as mounting bolts.

MS screw (4)
(FMU, FMV, FMW) Terminals for power line CTJ/V/W/G)
Pulse generator connector
Air in
"'
Air"'out
~~ ~ -
there is no tip tap.
3-4Mde~
IO on¢_
(Note) l. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical dowaward in use.

3. 1l1e motor in which cooling air flow direction is reversed is also available.
- 29 -
a) Flange type
NBR Bush
Tcrminnls for ~~
i~-~11
fan motor FMU , FMV,FMW
---o~• .
!~:~n'ii~e for
G,U,V,W
Pulse generator ®"""' n•
,.
a> .....
.. ...
(2)
<il•-
IIIMl
n•
(!) ""
@ Ytlf,i..
ov
vv 1_,,c,,,o.,,nn,,_e,,,c"'c.,o,..r~ - - (!) (!) k!J
0112
" Otll
'-"'...__ _..,_9.,.6c.___,, I
o• .
"' Q
A Ir
OU I
-'-- -4 - -- Wll._...il_ _ __ _....1._ _ ...J.J.____._,>-----,---l.
Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical

downward in use .
2. Use hexagon bolts MJ2 , length 40 mm or less as
mounting bolts.
3. The motor in which cooling air flow direction is
reversed is also available.
NBR Bush
Terminals for r.;==;:::==== Terminals
fan motor
FMU,FMV,FMW
for power
line G,U,V , W
Pulse generator @-• a,c-.
..
Q) ...... (I) 11ai:...
,. (!) ""
•OV
@'l'•t'-
connector no n• av
® (!) k!J
Otil o..,
"'
06
..,
10
. ... .
; ...
j"
~oIo -
3- M4, 10 deep 1 5
"
3 - MS,doJ.IO
QDD22
Note) I . The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical
downward in use.
2. Use hexagon bolts Ml0, length 30 mm or l ess as
mounting bolts.
- 30 -
a) Flange type
NBR Bush
Terminals for
fnn motor
FMU,FMV,FMW
a>
..
a:.,, Q)
,.•t.c• cD ...
,,v
® I!)
..
® ""'u ® • - e)Y,tta ..
"'
IC!>
OV
QIU
" DIil
173
• Al r
I• A
! · ~ --------f',!i...U.--,~Htn-- --.
"'..,a
,....
'l
...
0
"'Ill
4 0
14.! QA
112
o,I
3-MS, 10 deep
OJ:ID4Q
Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical Oil 111I

downward in use.
2. Use hexagon boles Hl2, length 1,0 mm or less as
mounting boles.
NBR Bush
Terminals for Terminals for
fan motor
FMU, FMV, FMW
,power line
G,U,V,W
Pulse generator
(ll
..
1.1u, QJ .....
,.
® ""'h• Q) o,.,,, © •r.1i,,..
.
cD . ..
..
n• OV
connector "'
®
o"'
I!)
.. (!)
o"'
06
3- MS, 10 deep
Ollt,,4Q
Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertica l

downward in use.
2. Us e hexagon bolts HlO, length 30 mm or less as
mounting bolts.
3. The motor in which cooling air f l ow direction is
rever s ed is also available.
- 31 -
7.7 AC Spindle M ot or Model 12S, 15S
a) Flange type
NBR Bush
Terminals for
Terminals for
fan motor
FMU,FMV,FHW
,power line
G,U,V,W .
ai- a i -
.. .. I!) ...
.. ..
•IV
Pulse generat e r ® - ll) a-, (!) . . ....

nnector o•
I!) I!) (!)
0,12 o..,
"
::: 420
c::>
Air
0 U t

downward in use.
2. Use hexagon bolts Ml2 , length 45 mm or less as
mounting bolt s.

NBR Bush
r,;=::;::==:;:;;;noiTerminals for
.. ..
Terminal s or
fan motor power l ine a, ...... (l) . .... I!)""'
FMU, FMV, FMW G, U,V,W
.. ..
•IV
Pulse generate ® ......

[ II) ..... ©,.,.....
co nectar a,
® I!) i!l
0>1'J .., Ctll
291 173
1.20
232
c:::>Q
Air
0U t

downward in use .
2 . Use hexagon bolts Ml2, length 45 mm or less as
mounting bolts.
- 32 -
7.8 AC Spindle Motor Model 18S, 22S
a) Flange type
Tcnninals for Tenninals for
fan motor
FMU, FMV, FMII
power line
G,U,V,11
Pulse generator
CV
@
.. ,...- ®"•"-
lllv•
WNll
ll) ..., .
~
(!) Rod
•I V
nneCtor n, RA OV
I!) I!) (!)
Ottl
" 0'11
10
Al r
ffa!
,;
in
"'tn13
tn
"'
.,
0
c:>
Air
ou I
3-M5, 10 deep
·••"45

downward in use.
2. Use hexagon bolts Hl2, length 45 mm or less as
mounting bolts .
3, The motor in which cooling air flow direction is
Terminals for Terminals for

fan motor power line Q) IU.,• ll) .... (!) ...
FMU , FMV , FM11 G,U,V,11 ,.
"
..
•IV
Pulse generator ® "'"" (£l e;. .... © n 1.1a..
· o nectar RO CV
I!)
Otil
I!)
.. (!)
Dltl
3-M5, 10 deep
•• .,,15
dowaward in use .
2. Use hexagon bolts Ml2, length 45 mm or less as
91
mounting bolts.
3. TI1e motor in which cooling air flow direction is
revers ed is also available .
- 33 -
7.9 AC Spindle M otor Model 1S/ 15000 (Flange type)
(4) MS Screw
Tcnnhuhfor
Can motor
(FMU, FMV, FMW) Tcrmlmll for powc: line
W/V/W/G)
Pulse acnemtor connector
c» m. 0Bl'4Q) ....
PB PA dY
(D.,_'lllu a,o- G>Y&!lo-
RD RA OV
I!) I!) I!)
om a om
78
c>
0
Air out
50 JI,
h,9 on "145 evon
n.rnngemcnt required
I!----- 31 8
- -- = ~ -- - - - - - - ,
Note) 1. The output lhDft should be horizonU:J or vertlcl.l downwud

in use•
., Use he:ugon botu MS, lcn&th JO mm or lc.u, :is mounting bolts.
J, The molu r In which coollna :Jlr flow t!Uection is reversed ls
olso .-..U..blc. l;,b)'rinth
4. ru, the 1e;1l for the Jhirt end is D simple bbyrinth type.
t:ikc c:uc so 1lut the surra.cc of the fllnsc ls not spb.shcd
directly with lubric:;itiuc oil or the lil:c.
7.10 AC Spindle M otor Model 2S/15000 (Flange type)
(4) MS Screw
Tcrmhuh for
fan mo tor
(Fl,IU, FMV, Fl,fW)
Pulse gcncrntor connector

a,a.... I!)
,. ,.
(J)Ol;ae ...
,,v
IP"""' QIO- l!)Y..,_
•• .. OV
a,
010
IP
.. a,
0111
285
0 c>
Air out
325
1 - -- -~'~B~•--- -•. 4-¢11 on "185 ovon
.uran;cment rcqullcd
Note) 1. The outpu t &l,1ft should be horizontAl or vertical downward

1n Uit. "
0
2. U1c hcx::1gon boltl Ml 0 , lcngU, 35 mm or less, as mounting bolts.
3. The moto r in which cooling air flow direction is rcvcncd is ubytintl1
olso n>ihblc.
4. AJ the sol for the Waft end b a tllllplc l11byrioth typo,
t:1kc c::uc so thmt thei surface of the Cmnac ls not spluhed
directly wiLh lubric:idn& oU or t he Ukc.
- 34 -
7.11 AC Spindle Motor M odel 3S/12000 (Flange type)
(4) MS Screw
Tcrmln.11, for
fun motor
(FMU, FMV, FMW) Terminal, for power line
(U/V/W/G)
Pulse gcner.stor connector
_..,,,/" (l)Dlu lllDlut.ll>R..rJ
PG PA •lY
l»~CllOnu1(!)'t~
ao u ov
a, a, a,
OIU s.s om 73.
3 5.
,, .,
~
0
~ ':,
~ =
0
,n"' "'
0
- 0 0 c:,
0
Air out
J ?5
181 4-¢11 on ¢185 ...,,
mtnngcmcnt required
Note) I. Toe output ,hnft ~,ouid bo bortzontal or vertical downword

in use.
2. Use hexa gon bolts MlO, length 35 mm 01 less, o.s mounting bolu.
3. The mo tor ln whkh cooling :tir now ditcctlan is reversed is
;$-
3.1,14 depth 10, on -,22
:ilso :iv;l,jb ble.
even a.nangcmcnt required
4. As the sc:il for the , lurt end U :1 simple labyrinth type,
t:il: c o re so llut the surfocc of the fbncc is not splashed L>byrillth
dbcctly w ith lubric.lting oil or the like.
7.12 AC Spindle Motor Model 6S/12000 (Flange t ype)
1
Rubber bush {or
:7,:::01~ro,
Tcrmlrut,
fan motor
lil~o
(FMU, Fl>!V, Fl>IW)
_
- \I
· •
Tcrmln>b for power Une
(U/V/W/G)
Pulse ccncmtor connector

a, ....
t!l
OIO
••
..
(l)Di.d
a,
PA
(l) Wliw ID"- (l)Y""'
RA
ID!ld
t!l
,, v
ov
CUI
""
OB 17
- ~....
Air in A
~ ~ 1
nrr-Mc-- - -- --l'"-"---,-'!=l :t>-r"l-1+--.
,0
0
"'
;...
~
·"'~
0
0
CX) c:,
0 Air out
eo
t. 44
Note) 1. TI1c output shttft should bo ho rizontal or n:rtic:tl down ward

in U1C.
2. Use hex:igo n boles Ml 2, length 40 mm or lw, as mounting bolts.
3. TI1c motor in which cooling air flow diJcction is rcvcncd is
L,byrintlt
D.bo a,-a ibble.
4. ,\s the s c,J for the shaft end i, • simplo 1"byrlnth type,
t:1ke =re so tlutt tbo surfaeo of tl10 fbngc is not splcsbW
dir ectly with lubrk:, tlng oil or the llke.
- 35 -
7.13 AC Spindle Motor Model 8S/ 8000 (Flange type)
1
Rubber bush for
:;:,,~a~:·r
Tcrmlna.lJ
r.o motor
0
(F?,IU, FMV FM
;
•
lilo
W)
·
Tcnninals for power lino
(U/V/W/G)
Pubc scner.itor c.o.nnector
a,..,.
Pl)
a>Wldoo
m
••
Q)Bla a, ...
,.
..
ca- ll>Y.._
II> <II
.,v
av
010
"' 0111
- Aizin A
•h,S!..i!Jt.------U...ll......,.,..,j-k-j1Ffl-==r_
~
0
;..:
0
<D
D
II
4..,,15 onQ215 oven

m:mgcmcnt required
Note) 1. The output thClfl ihould be hortzontd 01 vertical downw:ud

lnwc.
2. Use hcunon bolts Ml 2 , lcncth 40 mm or lcu,u mounting bolts.
J . Tilc motor ln which cooling air Oow dU'cctlon ls reversed is
also mnibblc.
4. As the seal for the shaft end ls a simple bbyrinth tyPc,
Utko c.uc so thllt the sudilco or tl1c CLinso ls not Jpluhcd
directly with lubric:1 ling oil or tl10 like,
7.14 AC Spindle Motor Model 12S/ 8000, 15S/8000 (Flange type)
Il11bbcr bush for

conrin1: lho
\\-irinl holes
Q)W,. QDt,,ct ll)W
Tc.rmin.Als for power line
PD PA •lV
- (U/V/W/G) C)t.1:::il.r; Q) O..- ll)Y.U..
Pullo scnenator
COMCctor Q)
•• •• II> (!J
ov
010 ., OHi
4-915 on ¢265 even

11inn1:cment required
Note) 1. The output shlll should bo horizontcl or vertlc.tl downwud

lnuso.
2. Use hexllgon bolts M12, length 45 mm or less.as mouutlngboltJ.
3. TI•• motor In wbid1 cooling Ill Dow dim:tlon ls umsed ls
•ho o...U.blo.
4. A, tho ,cl for the shaft end ls• simple labyrinth IYP",
LJ.kD cuo 10 tltat tl10 iur&.cc or the !b.nao 1J not sptuJ1cd
directly witl1 lubrlcatlng oil or tho like.
- 36 -
7 .15 AC Spindle Motor Model 18S/6000, 22S/6000 (Flange type)
Tcmtlrulls for Tcnniiuls for power line

fan motor (U/V/W/G)
(FMU, FMV, FMW)
Clltua. a,e""' a,..,

PD PA ,,v
a,.,... a, o..a, (l)Y"'°'
RD RA DV
a, Ql a,
OHl ss 011 1
10
Ailin
••' 0
<:;:,
,n
,n
0
~
..,0 Q 0
0
Air out
II
4-¢9 on ~145 tn'Cn
arrangement required
Note) 1. Tho output Iha.ft shoultl be horizonW o r vcrtJc:tl downwMd

In usa.
2. Uic heugon bolts Ml 2, length 45 mm or }C3;11 u mounting bolu.
3. The motor ln which cooling a.ir flow direction is reversed iJ
also ovaibb1c.
4. ,u the ""' for tho shaft end i., o llmplc 1'byrintl1 lyPC,
ta.kc cue so tlmt lhc surface of tho flange is not spb1hcd
directly with lubric:itins o il or tho like.
- 37 -
II. AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT S series
1. GENERAL
The FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT S series fully uses the most advanced
microprocessor and power electronics technologies to provide stable and smooth
drive operation with less vibration and noise from the low speed to the
high speed. It has the functions such as regenerative braking control (Patent
pending) and electric spindle orientation control (Patent pending) to fully meet
the needs of the most advanced CNC machine tools.
2. FEATURES
1) The light and compact unit is achieved owing to the plastic case.
2) The heat radiation part is cooled by the outside air and the electric
circuit in the magnetics cabinet can be completely closed resulting in
higher reliability.
3) Adoption of a custom LSI and a high-performance processor enhances the motor
control performance and flexibility.
4) The rigid tapping process involving synchronous feed of the spindle and the
Z axis in the machining center is possible.
5) Power-saving (energy-saving) design
The spindle servo unit is designed for energy-saving to obtain high power
with a small current owing to the unique power factor improvement design in
the input part.
6) Regenerative braking is possible. (Model 6S - 22S)
The unique driving method (patent pending) allows the motor to serve as a
generator during AC spindle motor deceleration so as to return energy to the
power source.
7) Low noise drive
The unique driving method (patent pending) reduces noises, even if the AC
spindle motor is operated at low speed.
8) Smooth low-speed rotation
The unique driving method (patent pending) assures very smooth rotation down
to low speed.
9) Electric spindle orientation control is applicable (option).
Since the spindle orientation can be done pure-electrically, the mechanical
section is simplified, and the machine spindle can be composed with high
reliability and largely reduced orientation time.
10) The load detection signal function is newly added. This function is used to
detect the load status of the machine tool spindle. If the load is larger
than the specified load, the contact signal is used to reduce the feed motor
speed for moving the table and the cutting load, thus preventing the tools
from being damaged.
- 41 -
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER
3.1 Models 1S - 3S
The AC spindle servo unit S series (Models lS, l,SS, 2S and 3S) consist of the
following units and components.
1) Spindle control unit (Basic)
2) Resistor unit (Basic)
3) Fuse (spare) (Basic)
4) Connector (for connection) (Basic)
5) AC line filter (Basic option) * If no power transformer
is used, specify
accordingly
6) Spindle orientation control circuit (Option)
7) Power transformer (Option)
AC spindle servo unit
PMC Spindle control unit AC

sequence spindle
CNC circuit motor
Resistor unit I
,-- - -- 7
Fuse II Connector
I Fan motor !
1--------...J r-----------77
(Note 2) l Spindle orientation control ,
1L.....:circuit
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __J
I
200/220/230 VAC I
· 3-phase power
----,
I 1
I
I
------1 AC line filter I
I I I
L---J f---7 No-fuse
No-fuse 1 I breaker
breaker I._ -,--JI (Note 1)
I
380/415/460VAC 1 ____ .i..___l
- - - - - - - - - ----- _ ..., _ _ _______,... Power transformer 1
L _____ _j
Basic or basic option

Option
To be provided by MTB
Note 1) MTB to provide an overcurrent protector with a proper capacity s uch as a

no-fuse breaker to the input . power circuit o f the AC spindle servo un'it
S series .
Note 2) Coo l the spindle control and resistor units using a fan motor with
s pecified flow.
- 42 -
3.2 Models 6S - 22S
The AC spindle servo unit S series (Models 6S, BS, 12S, 15S, 18S and 22S) consist
of the following units and components.
1) Spindle control unit (Basic)
2) Fuse (Spare) (Basic)
3) Connector (for connection) (Basic)
4) Spindle orientation control circuit (Option)
5) Speed gain switching circuit (Option)
6) Power transformer (Option)
7) Unit adaptor (Option)
PMC Spindle control unit AC

sequence spindle
CNC circuit motor
L-_F_u_s_e_........JI I Connector
----------------------------
~------·:77
, Spindle orientation control ,
r------, IL...::: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _J
rircuit
1 Fan motor 1
L.----.J
(Note 2)
,-----,
• Unit adaptor
L _____ ___J
,
3 -phase power 200/220/230 V AC ,---- ..

I I
I
I
I
:'.-------.J I
I
L ___ J
r-L., No-fuse
No-fuse 1 1
I breaker
breaker I
(Note I) L -r .J (Note I)
380/415/460 VAC r-----~---7
- - - - -- - --- ------ -- ---------- --~ Power transformer I
I
L-,___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __JI
Basic
- - - - -- : Option
-- ------ To be provided by MTB
Note 1) MTB to provide an overcurrent protector with a proper capacity such as a

no-fuse breaker to the input power circuit of the AC spindle servo unit
S series.
Note 2) Provide a fan motor to cool the spindle control unit. When the unit
adaptor is used, however, it is not necessary to provide the fan motor.
- 43 -
.
3.3.1 Models 1S · 3S, Model 1S/15000, Model 2S/15000 (high-speed model)
Classifi- Nomenclature Spec, Dwg. No. Remarks

cation
Spindle control unit A06B-6059-H002#H501 External heat r adiation

for Model lS type, 8000 rpm
Spindle control unit A06B-6059-H002#H508 External heat radiation

for Model 1. 5S type, 8000 rpm

for Model 2S type, 8000 rpm
Basic

for Model lS/15000 type, 15000 rpm

for Model 2S/15000 type, 15000 rpm
Connectors A06B-6059-Kl01 Soldered type
A06B-6059-Kl02 Crimped type
Basic A06B-6052-K050 1sn

Resistor units
See 4.2.2
A06B-6052-K051 30n X 2 pieces
Fuse A06B-6059-K003
Basic AC line filter A81L-0001-0083/3C Specify if power transformer

Option is not provided,
Option Power transformer A06B-6052-J001 Primary line AC380/415/460V
Secondary line AC 200V
(*l) For optional orientation, refer to the items related to spindle orientation
in Part V.
- 44 -
3.3.2 Models 6S - 22S, Models 3S/12000 - 22S/6000 (high-speed model)
Classifi- Nomenclature Spec. Dwg. No. Remarks

cation


A06B-6059-H208#H513 External heat radiation

type, 6000 rpm


type, 6000 rpm


type, 6000 rpm

Basic for Model 18S type, 4500 rpm

Spindle control unit A06B-6059-H206#H533 External radiation type,

for Model 3S/12000 12000 rpm
Spindle control unit A06B-6059-H208#H534 Ex ternal radiation type,
Spindle control uni t A06B-6059-H212#H535 External radiation type,


for Model lSS/8000 8000 rpm

- 45 -
Classifi- Nomenclature Spec. Dwg. No . Remarks
cation
A06B-6059- K103 Soldered type

Connectors
A06B-6059-Kl04 Crimped type
Basic
A06B- 6059- K012 For Model 6S - Model 12S,
3S/12000 - 12S/8000, 8VH
Fuse
A06B-6059-K022 For Model 15S - Model 22S,
15S/8000 - 22S/ 6000, 12VH
Option Speed gain switching A06B-6059-J700

circuit
Power transformer A06B-6044-J006 For Models Primary 380V

6S, 8S, line 415V
3S/12000, 460V
8S/8000
Secondary
A06B-6044-J007 For Models line 200V
12S, 15S,
12S/8000,
Option lSS/8000,
8VH, 12VH
A06B- 6044-J010 For Models

18S, 22S,
18S/6000,
22S/6000
Unit adaptor A06B-6059-K031 For Models 6S - 12S,

3S/12000 - 12S/8000, 8VH
. A06B-6059-K032 For Models 15S - 22S,

lSS/8000 - 22S/6000, 12VH
in Part V.
- 46 -
4. SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS
4.1 Specifications
(1) AC spindle servo unit S series
~
lS 1. 5S 2S 3S 6S BS 12S 15S 18S 22S
I
30-min. rated power 4 7 7 9 12 17 22 26 32 37

source capacity
Power source (*l) AC200V/220V/230V +10%, -15% 50/60Hz lHz
Main circuit system Transistor PWM inverter
Feed back system Velocity feed back by pulse generator
Braking system Regenerative braking Regenerative braking

(Regenerative energy (Resistance discharge) (Power regeneration)
processing system)
Input command voltage DC + lOV (Max. speed) - OV (Stop)
Speed control range 80 - 8000 45 - 6000 45 - 4500 (1:100) 45 - 4500

(Speed ratio) rpm (1:100) (1:133) 45 - 6000 (1:133) (1: 100)
Speed variation Less than 0.1% of the maximum speed (Load variation
10 - 100%)
Ambient temperature o - 55°c

(*3)
(*1) If the power voltage is other than specified herein, a transformer i s

needed.
(*2) It is needed to cool forcibly the radiator fin section of the servo unit.
When designing the servo unit housing , prepare a cooling fan and give
careful consideration to the forced air cooling structure of the radiator
fin section referring to Chapter 7 "COOLING" in this manual.
(*3) In Model 12S and Model 22S, the continuous operating time of the motor at
30-min. rated output is determined as follows by the thermal limitation of
the unit.
"""
.....
~ 30 >-,~~-~--
.,...
0.
0
ttJ--:' 20
"C:
0 ....
" a
c:~
-.< 10 -
~0 ....~ /
u ...
0 /
0 10 20 so 50 60
Ambient tcmpcntu1c rC> Anibicnt tcmper=aturc re>
Thermally limited continuous Thermally limited continuous

operating time of Modal 12S operating time of Model 22S
- 47 -
(2) AC spindle servo unit S series (high-speed model)
~
lS/ 2S/ 3S/ 6S/ BS/ 12S/ 15S/ lBS/ 22S/
I 15000 15000 12000 12000 8000 8000 8000 6000 6000
30-min. rated power source 4 7 9 12 17 22 25 32 37

capacity kVA
Power source (*l) AC200/220/230V, +10%, -15%; 50/60Hz_:!:1Hz
Feed back system Velocity feed back by pulse generator
Braking system Regenerative Regenerative braking

braking (Power regeneration)
(Resistance
discharge)
Input command voltage +l0V DC (at maximum speed) to 0V (while stopping)
Velocity control range 150 - 150 - 120 - 120 - 80 - 8000 rpm 60 - 6000 rpm
15000 15000 12000 12000 (Speed ratio 1:100) (Speed ratio
rpm 1:100)
(Speeq
ratio
1:100)
Speed variation Less than 0.1% of the maximum speed in the load variation range from
10 to 100%
Ambient temperature (*3) o - 55°c
(*l) A transformer is needed when the power voltage is other than specified
herein.
(*2) It is needed to cool forcibly the radiator fin section of the servo unit.
When designing the servo unit housing, prepare a cooling fan and give
careful consideration to the forced air cooling structure of the radiator
fin section referring to Chapter 7 "COOLING" in t his manual.
(*3) In models 12S/8OOO and 22S/6OOO, the continuous operating time of the motor
at 3O-min. rated output is determined as follows by the thermal limitation
of the unit.
0 "--L---"'--""-...L.......C.-<---C--L-.....C.-C-......_-L._
60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient tcmpcr11.turc (9C) Amblont tcmpcr.:s.turc (°C)
Thermally limited continuous Thermally limited continuous

operatihg time of Model 12S/8000 operating time of Moc;tel 22S/6000
- 48 -
4.2 Major Component Functions and Application
4.2.1 Spindle control unit

The spindle control unit rectifies three-phase AC input, and converts it into DC
so as to perform the velocity control of the AC spindle motor through transistor
PWM inverter.
The spindle control unit is provided with a protective and fault detection
function as shown in (1) for the purpose of protecting machine, AC spindle
motor, and AC spindle servo unit, if trouble has occurred. It also provides an
auxiliary function as shown in (2) for monitoring the operating conditions of
the spindle.
(1) Protective and fault detection functions

(1)-1 Spindle Control Unit for Models 1S - 3S
Item Description Display

Motor overheat An alarm occurs when the internal temperature AL-01
detection of AC spindle motor and power circuit heat
radiator temperature abnormally increase.
Ex cessive velocity An alarm occurs when the AC spindle motor AL-02

deviation detection speed is largely deviated from the commanded
speed due to an overload, etc.
Detection of An alarm is generated when current flows · in AL-03

discharge circuit the regenerative resistor unit for longer
abnormality than a certain time.
Overspeed detection I f the AC spindle motor speed ex ceeds 110 to AL-06

115% of the rated maximum speed, an alarm AL-07
occurs.
Overvoltage detection I f the AC input power circuit voltage exceeds AL-08

the rated voltage range, an alarm occurs.
Undervoltage I f the control power voltage abnormally AL- 10

detection drops, an alarm occurs.
Main circuit I f the main circuit voltage abnormally rises, AL-11

overvoltage detection an alarm is emitted.
Main circuit over- I f an abnormally large current runs through AL-12

current detection the main circuit, an alarm occurs.
Abnormal arithmetic An alarm occurs when any abnormality of the AL-16 -

circuit detection arithmetic circuit or its peripheral parts is 23
detected.
Abnormal ROM An alarm occurs when ROM is found abnormal.

detection
- 49 -
(1) - 2 Models 6S - 22S
Item Description Display
Motor overheat Alarm is emitted when the temperature inside AL-01

detection the AC spindle motor rises abnormally.
Excessive velocity Alarm is emitted when the AC spindle motor AL-02

deviation detection speed tremendously deviates from the command
speed due to reasons such as overload .
Detection of melted The melting of +24V fuse in the control power AL-03
control power circuit section is detected .
fuse
Detection of lost Alarm is emitted when any of the input power AL-04
input power phase phases are lost.
Overspeed detection Alarm is emitted when the AC spindle motor AL- 06

speed exceeds 110 to 115% of the rated AL-07
maximum speed.
Overvoltage detection AI.arm is emitted when the AC input power AL-08

voltage exceeds the rated voltage range.
Detection of main Alarm is emitted when the temperature of AL-09

circuit overheating power circuit heat radiator rises abnormally .
Undervoltage Alarm is emitted when the control power AL-10

detection voltage drops abnormally .
Main circuit over- Alarm is emitted when the main circuit AL-11
voltage detection voltage rises abnormally.
Main circuit over- Alarm is emitted when abnormally large AL-12

current detection current runs through the main circuit.
Abnormal arithmetic Alarm is emitted when any abnormality is AL-13

circuit detection detected in the arithmetic circuit and its 16 - 23
peripheral circuits.
Abnormal ROM Alarm is emit ted when any abnormality is A

ditection found in ROM.
Abnormality of option Alarm is emitted when option circuits or AL-15

circuits connection to the option circuits become
abnormal .
- 50 -
(2) Auxiliary f unctions
The AC spindle control unit pr ovides the following auxiliary functions.
Auxiliary functions Description
Loadmeter out put The 10- VDC meter (one-sided deflection type) is
connectable .
Speedometer output The 10- VDC meter (one-sided deflection type) is

connectable.
Zero- speed signal Spindle motor stop can be confirmed.

output
Speed reach signal This signal indicates that the spindle motor has reached
output the commanded speed .
Override Overriding the command speed (auto) is possible .

(Model 6S - 22S)
Speed detection The speed can be detected to confirm if it is below a

signal output certain speed such as the clutch change speed and gear
change speed.
Torque limit This serves to reduce the ou tput torque of the spindle
motor for r otation temporarily at small torque.
Display of motor rpm Actual motor rpm is displayed in five digits, seven
segments .
Selection of output Various kinds of output limit patterns can be selected

limit pattern with setting of parameter .
No output limit is made .
. Outpu t limit is made only at acceleration/
decel eration .
. Output limit is made at stable rotation .
. Output limit is effected for all operation ranges •
Divide the maximum output by 100 for setting .
Selection of rigid Response characteristics for rigid tapping can be

tapping mode selected by the setting of parameter and input of contact
signal.
Load detection When the load value exceeds the value set by parameter,
signal output the contact signal is output .
Divide the maximum output by 100 for setting .
- 51 -
4.2.2 Resistor unit (Models 1S - 3S)
On AC spindle servo unit models 1S to 3S, the regenerative energy which
accompanies motor deceleration is expended by resistors. The following items
should be noted when using the resistor unit.
(1) When choosing the motor and resistor unit, choose a resistor unit with a
capacity which suits the load and run cycle time. Overheating will occur if
an inappropriate resistor unit is used. Refer to item 4.2.3 for selection.
The following items can also cause overheating, so caution is advised.
Overheating is likely to occur, if the balance difference between the
different phases of the input power source is 12% or greater, and
especially if the voltage between the U-V phases is lower than that
between the V-W or W-U phases. If this is the case, reconnect so that the
U-V phase voltage will be the highest, as a temporary measure.
If one end (unit terminal T2-2 side) of the resistor is grounded.
If the unit is damaged and a fault exists in the control circuit, power
transistor, etc,
(2) When designing the mounting for the resistor unit, make sure the resistors
that comprise this unit are cooled properly. Also provide adequate air
ventilation,
(3) When there is an abnormality, such as overloading, the thermostat on the
resistor is activated. However, the unit is allowed to be heated up to the
operating temperature (about 130°C). (The specified . temperature for
activation of the thermostat is 120 +6°C.) If there are any vinyl coated
wires nearby, there is a possibility that they will melt. There is a strong
chance that the covering for the power line of the power source (AC 200V)
might melt, in particular, and a short circuit accident can occur. When
wiring, make sure that the cables don't touch the resistor unit case, with
these precautions in mind.
(4) Connect so that the thermostat, upon activation, will send an emergency stop
signal (ESP) to the spindle amp via the power sequence circuit. (See figure
below.)
Power sequence circuit

· AC spindle servo unit
Emergency stop signal
(B contact) Receiver
.n1c ESPl CNl ( 4 7 )

ESP t.
1} r
ESP2 CN1 ( 48 )
11
11
i1' ov
11
i1'
it
~
11
11
Detects abnormal
'
l TH(!)
Resistor unit
temperatures in the Thermostat

resistor unit and ~
opens the ESP TH(2)
contact.
l
The figure above applies when there is one resistor unit.
- 52 -
4.2.3 Resistor unit selection standard
For models 1S, 1.5S, 2S and 3S, energy during motor deceleration (regenerative
operation) is consumed in the resistor unit. Heating of this resistor unit
changes, depending on the motor type, operating speed rpm, load inertia and
continuously repeated cycle (duty cycle). The resistor unit includes two types:
one type uses one resistor of 1 kW 15 n, and another type uses two resistors of
1 kW 30 n in parallel, Selection method between these two types is described
I ~-
below.
N /_ ~leration
I~ Dt ~
In the continuously repeated operation illustrated above, assuming the operating
speed rpm to N (rpm), motor rotor inertia to be Jm (kg.m.s 2 ) and spindle motor
2
shaft converted load inertia to be J 1 (kg.m.s ), the allowable duty cycle times
Dtl' Dt 2 are found as follows:
When one resistor 15 n is used:

2 6
Dtl = 179.2 x (Jm + JL) x N x 10- (sec) ·····•·························• (1)
When two resistors 30 n are used in parallel:
2 6
Dt2 = 89.6 x (Jm + JL) x N x 10- (sec) ••••·••••···•·••·•••·•···•·•··••• (2)
When four resistors 15 n are used in serial:
2 6
Dt3 = 44.8 x (Jm + JL) x N x 10- (sec) ·••••········••·•···•·····••••··· (3)
The results of the calculation in the case of the resistor unit (1) regarding
each motor model are shown in the figures 1 - 4 in the following page.
- 53 -
JL =
30 0.0024
30 kg .m. s2
"Can be used"
JL=
---~.., 0.0018 ---
~
.., 0.0016
kg.m.s2
.§ 20 § 20
kg.m.s2
"Cannot be used"
u
CJ
0.0012
u"'>,
t; kg .m.s 2 u
0. 0008
kg.m.s2
10 0.000 6
Dt kg .m .s2 Dt l 0
Motor unit Motor unit

Ch = 0 ) ( Ji.=0 )
0
0 0
4 8 N 0
X 1000 rpm " 8
x 1000 rpm
N
Motor speed
Motor speed
Fig. 1 Model 1S Fig. 2 M odel 1.5S
30
JL= 30 JL =
0.0016 0.003
,..., kg.m.s2 kg .m.s 2
~
CJ ,...,
.§ ~
20
"Cannot be used"
.§"'
CJ
u>, 20
0.000 8
u kg.m.s 2 u"'>, kg .m.s2
u
Dt 10 Motor unit
Dt 10 Motor unit
( Ji.= 0 )
( Ji. =0 )
O 01,.-llii:::;;;:;;=:::r:2:___ __ . .1.4_ _ __ _
N
X IO00rpm
Motor speed X 1000 rpm
Motor speed
Fig. 3 Model 2S Fig. 4 Model 3S
Note) Explanation of the figures:

1) Operation duty cycle time in the upper side of the curve corresponding
to motor axis conversion load inertia can be used, but cannot be used
in the lower side due to overheating of the resistor.
2) In the case of resistor unit (2), the cycle time of figures 1 4 is
1/2 .
In the case of resistor unit (3), the cycle time of figures 1 - 4 is
1/4.
- 54 -
[Example]
The following table shows motor axis conversion load inertia of the spindle,
which is permissible when repetition is conducted at the maximum operating speed
when the permissible duty cycle is 30 secs.
Permissible motor axis conversion

Motor Maximum
Model name load inertia
No . rotor operating
Resistor Resistor (30 Q,
inertia speed
(15 Q, 1) 2 in parallel)
1 1S 0 . 0003 8000 0.00231 0.00493
2 1. 5S 0 . 0004 8000 0. 00221 0 . 00483
3 2S 0.0008 8000 0.00181 0.00443
4 3S 0.0015 6000 0.00315 0 . 0078-0
Duty cycle limitation with 2 discharge resistors
Cooling structure
As shown in the diagram below, configure the equipment with a duct structure so
that the surface of the resistor is subjected to intense cooling. The fan motor
and mounting fittings are to be provided by the user.
One resistor used (example) Two resistors used (example)

Direction of
air draft Direction of air draft
f t j Required cooling air speed
Terminal 2m/ sec
Resistor Resistor Resistor
Mounting
fitting I
I
I
TI1ermostat I
I
_ _ _ _ _J I I
_ _ _ _ _j L----
Fan motor Fan motor
Note) It is not necessary to cool the surface retaining the thermostat.
- 55 -
4.2.4 Types of connectors
Connectors for the connector cable side are built into the control print board
of the AC spindle servo unit, and they are therefore, specified together . In
addition, the speed feedback signal cable connector is provided with the motor.
The following types of connectors are included for each model of AC spindle
servo unit .
(1) For Models 1S - 3S
Connector
specifications; Order drawing number
Applica- FANUC specifica t ion
Remarks
t ion drawing number A06B-6059-Kl01
A06B- 6059- Kl02
(manufacturer's (Type with
(Crimp type)
model) solder)
CNl A63L-0001-0134/01 1 Connector with
(MR-50LFH) cover (50 pins,
female)
A63L-0001-0134/21 1
(MRP-50LF01)
CN2 A63L- 0001-0134/02 1 Connector with

(MR- 20LFH) cover (20 pins,
female)
A63L-0001-0134/22 1
(MRP-20LF01)
(2) For Models 6S - 22S
Connector
specifications; Order drawing number
Applica- FANUC specification
Remarks
tion drawing number A06B- 6059- Kl03
(manufacturer's A06B-6059- Kl04
(Type with
model) (Cr imp type)
solder)
CNl A63L-0001-0134/0l 1 Connector with
female)
A63L- 0001-0134/21 1
(MRP-50LF01)
CN2 A63L-0001 - 0134/02 1 Connector with

female)
A63L-0001-0134/22 1
(MRP- 20LF01)
CN3 A63L- 0001- 0134/12 1 Connector with

(MR-20LMH) cover (20 pins,
male)
A63L- 0001 - 0134/32 1
(MRP-20LM01)
- 56 -
(3) Structure
Soldered/crimp-style
MR-SOFH (MRP-SOFO 1) terminal MR-SOL (MR-SOL)
MR-2OFH (MRP-2OFO1) MR-2OL (MR-2OL)
MR-2OMH (MRP-2OMO1) Cover MR-2OL (MR-2OL)
Connector with cover
MR-SOLFH (MRP-SOLFOI)
MR-2OLFH (MRP-2OLFO1)
MR-2OLMH (MRP-2OLMO1)
Specifications shown in parentheses are for crimp type terminal.
(4) Terminal Configuration
Use Terminal configuration Specifications
For CNl MR-SOFH

~◊◊◊◊~◊◊◊~◊~~◊~◊◊◊
l I 2
-A
3 ◄ 5
19 20"" zl if n.., %
6
A-
7 d 9 10 11 12 13 I ◄ 15 lo 17 IA
--~
; '25 i: 27 zi '!9 JO Ji 1?
~ - u l (MRP-SOFO 1)
i' ...
't' (SO-core female)
~~ ~? ◊~◊~~◊◊~~~~◊~~
3 1, l l 37 38 39 40 41 42 ◄3 •I◄ ◄ 5 ◄6 ◄7 48 ◄9 50
For CN3 - ~~~<;)<;)<;)~

MR-20MH
14 I 5 I 6 17 I B I 9 20 ci (MRP-20M01)
<v ()()()()<;)()
8 9 10 II 12 13
z
§l ❖ (20-core male)
?~~~~~~
For CN2 MR-20FH

-
+ ~~~~~~~c'i
◊~~()~◊
8 9 10 11 12 13
I~ 1? I~ 111~ I~~
z
~
+
(MRP-20F01)
(20-core female)
Above figures are viewed from solder/crimp side. Specifications in parentheses

are for crimp type.
(5) Outer diameter of compatible cable
Connector specifications Outer diameter of cable
MR-SOLFH Max. ~16 mm

MRP-SOLFOl
MR-20LFH
MRP-20LF01 Max. tSlO mm
MR-201.MH
MRP-20LM01 .
- 57 -
4.2.5 Fuse
Spare fuses are not attached to the AC spindle servo unit. Order more than one
set of spare fuses for stock. Following fuses and parts are applied to each
model of AC servo unit.
Order specification
Name Specifications
lS - 3S 6S - 12S 15S - 22S
FANUC Spec . Dwg. No .
A06B-6059-K003 A06B-6059-K012 A06B-6059-K02 2
Fuse (SA) A60L-0001-0031/5A - 3 3
Alarm fuse A60L-0001 - 0046/3.2 - 1 1

(3. 2A)
Alarm fuse A60L-0001- 0046/l.O - 1 1

(LOA)
Fuse (3. 2A) A60L-0001-0175/3.2A 1 - -

Fuse (LOA) A60L-0001-0175/l.OA 2 2 2
Fuse (0 . 3A) A60L-0001-0175/0.3A 3 3 3
Surge ASOL-2001-0155/ - 1 1
absorber 20D431
4.2.6 Spindle orientation control circuit (option)

Refer to chap t er "Spindle orientation" .
4.2.7 Speed gain switching circuit (option for Models 6S - 22S)

Refer to chapter "Speed Gain Switching Circuit" .
4.2.8 Power transformer (option)

When the input power voltage is out of range of 200 through 230 VAC, the pow~r
transformer is required.
Provide the transformer with the following specifications by the customer.
(1) Specifications
Model
Item
lS L 5S 2S 3S 6S BS 12S 15S 18S 22S
Rated capacity 30- minute 4 7 7 9 12 17 22 26 32 37

(kVA)
Continuous 3 3 4 7 9 12 17 22 26 31
Secondary current (30-minute)

12 21 21 26 35 48 62 72 88 105
(A)
Secondary tap output voltage 200 V
Secondary voltage
regulation 5%
Secondary tap voltage

deviation -+3%
- 58 -
(2) FANUC power tran s former specif ications (Option)
The following five powe r transformers are ava ilab l e . Select the s er vo unit
accor ding to the 30-minut e rated power c apacity.
I tem IS
I 1.5S
I 25
I JS 65
I 8S 125
I 155 185
I 225
Order sp ecification A06B- 6052- JOO I A06B- 6044-J006 A06B-6044- J007 A06B- 6044- JO I O
Specification ABOL- 0001- 0496 A80L-0001 - 0J 1J ABOL-0001- 0314 ABOL-0001-0352
Rated ca pacity JO-minu te 10 kVA 20 kVA 30 kVA 45 kVA
Continuous 7 kVA 15 kVA 26 kVA 40 kVA
Rated prima r y vol t age JB0/ 415/460 VAC +10% -15% , ZJO V +1 0% - 15% , 50/60 Hz +l Hz Ji!
(Secondary side is used for auto t ransformer)
Rated pr imary curren t I IA (at 380V) 23A (at 380V) 40A (at JBOV) 61A (at 380V)
(continuous) lOA (at 415V) 21A (at 415V) 36A (at 415V) 56A (at 415V)
9A (at 460V) 19A (at 460V) 33A (at 460V) SIA (at 460V)
Rated s econdary volt age 200 VAC
Rated secondary curr ent 20 A 43 A 74 A 115 A

(con t inuous)
Secondar y voltage regulat ion 5%
Secondary voltage devi ation +3%
Connection Star- star connection
I nsulation Cl ass H (Max . temperature 180°c)
Ambi ent temperature o - 45°c

Al lowable temperature 1Js 0 c
r i se of transformer
Humi dity Max . 95%RH
Type All t ransformers are dry-type and self-cooling
Die lectric vo ltage 2000 VAC , one mi nute
Weight Max . 61 kg Max. 115 kg Max. 165 kg Max . 260 kg
Ext ernal dimensions Fig. a. 1. 12 Fig . 8.1.13 Fig. 8. I. 14 Fig. 8. l. 15
Connec tion
RJ ::4 60V SHI ELD 230 V R4

4 15 V I II
R2 - 200 \1
3 80 V I u
RI - I
P RI . I
I SEC.
J;iK~·
0 (Newtrnl)
Tl
T2
TJ
S I ::
82 ::
83 :: T4
(Primary) (Secondary)
0 - 0
- 59 -
(3) Secondary output voltage
260
Voltage ~eviation (npprox. lOV) nt
Jood dcv1nlion (0-100%) of380VAC
~ 250 tnp
u
°"
~ 240 460VAC tnp
0 22DVAC '
>
; +10%
C.
; 220 ---- -15%
0
!;'
't:J
200 -~ -
200VAC
"uu
~:::
0
ti]
180 -- - - - - -
160
u u u CJ CJ CJ
< < < . < < <
> > > >
0 0
....~
0
..,>0 >
.... ........
a, 0
....
0
.... ....
a,
320 360 4 00 440 4 80 520 560
AC input voltage (V)
(4) Selection of Power Tap

Connect the transformer to the taps given in the following table according to
AC input voltages,
Nominal input voltage Taps used
380 VAC +10%, -15% Rl, Sl, Tl, G (380 V)
400 VAC +10%, -15% Rl, Sl, Tl, G (380 V)
415 VAC· +10%, -15% R2, S2, T2, G (415 V)

440 VAC +10%, -15% R2, S2, TZ, G (415 V)
460 VAC +10%, -15% R3, S3, T3, G (460 V)
480 VAC +10%, -15% R3, S3, T3, G (460 V)
(5) Cautions on use of transformer

(a) When mounting the transformer in a cabinet, separate it so as not to
give a thermal influence to an other unit.
(b) When mounting the transformer outside, be careful not to directly expose
it to cutting chips and cutting oil slash.
(c) If the transformer may fall, mount it with bolts, etc.
- 60 -
4.2.9 Unit adapter (option only for models 6S - 22S)
Th~s unit is applied to the servo unit models 6S to 22S with the inner
ventilation type. When this stay is mounted the maximum depth is 319 mm for
models 6S - 12S and 315 mm for models 15S - 22S. For details, refer to Chapter
8 "External Dimensions and Maintenance Area".
- 61 -
5. INSTALLATION
5.1 Environmental Conditions

Install the AC spindle servo unit in a place which meets the following
environmental conditions.
5.1. 1 Ambient temperature

Ambient temperature of the unit o to ss c 0
Ambient temperature of the storage cabient 0 to 45°C
5.1.2 Humidity
Normally 95% RH or below, and condensation-free
5.1.3 Vibration
In operation Below O.SG
5.1.4 Atmosphere
No corrosive or conductive mists or drops should deposit directly on the
electronic circuits.
5.2 Input Power and Grounding

(1) Input power
* Nominal voltage rating : 200/220/230 VAC
* Allowable voltage deviation: -15% - +10%
* Power frequency: 50/60 Hz
* Allowable frequency deviation: +l Hz
* Power impedance: Voltage deviation due to load (30 min. rating x 1. 2)
should be less than 7%.
Since the AC spindle servo unit (Model 6S - Model 22S) employs a
regenerative energy system in which motor rotating energy during motor
deceleration is regenerated as shop power source by means of a transistor
inverter, large power impedance may cause the following restrictions or
influences. So, care should be exercised when using transformers of
relatively small capacity or relatively long cables.
* Method to check power impedance
- -- - ---~1R Uu---------1
AC power supply ------=-vs AC
spindle
V,--------
----+----:::::,uT servo unit wl > - - - - - - - - - \
-----1----t----,uG Gn----------
AC voltmeter
EOE~ El x 100(%) < 7( %)
where,
E : Voltage at motor stop
E0 : Voltage during motor acceleration or voltage immediately before the
1 start of speed reduction with the application of load.
- 62 -
* Power supply unbalance: The range of voltage fluctuation between each
phase of a 3-phase power supply is the rated voltage +5% or less.
* Install a breaker having an adequate voltage capacity for protection in
the input section of the AC spindle servo unit.
* Input power supply power factor at AC spindle motor drive is 0.9 or more.
When the AC spindle . motor provides most of the power for the entire
machine, a low voltage phase advancing condensor must be installed.
* Alarm No. 4 may light up in response to input power supply open phase and
momentary power failure. (Models 6S - 22S).
* Leakage current at AC spindle motor drive
As the drive circuit uses a transistor-pulse duration modulation control
system, high-frequency leakage current components flow to the earth via
the spindle motor and connecting cables. However, for cables of 50 m or
less in length, the 50/60 Hz leakage current is equal to or less than the
non-operating current (15 mA) of the general high-sensitivity, high-speed
earth leakage breaker.
* Radio noise
As the drive circuit uses a pulse duration modulation control system,
high-frequency current when switching over the transistor may cause
generation of noise if a radio is installed close to the AC spindle motor
and the drive circuit.
The noise will have an effect on AM radio, but not on FM radio or TV,
Consider the following items as measures related to mounting and machinery
installation in order to minimize radio noise.
(a) Install. the AC spindle servo unit in a metal cabinet.
(b) Run the connection cable which exists between the AC spindle servo
unit and the AC spindle motor, through a metal duct and earth the
duct.
(c) Make connections between the terminals of the AC spindle servo unit
and the AC spindle motor (the G terminals of each unit) as
specifications.
(2) Ground
Be sure to ground cables shown below.
* Ground cable of input power supply
* Ground cable of an AC spindle servo unit and motor
(3) Installation of an AC line filter
Whenever using the the AC spindle servo unit models 1S - 3S without a power
supply transformer, be sure to install an AC line filter.
AC2DOV
I . AC spindle AC spindle
230V servo unit motor
I
I
I I I
J I I
AC380V I I
I
- .J
I _ _ _ .JI
4 80V
- 63 -
6. UNIT CALORIFIC VALUE
6.1 Calorific Value of the AC Spindle Servo Unit
12S
2s, 6S as SS/8000,
lSS, 18S, 22S,
Model lS 1.SS lS/15000, JS 3S/12000, 6S/12000, 15S/8000, 18S/6000, 22S/6000,
1 2S/8000,
2S/15000 SP, 12P 15P 22P , 12VH 30P 40P
18P, 8VH
Caloric value
at continuous
280 280 310 340 420 500 660 840 1050 1250
rated output
[w]
10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature ("C)
Thermally limited period of continuous use of the servo unit (Model 12S)
Ambient temperature (° C)
Thermally limited period of continuous use of the servo unit (Model 22S)
- 64 -
7. COOLING
The AC spindle servo unit S series employs the structure of external cooling for
the radiator of the power circuit. It is required to consider forced-air
cooling for cooling the radiator of the power circuit. The cooling fan
necessary for forced-air cooling is provided by the MTB.
* The AC spindle servo unit S series does not employ the built-in fan.
* If the unit is not cooled properly, an overheat alarm or a problem may occur.
7 .1 AC Spindle Servo Un_it_
Cool the radiator of the AC spindle servo unit using wind in accordance with the
undermentioned figure and with wind shown in Table 7.1, which can radiate 70% of
the carolic value.
Table 7.1 Cooling the AC spindle servo unit
1S - 3S, 6S - 12S, 15S - 22S,

Model 3S/12000 - 12S/8000, 15S/8000 - 22S/6000,
1S/15000, 2S/15000
8P - 18P, 8VH 22P - 30P, 12VH
Wind speed More than 2 m/sec More than 3 m/sec More than 3.5 m/sec
Models 1S · 3S Models 6S - 12S Models 15S - 22S
Mounting panel Mounting panel Mounting panel

---..... , -,
-C ---------
:
""""
I---
I=--
-·L
'
Airflow
2 m/sec or faster i
Airflow
3 m/sec or faster
Airflow
3.5 m/sec or faster
Note) Magnetics cabinet structure to be employed to prevent fan motor wind

leakage whenever forced-a i r coo ling is performed.
Remarks) The required wind speed is obtained by using a unit adaptor.
- 65 -
The unit adapters are provided with three-phase fan motors (model No.
5915PT-20W-B30-S04 made by N.M . B.), one for models 6S-12S each and two for
models 15S-22S each.
However, those produced in June, 1990 or earlier are provided with single-phase
fin motors (model No, 5915PC-20T- B30-100 made by N.M.B.).
As an example of the three-phase fan motor for cooling, the model #5915PT made
by N.M.B. is shown below. For the single-phase fin motor model #5915PC, refer
to Appendix 3.
[Specifications]
Max . Max.
Fre- air static
Model Voltage quency flow pres- Speed Cur- Input Noise Weight
m3/ rent power
sure
V Hz min mmAq rpm A w dB kg
5915PT-20W-B30-S04 200+2 0% 0.8
-15%, 50 5. '.? 13 2650 0 .18 26.0 53
3¢
200+20 %
-15%, 60 6.3 14.3 2900 0.22 26.0 55
3¢
[External dimensions]
--
AIR
......
N
c::i
-
,:tl
r-
,:tl
'D
......
-tll-- -+--+--'
2-MS (0.8P)
38±0.2
- 66 -
7.2 Cooling the Resistor Unit (Models 1S - 3S, Model 1S/15000, Model 2S/15000)
Cooling the resistor unit (except connecting terminal surface) using a wind in
accordance with the undermentioned figure and with a wind shown in Table 7. 2.
For further details, refer to 4.2.2 Resistor unit (Model IS - 3S, IS/I5000,
2S/I5000).
Table 7 .2 Cooling the resistor unit ·
Model IS - 3S
Wind speed More than 2 m/sec
Mounting panel
Thermostat
1f
Alll FW\V
More than 2m/sec.
- 67 -
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND MAINTENANCE AREA
8.1 External Dimensions

As for the external dimensions of the spindle orientation circuit and the speed
gain switching circuit, refer to the chapters "Spindle orientation" and "Speed
gain switching c i rcuit" respectively.
8.1.1 AC spindle servo unit models 1S - 3S, model 1S/15000, model 2S/15000
(orientation using position coder)
(Refer to the item 8.1.3 f or the resistor unit and 8.1.4 as far the connectors.)
....
0
+---i.-=®::_____________ __,__
<l>
71 F~
c= - N
N
r-- b "'
0
~
"'
- 1=L--
t= - ""....
I.
1
16
250 MAX. ._--'-~ I~
--:
280
C I Weight 8 kg
I
.... 124 4
- 68 -
8.1.2 AC spindle servo unit models 1S - 3S, model 1S/15000, model 2S/15000
(orientation using magnetic sensor)
L ... N
N
t--
0 0
V"I M C\
MM , - - - - i='=== 0
M
I
I
I
I
OPTION PCB I
I
I
I
I
I(. ___ I= ...
=-
t=- -
C\
250 I
I
76
250MAX.
230
1·
r - - - - - - - - - - - ---,
I I
I I
I I
: OPTION PCB 1
Weight 8 kg
Mounting face
4 124 4
- 69 -
8.1.3 Resistor unit (order specification: A068-6052-K050)
Two resistor units of the undermentioned external dimensions are used for
A06B-6052-K051 .
2-M4
0 0
0
rr, ~
Thermostat
....
0
25 25 75
100
Weight: 2.7 kg
8.1.4 Connector
,~ Symbol
Specification" \
A (B) C (D) Number of
terminals
MR-50LFH 67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
MR-20LFH 39 . 3 44 . 9 39.8 17 20
MR-20LMH
Remarks Name of components
Symbol Name
® ·
I
MR - ( I L
CD Connector cover
IXIO ~ 0 Cable clamp
I - -- -- A ------i
G) Spring for connector clamp
1---- - - - (B) - -- - -
© Screw for connector clmap
G) Male connector
- 70 -
8.1 .5 AC line filter (order specification: A81L-0001-0083/3C)
6-M4 x 0.7
2 -$-
AC253V24A0.15rnH 391 <D
MFG! I DATE.--!----, lO
F.P.L. MADE IN JAPAN

3 5
-$-
6.0
12.5 35±0.5 12.5
lO
c::i
+l
lO
cxi
.....
95 ± 0.5 50 ± 0.5 I
I. 110 ,--6-0,
I
Weight: 2 kg
- 71 -
8.1 .6 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, 8S, 12S, m odel 3S/ 12000, 6S/ 12000, 8S/8000, 12S/ 8000,
m odel SP, 12P, 15P, 18P, model 8VH (with unit adaptor)
(Refer to i t em 8.1 .10 for t h e ext er na l dimensions for the unit adap t or and i t em
8.1 . 4 for connectors . )
300
200
0
l
-
00
--
/ I
/
0
[
0
[
- r---
[
0 00
ex, 0
'<I' tn r- - -
F7
I
I
I
___,
I
I
I [
0 I
I
I
I
I
I
----- -- ----- - ------ - - -- -

I
L- - -
- I!
" [
'' ,-
I
~
00
135
329
Wight: 23 kg
- 72 -
8.1.7 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, 8S, 12S, model 3S/12000, 6S/12000, 85/8000, 12S/8000,
model BP, 12P, 15P, 18P, model BVH (without unit adaptor)
300
200
0
/
- -
c~ - ,,,== ~
C
r--- ~ '
"'
°'
C'<l
I
i
Ct
t.. --- 'l

~
Ci!: j
'- i
I
-
□
°'
"'
r--- ---------------------,I 274
I
I
I
I
I
I
Weight: 17 kg
- 73 -
8.1.8 AC spindle servo unit model 15S, 18S, 22S, model 15$/8000, 18$/6000, 22$/6000,
model 22P, 30P, 40P, model 12VH (with unit adaptor)
(Refer to item 8.1.11 for the external dimensions for the unit adaptor and the
item 8.1.4 for the connectors.)
1) In case where a protection cover is attached (Sept. 1990 on)
94
47 00
6l • 6l
Protection cover
A300- 0001 - 0097
00
00
0
0
0 ----------------- ,- -
I
I
I
OP TI ON P . C.B. I
I
I
I
I
I
0 ------------------ L-
□
□
. Protection cover 00
A300-000l - 0098
131
300 15
- 74 -
2) In case where no protection cover is attached (Aug. 1990 or earlier)
~, 47
I
I
294
200 '
Im~
~ ,-0
.
•• •
' (5) I I (5) 00
00
. ..
. ol
. - - ·- - - - - - - -
ol
r
''
00 I
\()t')
a) a) I ..
'
~
• -------- - -
L
ol
(Q) ..:-· '; - - ;....,...,(>~;··,1(Q)

0
00
----.J I I l____,
-~~
131
300 315
Weight: 40 kg
- 75 -
8.1.9 AC spindle servo unit model 15S, 18S, 22S, model 15S/8000, 18S/6000, 22S/6000,
model 22P, 30P, model 12VH (without unit adaptor)
1) In case where a protection cover is attached (Sept. 1990 on)
~
'----- cover
Protection
A300-0001-0097
.------------------
CPTI ON P.C.B.
.------------------ L-
□
□
Protection cover
A300 - 0QOl - 0098
-,-------,-
I
---- ------------,
- 76 -
2) In case where no protection cover is attached (Aug. 1990 or earl ier)
300
I 2 00 I
I I
.(0) I I (0)
I
. •I
• .
)! _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
•
r
OPTION P.C.B. ol
0 0
in N N
('-. ('-. en
<O
.
to-- - - - - - - - - -
.,
L
TERMINAL SCREW
MB (7 POINTS )
~ I
4 - ~ 10
I
=~-~..:.;..<),_..,.,:.;~~~IQ)
274
en
N
r-- -- - - ---7
Weight: 30 kg
- 77 -
8.1.10 Unit adaptor (models 6S - 12S, order specification: A068-6059-K031)
1) Three-phase fan motor included (July, 1990 on)
AIR FLOW FAN MOTOR

158
0
00 0 0
00
i.JI ~
0 OJ
0 0
00 +
~"---"t-L----___.Jl II 1
LJ
IO
200 .
2ga
- 78 -
2) A single-phase fan motor included (June, 1990 or earlier)
AIR F LOW FAN MOTOR

153
00 0 0
00
i
I
I
00 l ' .- 1
135
-l
II
II
I
I 200
jl 10
298
- 79 -
8.1.11 Unit adaptor (m odels 15S • 22S, order specification: A06B-6059-K032)
1) Three-phase fan motor included (July, 1990 on)
AIR FLOW
◊
182 FAN MOTOR
a\' \
--{ ~}- 1+15-

I
1....-.()M 11 I II
0 tec:::ltll 0
00 0 0
0 0 0
D
CD CD
0' C,J
0 0
D
00 1)- ft)-
'I
"~
13 1
.I 200
.508
- 80 -
2) A single-phase fan motor included (June, 1990 or earlier)
AIR FLOW
2
182
,e\«
\ l7
I
FAN MOTOR
'\ \
~ ·~ -A-
00
m -M''
(!) 111!111
0
I II .
0
(!)
00 0
0
00 00
"'
0
<;J
0
0
I. 131
00 --ffi-
I
I. 200
12 n
.I
-
-ffi-
308
- 81 -
8.1.12 Power transformer, m odels 1S - 3S (order specification: A06B-6052-J001)
1 15 75
310
N
.....
0
..,
N
150
250
!llax. 2 17
340
Dimensions of transformer without cover for model s 1S - 3S

310 75
N
.....
0 .....
ID ID
N M
-l- + N
ID
250
I 340
370
I 55 150
23 5
30
Note) Nets are covered on four sides and the plate is covered on the top .
Dimensions of transformer with cover for models 1S - 3S
- 82 -
8.1.13 Power transformer, models 6S, 8S (order specification: A06B-6044-J006)
135 91
370
Terminal M6 N
..,.
0
"'
M
+ +
300 I !lO
400 M ax . 270
Dimensions of transformer without cover (models 6S, 8S)
3 70 I 9 I
©
.1
\(;)) -.,.
I - f--
I
-
♦
"'
0 M
"' ..,.
I
_,_
I
I+ +I "'
00
300 I
I I
I
400 1 90
460 310
Note) Nets are covered on four sides and the plate is covered on the top.
Dimensions of t ransformer with cover (Models 6S, 8S)
- 83 -
8.1.14 Power transformer, models 12S, 15S (order specification: A06B-6044-J007)
450 16 1 97
1--
Terminal M6
(Q) N
V
"'
"'
460
300 190
480 Max. 300
Dimensions of transformer without cover for models 12S, 15S
150 I
97
© I
\9)I . -..,.
- t-
.,,
❖
0
on.....
"" ..,
I I --
I+ +I "'
IX)
300 I
I 480
600
I 19 0
350
Note) Nets are covered on four sides and the plate is covered on the top.
Dimensions of transformer with cover for models 12S, 15S
- 84 -
8.1.15 Power transform er for M odels 18S, 22S (order specification: A06B-6044-J010)
5 40 170
Terminal M8
0 ""
"'
0
0
"'
300 190
570 Max.3 15
Di mensions of transf ormer without c over (Models 18S , 22S)
5 40 ., 103
@ (9) -
;;;
- J-l J
I
I
❖
... "';;:;
0
""
♦
I I -~
f+ +I 0
r-
I
-i-
.n4
--ci
-
-F
)....
300 I ''
I I I I
l
5 70 190
70 0 360
Note) Nets are covered on four side s and the plate i s covered on the t op .
Dimen sions of tran sforme r with cove r (Model s 18S, 22S)
- 85 -
8.2 Maintenance Area
8.2.1 AC spindle servo unit models 1S, 1.55, 2S, 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000 (orientation using position coder}
320 194MAX
20 280 20 20 l 74MAX
0
l!)
0 0
0 LO
LO M
0
0
.....
- 86 -
8,2.2 AC spindle servo unit models 1S, 1.5S, 2S, 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000 (orientation using magnetic sensor)
290 194MAX
20 250 20 20 l 74MAX
0
lJ')
0 0
0
lJ')
lJ')
M ----------------
0
0
- 87 -
8.2.3 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, 8S, 12S, model 3S/12000, 6S/12000, 8S/8000, 12S/8000,
model SP, 12P, 15P, 18P, model 8VH (with unit adaptor)
340 339
20 300 ,. 20 2=-"'--o.....+-i-- - --___,3'-'l'-'9'-_ _ _ _~
0
lD
0
0
0 lD
lD
'°
0
0
- 88 -
8.2.4 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, 8S, 12S, model 3S/12000, 6S/12000, 8S/8000, 12S/8000,
model BP, 12P, 15P, 18P, model SVH (without unit adaptor)
340 204
20 300 20 20 184
0
lD
0
lD
0 "<I"
0
'°
0
0
- 89 -
8.2.5 AC spindle servo unit model 15S, 1BS, 22S, model 15S/B000, 1BS/6000, 22$/6000,
model 22P, 30P, model 12VH (with unit adaptor)
340 335
20 300 20 2 315
u
e •
0
0
o-D
- Cl)
0
0
0
- 90 -
8.2.6 AC spindle servo unit model 155, 185, 225, model 155/8000, 185/6000, 22S/6000,
model 22P, 30P, 40P, model 12VH (without unit adaptor)
340 204
2
=0=----t-1- - -- - -=3 =
0=0_ __ ___1-t,._2=0 =20=-,-i-~--.,_,
18=4"--- - -I
0
ID
0
ID
0 ,.....
0
Cl'
0
0
- 91 -
8.3 Panel Hole Machining Diagram and Mounting
8.3.1 AC spindle servo unit model 1$, 1.5$, 2$, 3S, model 1S/15000, 2$/15000
(For resistor unit) (Mounting status and cooling air direction)

Mounting panel
4-MS
1J lf
ON
CO ID
N N 1J 7J
Thermostat
50
84
]7 1J 1f
A ir flow
Greater than 2m/sec
Panel hole machining diagram and mounting diagram
(For spindle control unit) (Mounting status and cooling air direction)
/ Mounting panel
4 · MS
CX)
+ r-- -- ----
/ 'fr 'tr
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..,.
-
. "'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,__
IL ___ _
---- '-.... \,........ __...,
00
22
1
I
20 0
24 4
Tl 22 ~ 1f 1f
Air flo w
Greater than 2m/sec
Note) The cooling fan is not provided for the spindle control unit and resistor
unit. Cool the radiator using a fan _having greater than 2 m/sec. of air
flow.
It i s recommended to provide a packing (acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber, NBR

(soft type)) to protect o il and dust by the MTB.
- 92 -
8.3.2 AC spindle servo unit model 6S, BS, 12S, model 3S/12000, 6S/12000, BS/B000, 12S/B000,
model BP, 12P, 15P, 1BP, model BVH
(Panel hole machining diagram) (Mounting status and

cooling air direction)
I'-
4 - MS Mounting p a n e l - - - ~ ·"
<N
....
✓
..... --4-
/
-
Ir-
\
~
I'\
DD
[:. / I=
0 <D
[ ;e1~
ro 0
..... .....
[ ~
[ ~
I.,.
<N
.... 45 zoo
-( )-
t= ~~
DD
45
~
290 \
~ Air flow
~ Greater than
3m/sec
Note) The cooling fan is not provided for the spindle control unit. Cool the
radiator using a fan having greater than 3 m/sec. of air flow.
It is recommended to provide a packing (acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber, NBR,

soft type) illustrated in the f i gure above to protect from oil and dust by the
MTB.
- 93 -
8.3.3 AC spindle servo unit model 15S, 18S, 22S, model 15S/8000, 18S/6000, 22S/6000,
model 22P, 30P, 40P, model 12VH
Dimensions of hole on mounting diagram ·Mounting diagram and direction of air
'.!I V
4-MB
I
-G-
Mounting panel _ DD
I
r--
'II
0 I
~I
"'
I
N I
r- I
I
L.
I
I
~, I
4st
'
200
290
'
T4s
I
DD Air flow
Greater than
3.5 m/sec
Note)
Note) The cooling fan is not provided for the spindle control unit. Cool the
radiator using a fan having greater than 3.5 m/sec. of air flow.
However, for the model 40P, refer to the items related to "Spindle Motor P
series" in Part III.
It is recommended to provide a packing (acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber, NBR,

soft type) illustrated in the figure above to protect from oil and dust by the
MTB.
- 94 -
9. CONNECTION
9.1 Connection Diagram
9.1.1 Models 1S - 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000

(i) Resistor unit A06B-6052-K050 is used.
Conntctct (AMI')
AC spindle servo unit llow1UI(
lSDllO-t AC Spl:Ddk PIDIOJ
Sotket c:aa:in:10, AHr
f' \ 4 J10UJ.4 ,
[j,111 :01.~111
l I ho,ulni:
~b~nc llr:i
\ Ill
AOISII
11
0 ~::. n I'll
r.
IUl
l'A •5V l S071M
•
IIA 0\
, Pin
J50690-1
nh1nt1
u " " '
'·-"'Iu~z1v: ,~YI (:E
Olll S!i 0111
CIUAI ll"I II
G
Crimp ltrffli~ f&n DOlllf llnt Smw lt rmin ~
~ - ~ ~,.lrcM;:.
cui.;.jrn:.;.•. .11_;.;rM.wl
;. _ _ __
"'_ _
*l AC
SCKW lcrmfa:J SFlzdk n:10101
r-
Po wt: t
tnnt•
1it===~:
I
I
I
I
"'
~T ro,ma
• (op1lonJ
L - -l
Fon motor
T'" or unlI•1
[±J O-!T.,_2_1'--'''-''-~ -...:T;_::'c...-:,0,I Ruh l in unit
,un,
F '" Cri:nr
[OJ
AC power
l•plu1c
f 7,S'M o,
L -'No-rUKtrWn *l
' - - -- -- -- -- -- - - - ' ,crmbuJ
Cd~p
lmnin&J
Thu;n0:1u1 Unc
l40- ◄ !O VAC
To r:uimtia abbt t
* l Unit fan motor and breaker are provided by the . MTB.

*2 Use AC line filter without fail when power transformer is not used.
(ii) Resistor unit A06B-6052-K051 is used (in parallel with 30n)
Ccnnutcr CAMP)
AC spindle servo unit llc1ubq
JS07:?0- J AC Splndlt r.1010,
Oi l
., CNI
"'' c::i:u:;nu,01
AMP
IX.:.; -"!l
,,,,l l''A +5V I houiln1
\Ill
10 1.n,
* ~'" uu .-!!. u
V
Tl
' •
..
JIii IIA' 01''
•
0 112
"
ss '
0111
15071M
Pin
350690-7
II lw.rl
ffi
1
I " •"· I l' .X
G I " I V wI
Tl Crimp lermllul Fan maier title s~- tcrmi:nJ
,.~, ,...,
I
tnru jrwv I""'I Ml
~" ._.,_
,--• ,·--
AC
u,
....··~ ·i--:
: 9'-----
Scnw lr.nnuuJ Splts=!k: mo10,
M<
r:w., . : <>-----.
I I
~
T
lunt-
ro,mr
(01ulon)
" T
C
'"'
=• T:
I
'----'
f ;n motor
ar unlt
I
•1
.......
G
, Fvw ot
Crimp lCfflllniJ
q1: rx ~ 83
"' '
T? I
Obp
I. I
AC power
r
I 9lSA)
ltlffllrul
L. .J tfo•l\t• bfukcl 1t 1
~1o~IOVAC
ThcnDoiut widac
k O
Mlgnctic conttol a bW:l
*l Unit fan motor and breaker are provided by the MTB.

*2 Use AC line filter without f ail when power transformer is not used.
- 95 -
(iii) 4 resistor units A06B-6052- K050 are used
Cc.1M:::ter (AMI')
AC s pindle scro unit
.
AC Spltldlc motor
OI i
~ lX ~
O Ii cu:
.. 1"'
carmec10,
l
I'll l'A
houdni
+5V l 50,aM
AMP
..." .• ''
:.?Ol.1'11 6
IUI ' ,,
Ill\ lfA I)\'
3 50690-7
u1n
""
n~ 0112 ss 0 111
.,
-·.. M
w.
'-- .,. 1-- •</ 11.r. I .- .~ lw.r I
I 11 I v I II' I tE
- ··-- wn , Tl Crhnp lnmiMI Fuirno1or !U'lc
(rwul~vjrw,,(
Strew 1cnnhul
"'
*I w oo
.. ....- ·i ·r : ,}-- --- -

: <>-----.
.
Sant tttr:1lruJ SpiNSlt maier
,..
AC
~~;, ..m,. . .... m 'I ''
..
L---'
T • ( opUun)
Fan m01or
" t: ofunil
G
G Crimp urmhul
7
-;;;- IX~ EB Mt
n I
L __ l
AC powu
f ; f,ca~o, Crimp
1rr.:-.wl
L .sth,-fu,=: lm: aln 1c\
f/o~ IO VAC
M3gnetJc control c:ibinct
* l Unit fan motor and breaker are provided by the MTB .

*2 Use AC l ine filter without fail when power transformer is not used.
9.1.2 Models 6S - 22S, 3S/12000 - 22S/6000, BP· 40P, BVH, 12VH
AllP
Conncclor
AC Spindle K:mJ u nit
·11o u ~
Oil ""' CN:

.. ,
)50120-1
Socket
A C Spindle motor
Canncc:utt
J:.5
Mil·
I= X~ , ... 11:
.!!-
,...!!- E.!,!.!..
t'N:!
D
K4
l J0U9-6
'
I' ll
? I
l'A +,V II
AUP
......
~b .gnctlcs
50Ull Al!IT I U T I
'""
un-2ot FH SJ;n1l lhu
•
IID
5
HA
·•
01'
l .107112- 1
Pin
1'6 AIST! IIT! c.!!... 9 H 1 350690-7
abinct
MR- 0 1'.! s~ Ufl
...
TUDI Tl.ML
lOUUI
,_ 1·.x w, v I
I U,Z I
tE
OM 011411 OT Kl
J:1 SMI OU.I t 11 D1' 1 ,. Ptn,11 &, I II I \' II' I
TD LM I
""' IDT:
Crimr
. ....
...
, OM
aou TUI> Tl Kl
termhul
(Tl-I)
010.U TUlt
:
' , IRo! so!rol AC
Tl
Spindl.c molor
·1 OVII Al.MO ,~
-7---1:---, ......
IEll
AC N~uac: btuhr
Tl on: ALM:
R
..- , ..
~ 1,
3-phi:Jc R f - I ...,,.. ••
2◄ 0V Pawu s I
I
4 BO V
S
H-o 0-+-'>-----'----<
lnn.lfam,cr ' I
c}-f-o- :
- I 1:1
T CIU'I
DA I
"" ' ""

"' I
I
T • (Oplion)
•
Tl
r-, I
iit
tll": lln' !
0
0
'L _ _
' L_ _ _ .J
Crir.or
lfflnilul ~IX ac .. CJ<)
I I I
fQcot~
•t
L_.,
*l Unit fan motor and breaker are provided by the MTB.

*2 On the PCBs with a version No. of lOB or later, CNl-39, 41, 43, CN-3-15 and
16 are deleted.
- 96 -
9.2 Cable Routing
Refer to Appendix, Cable Routing Specif ications
9.2.1 Cable routing diagram of models 1S - 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000
To regenerative discharge resistor
1 2
T2
Spindle control
ow
1 2
circuit T3
Al 6B- 1100- 0200
Control circuit
Al 6B- 1100- 024O
(PCB 1) To magnetics
circuit
(PCB 2)
Regenerative discharge
resistor unit
RSTGGUV W
To magnetics To AC motor
cabinet or CNC
From 3-phase To AC motor cabinet
AC power power line
Fig. 9.2.1 Cable routing diagram of models 1S - 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000
- 97 -
9.2.2 Cable routing diagram of models 6S - 12S, 3S/12000, SS/12000, BS/8000, 12S/8000,
SP, 12P, 15P, SVH
Spindle control circuit

Control circuit A20B- 1003-0010
A208- 1003- 0020
(PCB 1)
(PCB2)
CNl CN3 CN2 TB

~
To speed and
load meters
RSTGGUVW
To fffl moto, V
of unit (Refer to 11
To magnetics cabinet
or CNC cabinet
To AC motor
section 10.2)
To fan motor From 3-phase To AC motor

of motor power power line
Fig. 9.2.2 Cable routing (Models 6S · 12S, 3S/12000, 6S/12000, 8S/8000, 12S/8000, SP, 12P, ·
15P, SVHI
- 98 -
9.2.3 Cable routing diagram of models 15S • 22S, 15S/8000, 18S/6000, 22S/6000,
22P, 30P, 40P, 12VH
Spindle control circuit
Control circuit A20B- 1003-0010

A20B-1003-0120
(PCB I)
(PCB2)
CNI CN3 CN2 TB

~
To speed and
load meters
T2 Tl
~ _ RSTGUVW
To AC moto r
To magnetics
cabinet or CNC
cabinet
RSTGGUVW
To"" mo<o,ofu,1' ~
To fan motor From 3-phase To AC motor
of motor AC power power line
Fig. 9.2.3 Cable routing (Models 15S - 22S, 15S/8000, 18S/6000, 22S/6000, 22P, 30P, 40P, 12VH)
- 99 -
9.3 Detailed Connection Diagram
9.3.1 Connection of power source

(1) AC spindle servo unit Models 1S - 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000
• Without power transformer
,-----,
AC200V -¢ R
220V I No fuse
230V -Q breaker
1 AC line
filter
S AC spindle
I servo unit
50/ 60Hz -¢~-----.,,j T
G
Four-wire cab tire cable
• With power transformer
AC380V
R
415V I No fuse I
460V breaker
s AC spindle
servo unit
50/ 60H z
T
G
Four-wire cabtire cable
Model Applicable wire Unit terminal screw

1S Greater than 2 mm 2
1.5S Greater than 3.5 Il1Il12
2S, Greater than 3.5 mm2 M4

1S/15000,
2S/15000
3S Greater than 5.5 Il1Il1 2
- 100 -
(2) AC spindle servo unit Models 6S - 22S, 3S/12000 - 22S/6000, BP - 40P, BVH,
12VH
. Without power transformer
r-----,
AC200V
220V
---¢ No fuse R
230V ---Q breaker

1
s
AC spindle
I servo unit
50/ 60Hz ---¢ T
'------~
G
Four-wire cab tire cable
• With power transformer
R
No fuse
I
AC380V breaker
415V
s
AC spindle
460V servo unit
T
50/ 50Hz
G
Four-wire cabtire cable
Model Applicable wire Unit terminal screw
6S, Greater than B mm2 M5

3S/12000,
BP, 12P
BS,12S, Greater than 14 mm2
6S/12000,
BS/BODO,
12S/BOOO,
15P, 18P, 8VH
15S, Greater than 14 mm2 (Note) MB

15S/BOOO,
22P, 12VH
18S,22S, Greater than 22 mm2 (Note)

18S/6000,
22S/6000,
30P, 40P, SOP
Note) Use the flame ratardant poli-flex cable (MLFC)

(Maximum temperature of conductor: 105° C)
- 101 -
9.3.2 Connectio n of AC spindle servo unit and magnetics cabinet
(1) Models 1S - 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000
Magnetic cabinet AC spindle servo unit

+24V (Spindle control input signal)
CNI
Emergency stop by contact
ESPl ( 47)
RV Emergency stop signal
(open)
Operation possible by contact (B contact)
(closed) ESP2 (48)
ov
+24V
MRDYI (7) Machine preparation
completed signal
Operation possible by contact
(closed) Parameter setting
MRDY2 ( 8) F - 01
-ov
+24V
Forward movement by contact SFR ( 45) Forward rotary
(closed) command signal
SRV ( 46 ) Reverse rotary

Reverse movement by contact
(closed) command signal
However, when SFR and SRV
contacts are simultaneously OS ( 14 )
( closed), operation stops.
ov
DA2 (31 )
Analogue speed command Speed command annlogu

voltage is applied voltage input
E ( 32 ) ov
ov
ov
+15V
+15V Power supply
(29)
+ISV
- 102 -
(Spindle control output signnl)
CNI
+24V
TLMI ( 5) ~ Torque control command sig

(small torque control value)
Command to reduce output
torque by contact (closed)
OT ( 6)
+24V
0V
ARSTl (19 ) Alarm reset signal
Release from alarm status RV
by contact (closed)
ARST2 ( 20 )
0V
+24V
CTH ( 17)
Low speed gear selection by RV Spindle speed/ low speed signi
contact (closed)
Medium gear speed selection
by contact (closed)
Orientation command generated
by contact (closed)
ORCMl ~ Orientation command signal
ORCM2 ( 26 )
0V
Can be used as a forward or SARI ( 1)
reverse rotary command RV
;,{ Speed arrival signal
completion signal '/ Contact by speed arrival (closed)
SAR2 ( 2)
0V
Can be used as a stop command SSTl (3)
RV
completed signal
'l{ Zero-speed signal
Contact (closed) at zero speed
SST2 (4)
0V
Can be used as detection signal SDTI ( 15 )

at gear shift RV
;, { Speed detection signal
'/ Contact (closed) at setting speed
SDT2 ( 16 ) or below
0V
Can be used as a torque TLM5 ( 9)
control command completed RV
/,{ To,q•e wotrnl m prng,eu sigo,1
signal
TLM6 ( 10 )
1 Contact (closed) when torque
control command is input
0V
CNI
LDTI ( 33)
Can be used when detecting

load size
RV
LDT2 ( 34)
'l{ Lond detection signal
Contact ( closed) when the load
size is larger tl1an tl1c value set
by parameters
ov
- 103 -
(Spindle con trol output signal)
CNI
Can be used as an orientation
Command completion signal
I RV II ORARI ( 22)
Orientation completion signal
Contact (closed) when orientalion
ORAR2 ( 23 ) is completed
...L
ov
Is used as an alarm signal I RV I
I
ALM! ( 11 )
-{ Alarm signal
ALM2 ( 12)
~~ I; Contact (closed) when an
alarm occurs
_j_
ov B con tact
LMl ( 49 ) Load meter indicate

voltage
1~ 1
,~,
Load indicator
SMl ( 50 ) Tachometer display
I Tachometer voltage
OM ( 18)
' ov
- 104 -
(2) Models 6S - 22S, 3S/12000 - 22S/6000, 8P - 40P, 8VH, 12VH
Magnetics cabinet AC spindle servo unit

[Spindle control input signal )
+24V
CNl
ESPl (47) Emergency stop signal
Emergency stop when RV
contact is open
(Contact B)
Operation ready when ESP2 ( 48)
contact is closed
OV
T+24V
MRDYl ( 7)
RV Machine ready signal
Operation ready when ro ~
contact is closed
MRDY2 ( 8)
lL I
.J
Parameter setting F · 01
- ov
- +24V
Forward rotation when SFR ( 45 ) RV Forward rotation
contnct is closed command signal
Reverse rotation when
contact is closed SRV ( 46) Reverse rotation
RV command signal
It stops when both SFR and
SRV contacts are closed at the OS ( 14 )
same time
ov
,- DA2 ( 31 )
Analog velocity command Speed command 1 OOkil
voltage is given . analog voltage input
ov
ov
+isv +1sv power
( 29 )
+1sv
(Note 1) ,, OVR 1 ( 27)

i Parameter- Parameter
Override is continuously I.Bk I
I
I
setting, settingF-03
done with the variable VR I I r---,
resistor.
I I F-02 1
(Note 1) :
I lovR2 ( 28) L
R
( 14)
ov ov
Spindle rotation
speed override ·
- 105 -
(Spindle control output signalJ
CNl
(Note 1) +2 4V
(TLM)
TLML ( 5 ) IPv7 Torque limit command
"----t- - - - - - - - - - - - 0 . . : __;__ _,____~ signal (Small torque limit value)
Command to make the
o'utput torque small is
output when tJ1e
TLMH (2 1 ) IPv7
~ -7 -- -- -- -- - - - - 0 - - -- - - - - - ~ (Large torque limit value)
contact is closed.
OT ( 6)
+ 24V
ov
ARSTl ( 19 )
Alarm status is released RV Alarm reset signal
witl1 contact open.
ARST2 ( 20 )
OV
+24V
CTH ( 17 )
Low speed gear is selected RV Spindle high speed/low
witl1 contact closed. speed signal
Mid-speed gear is selected ..___,__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _C_T_M-0""(_2...c.

4..:..)_....,__--l RV Spindle medium speed
when contact is closed. signal
Orientation command is
given when contact is
ORCMl r" " \
"----+- - - -- - - - - - - - 0 ~ signal
I ==: Orientation command ·
closed. ·
ORCM2 ( 26 )
OV
Can be used .as ready signals SARI ( 1)
for forward/reverse RV
Speed arrival signal
Contact closes when
SAR2 (2) arrived,
Can be u sed at complete SST 1 ( 3)

signal for stop command . RV
Zero-speed signal
Contact closes when
SST2 ( 4) speed is zero.
ov
Can be u sed as detection SDTl ( 15 )
at gear shift. RV Speed detectiori signal
Contact closes when it
is slower than the preset
SDT2 ( 16 ) speed.
Can be used as complete

ov
TLM5 (9 )
signal for torque limit RV Torque limiting signal
command. Contact closes when the
TLM6 ( 10) torque limit command
is input.
OV
CN3
LDT l ( 17 )
RV
Load detection signal
Cwi be used to detect
When the load becomes greater
the load. LDT2 ( 18 ) /
.-------+- - - - o - -f than the value set by parameter,
the contact is closed.
ov
- 106 -
(Spindle control output signal )
Can be used ns orientation ORARl ( 22 )

command complete signal RV Orientation completion
signal Contact closes when
ORAR2 ( 23) orientation is completion
OV
ALMl ( 11 )
Can be used ns alarm RV
signal Alarm signal Contact
closes when under alarm.
ALM2 ( 12)
OV (Contact B)
CN3
ALl ( 8)
Cnn be u sed to display the
/, [ ."".lnrm descriptions code
descriptions of a!11Im on ,' SJgna!
the CRT, etc. AL2 ( 9)
f [ There are alarms No. I to 15.
AL4 ( 10 )
ALB ( 11 )
,,-[
COM ( 13)
1[
CNl TB
LMl ( 49) and LM Load meter indicate
voltage
~ Power meter TB
SMl ( 50 ) and SM Speed meter indicate
voltage
TB
OM ( 18 ) and OM
ov
- 107 -
9.3.3 Connection of AC spindle servo unit and AC spindle motor
(1) Models 1S - 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000
Spindle servo unit AC.Spindle motor
ICN21
Overheat signnl Eha)OH l OHl
OH2
OH2
~ov (2)
+SV power supply

+sv ,. +sv
(J~ lI I
I
OV\: ov
(I ) r'"'
I ~
PA
PA I ; ,
Speed feedback (14) I I
signnl RA I': RA
(J~ t-~
PB
(I~
PB : r,,
RB I I !'
(J 7) sJJ _____ ss RB
-4=- f20
n- n·~
P'°tiTsc--~ Thermostat
u z
TI gene~~tor
u '
u
~
V
V X
'\
w V I I I
w i'\.Y
G
G w G ~ 3 -phase
G 200 VAC
Fan motor
AC Spindle
motor
~uru,ro,
cooling
single
phase 200V
r-- - - , fan motor
❖ I
FMU
AC200V ~ No fuse 1 I FMV
❖ breaker: , Bllf
L ____ .JI
• The power source of the unit and the fan motor for cooling the motor is t o be
connected to the no- fus e breaker.
Fan motor for cooling the unit is provided by the MTB.
- 108 -
(2) Models 6S - 22S, 3S/ 12000 - 22S/6000, 8P - 40P, 8VH , 12VH
Spindle servo unit AC spindle motor
!CN2l
OHI
Overheat signal
~ OHI OH2
....c OH2
-:-ov (2)
+sv ,, +5V
+SY Power supply
u~ I
I
\
I
OV\ I ov
( 1) r-
PA I -' PA
Speed 0-0 I II II
RA I ' : RA
U5l t- J..
PB I - PB
OS I l i
I I : RB
RB ' I '
(17) sslJ _____
I •'
ss
. tz()
r 7
I
, ____ ' L._..-
L.:-. ·--J Thermometer
[ill
u u z Pulse gcneralor
~
V V X
'\
w w V
~r
G
G w G .,._
G Three-phase 200VAC
fan motor
AC spindle
motor
[fil FHU
Fan motor voltage Ro
AC200Y So
FHY
FIi
To
Three-phase
!TI
(or single-phase} The fan motor shall be provided
200V AC fan motor by the machine tool builder
Fan motor is provi ded by the MTB.
- 109 -
9.3.4 Connecting AC spindle servo Uf!it with unit adapter (Models 6S - 22S)
When wiring the fan motor of the unit adapter, use the terminal block T2 for a
fan motor in the AC spindle servo unit. Fuses are included. (See the figure
below.)
(1) AC spindle servo unit and unit adapter (In case of three-phase fan motor,
after July, 1990)
• 1 Fan motor 1 0
1----------------~-
0
Terminal screw M3
I F'UR !
IT]]]
I FUT I Fuse SA
Terminal screw M4
Wiring
AC spindle Unit adapter
servo unit T2 terminal block
Ro ':,: ,.JFMU
SO~ ~~FMV
To\ FMW
Cable 37/0.26 {2cm')
- llO -
(2) AC spindle servo unit and unit adapter (In case of single-phase fan motor,
before June, 1990)
l ___ Fan motor ____ L 0
Tenninal screw M3
I F'Ult j
I F'Usj
!F'UT!
Fuse SA
Terminal screw M4
Wiring
AC spindle Unit adapter
servo unit T2 terminal block
Rov
So
To 8 ~
J
G!ble 37/0.26 (2111ll')
- 111 -
9.3.5 Connection of AC spindle servo unit and resistor unit
(1) A06B-6052-K050
Resistor unit
T3
T2 2 (I)
3. 5mm
( I)
Resistor
AC spindle
~ervo unit (2)
(2) 15 n
T 5, 5-4 T5.5-4
Magnetic cabinet TH
Tl-3
Open at 120±6 deg C
Detects temperature abnormalities

in the resistor unit
(2) A06B- 6052-K051
Resistor unit
Resistor unit
T3 T3
T2 (I) (! )
(I)
AC spindle
servo unit (2) Resistor (2) Resistor
!,2)
300 30D
Thermostat
normally open
Magnetic cabinet TH at 120 deg C
TH
Refer to (1) as for the connecting line, crimp terminal .
- 112 -
(3) 4 resistor uni t s A06B- 6052-K050 ( 15Q) are used
Resistor unit Resistor unit
T3
(I)
AC
AC Spindle Resistor Resistor
servo unit (2)
(2) 15Q (2) 15Q
Mngentic
cabinet TH TH
Resistor unit Resistor unit
T3 T3
( I) ( I)
Resistor Resistor
(2) 15Q (2) 15Q
TH
(I )
TH TH
Refer to (1) as for connecting line, crimp t erminal .
- 113 -
10. DESCRIPTIONS OF INTERFACE SIGNAL
10.1 Interface Signal Standards

For signals to be transferred between the AC spindle servo unit an~ the
magnetic cabinet, take the following input/output signal rating into due
consideration.
1) Contact input signal A
This is inputted from the exterior to the servo unit,
a) External contact capacity required: Higher than 30 V, higher than 16 mA.
b) The following figure indicates the delay time of the receiver output
signal to the contact input signal.
1---- More than 30 m sec - J

I Closed I
,---------------~
Contact input Open Open
signal
Receiver output
signal
5-20m sec 5-20m sec
Accordingly, the AC spindle servo unit receives signals after 5 to 20 ms

delay when the contact input signal was turned on and off.
c) For the receiver circuit of the AC spindle servo unit, refer to the
following figure when using a no-contact input, etc.
+ 24V +24V
External contact
Receiver output
,---Le-v-el- - , signal
converter
+ circuit
0.IµF-I
ov ov
Servo unit
Signification levels in case of no-contact (at input terminal voltage)

Low level logic "0" Lower than 2 V
High level logic "l" .••.. Higher than 20 V
- 1'14 -
2) Contact output signal Al
This is output from the AC spindle servo unit to the exterior.
a) The AC spindle servo unit side employs a lead relay.

The contact rating is lower than 50 V or lower thari 500 mA at 5 VA or
lower. Use it at 24 VDC, 200 mA or lower, or 48 VDC, 100 mA or lower,
accordingly.
The chattering time of the contact is shorter than 1 m/sec.
The related signals are shown hereunder:
Model Signal name Symbol
lS - 3S, Orientation completion signal ORARl , ORAR2

lS/15000, 2S/15000
6S - 22S,
3S/12000 - 22S/6000,
BP - 40P, 8VH, 12VH
b) If an external relay or another inductive load is connected, insert a

surge absorber in the vicinity of the relay without fail. If a capacitive
load is connected, current limiting resistor in series, and set the power
to be lower than 5 VA including an instantaneous value.
c) If an external lamp is connected, insert a protective resistor so that the
current becomes lower than 500 mA including an instantaneous value.
3) Contact output signal A2

a) The AC spindle sero unit side employes a transistor.

The output rating is as follows:
i. Output voltage maximum 48 V
ii. Output current maximum 200 mA
The related signals are shown hereunder:
Model Signal name Symbol

6S - 22S, Speed arrival signals SARl, SAR2
3S/12000 - 22S/6000,
BP - 40P, 8VH, 12VH Zero-speed signals SSTl, SST2
Speed detecting signals SDTl, SDT2
Spindle alarm signals ALMl, ALM2
Torque limit signals TLM5, TLM6
Load detection signals LDTl, LDT2
b) If an external relay or another inductive load is connected, insert a

surge absorber in the vicinity of the relay without fail. If a capacitive
load is connected, insert a current limiting resistor in series, and set
the power to be within the output rating including an instantaneous value.
c) If an external lamp is connected, insert a protective resistor so that the
current becomes within the rated output current including an instantaneous
value.
- 115 -
4) Contact output signal A3
a) This is output by an open collector (polarized) from the AC spindle servo

unit.
The output rating is as follows:
i. Rated voltage: less than 30 VDC
ii. Output current: less than 40 mADC
iii. Saturated voltage: 1.5 or less (IC= 40 mA)
b) Signal polarity is as follows:
Model Signal name Polarity
Positive (+) Negative (-)
Speed arrival signals SARI SAR2
Zero-speed signals SSTl SST2
Speed detecting signals SDTl SDT2

lS - 3S
Spindle alarm signals ALMl ALM2
Torque limit signals TLMS TLM6
Load detecting signals LDTl LDT2
ALI
6S - 22S Alarm content signals AL2 COM
AL4
ALB
10.2 Spindle Control Signals

Refer to 10.1 "Interface Signal Standards" for standards of the signals.
10.2.1 Emergency stop signal (ESP1, 2)

1) When the contact is ON (closed), the spindle motor and the servo unit is
ready for operation . When the contact is off (open), the magnetic contactor
in the servo unit is OFF, and the spindle motor does not operate.
2) When the contact becomes OFF (open) during rotation of the motor, the spindle
motor will decelerate and stop at once. The magnetic contactor will also
become OFF after the motor stops.
3 ) Wh en this contact is turned on (closed) again, the spindle motor is placed to
be ready for rotation. It rotates immediately when the rotation command is
given. Accordingly, reset the command signals (velocity command, forward
rotation, reverse rotation commands) to the spindle servo unit simultaneously
when the emergency stop signal was inputted.
- 116 -
+24V
Emergency stop signal
(Contact B)
CNI
_ _ _ _E_•S_P_I-{ J--------; Receiver
(47)
ESP2
(48)
ov
Spindle servo unit
10.2.2 Machine ready signal (MRDY1, 2)

1) Mode set by parameters F-01 and F-09 is shown below.
Setting
Mode Contents
F-01 F-09
(A) 0 0 Machine ready signal is not used. Input of the

or emergency stop signal alone will make the spindle
1 motor ready for operation.
(B) 1 0 Machine ready signal is When the contact is off

used to make an operation the electro-magnetic
ready status by double contactor will come OFF
signal. to cut off the motor
power.
(C) 1 1 Power is cut off by
cutting the excitation
signal of the transistor
in inverter section when
the contact is OFF the
electro-magnetic
contactor is still ON.
Note) Contact: Contact of MRDY signal.
The following 2) to 4) are how to use the machine ready signals in each of
the above modes.
2) Mode (A)
Used to minimize the input signal points. It is not necessary to connect the
signal line to the contact.
3) Mode (B) (Standard setting)
(D Used to control an operation ready status by double signal. For example,
when it is necessary to set two electro-magnetic contactor ON/OFF signal
input terminals on machines where the worker must touch the spindle
directly fo r loading and unloading workpieces or tools.
@ When the contact is ON (closed), the electro-magnetic contactor turns ON,
and the motor becomes ready for operation.
CJ) When the contact is OFF (open), the electro-magnetic contactor turns OFF,
and the power to the motor is cut off.
@ If the contact is turned OFF (open) during the rotation of the motor, the
spindle motor will decelerate to a stop at once, and the electro-magnetic
conta ctor will also turn OFF after the motor stops.
- 117 -
@ Do not use the electro-magnetic contactor too frequently (some 100 times)
in a single day, because it may shorten the electro-magnetic contactor's
open/close life.
4) Mode (C)
1 Used in case the open/close of the electro-magnetic contactor is assumed
to be frequent.
0 In machines in which a spindle motor is restricted by the tool unclamp
signal during operation of the automatic tool change (ATC) orientation,
the command of the load meter may become large or large motor current may
flow because of a small shift from the orientation stop position. In
this case, cancel an orientation status during tool unclamp by making OFF
this signal. Orientation status can be made by making ON this signal
without spindle rotation at tool unclamp ending.
If the contact of the orientation command signal is still ON (closed) in
the above@, the OFF/OF of the contact of the machine ready signal will
only cause a small shift of the stop position; it is not necessary to
perform orientation again with another rotation.
Timing chart
Condition) Parameter F-01:1 Use machine ready signal.
Parameter F-09:1 Cut the motor power using MRDY signal.
Orientation command
/!-
Orientation completion signal
Tool change
o!'.!'_j \
OFF ~
ON
_\_ _ _P_u_ll_~-~-f----N-ew---to_o_J_ _ /~~L
@ @ Tool @ mount @
Tool hold / movement / Take off
Spindle unclamp OFF OFF
----------'
ON1..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---; ON
Machine ready signal /
I OFF I ON
+24
I
Excitation cut
r-------7
Machine ready signal 1 Circuit I
MRDYI CN I
L-_ _....:....:.....:..::._:_-(")---..-------4 Receiver -+o--~ I
(07) I L __-:.J I
:, 1Parameter setting!
I Parameter 1
r.:...
F-09 _____ ....JI
I setting F-0 I
MRDYZ
(08)
ov
Spindle servo unit
- 118 -
10.2.3 Forward rotation command signal (SFR)
1) The AC spindle motor will start forward rotation according to the velocity
command (positive voltage) when the following three conditions are satisfied.
~
The contact of emergency s top signal is ON (closed)
The contact of machine ready signal is ON (closed)
The contact of forward rotation command signal is ON (closed)
2) During contact on (closed), the AC spindle motor rotates counterclockwise
(CCW) as viewed from the shaft side according to the command speed.
3) When the contact turns off (open), the AC spindle motor is stopped by the
regenerative braking. After stopping, the base signal of the transistor is
turned off to interrupt the power to the AC spindle motor.
10.2.4 Reverse rotation command signal (SRV)

1) The AC spindle motor will start reverse rotation according to the velocity
command (positive voltage) when the following three conditions are satisfied.
~
The contact of emergency stop signal is ON (closed)
The contact of machine ready signal is ON (closed)
The contact of reverse rotation command signal is ON (closed)
2) During contact on (closed), the AC spindle motor turns clockwise as viewed
from the shaft side according to the command speed.
3) When the contact turns off (open), the AC spindle motor is stopped by the
regenerative braking. After stop, the base signal of the transistor is
turned off to interrupt the power to the AC spindle motor.
4) When the forward rotation command signal and reverse rotation command signal
are turned on simultaneously, the spindle motor stops.
+24
SFR CNl
Receiver
Forward rotation (45) +24
command signal
SRV Receiver
Reverse rotation (46 )
command signal
OS
( 14 )
ov
- 119 -
10.2.5 Analog voltage signal (DA2, El
1) The speed connnand voltage and the AC spindle motor speed are in linear
proportion as shown in the following figure.
Maximum speed
Motmpeed 1
0----------~--
ov + I OV command voltage (DC)
Command voltage
2) Normally, command the positive voltage (0 to +10. 0 VDC). Use the forward/
reverse rotation command signals to distinguish the direction of rotation.
3) The positive/negative command voltages (0 to ±10 VDC) result in the following
figure.
Forward rotation (CCW)

!':------ Forward rotation command
' Motor signal (SFR) ON
I
1
'- , ro t ation
.
I '- speed
I '
I ',
I '
I ' Speed command
1-iov + 1ov1
I
0 Voltage I I E0 Voltage
I I
I I
I
I Reverse rotation command
signal (SRV) ON
Reverse rotation
(CW)
Do not command the positive/negative voltages to the machine whose tool and
workpiece may break or in which the safety cannot be guaranteed when rotated
in the reverse direction by a forward command.
4) Be careful with wiring so that the velocity command voltage line is not
affected by external noises. Use a shielded wire without fail.
5) Compose the speed command voltage (0 to +10 VDC) circuit as shown in the
figure below. In this circuit, the manual input (analog input) and automatic
command (DA converted output) are selectable by relay. If the speed command
voltage exceeds +10 V, it is automatically clamped to max. 10.7 V internally .
Be careful since the motor revolution reaches max. 107% of the rated value,
6) The motor is not rotated when only the speed command voltage is applied. It
rotates when either~ forward or reverse rotation command was given.
7) When the speed command voltage became ±10 V or more, it will automatically be
internally clamped to maximum ±10.7 V. However, pay attention as the motor
speed may rise to a maximum 107% of the rated rotation.
- 120 -
8) The movement of the motor will differ according to the ways the speed command
voltage and the forward/reverse rotation command signals (SFR/SRV) are given.
Change the speed command voltage inputs as the following figure, and then set
the forward/reverse rotation command signals ON (closed).
(Wrong way) (Correct way)
ON ON
Forward/reverce OFF OFF

rotation signal I
I
I I I I
I I I I
Speed command
voltage ""'J.,..J.,..J
I
....J.,..J...,.,P,...,..;;i_,..,
I
I lI -I
OV-------,,--------4----
. : 1JJ7llllllpl77?
: I
7 I
l~?JJJ?J?Jll,(?JJJJ
I I
·. ,
I
I ov----+- - - - - - - ~ , - - - -
I I 1
I I I I
I I I
if
I I I
I I I
I
Motor speed
0 \ v \
9) Example of connection when using the analog output of the CNC.
Speed command voltage

CNl
( 31)
lI I
I
lOOkU
Shield i :
I
I
I
I
, 1
I
I
I
I
I
1·
E
I
earth ~ - - - ------------- __ :,. (32)
•
Connect to the ground ov
terminal of the CNC. Spindle servo unit
10) The input impedance of the speed command voltage receiver circuit of spindle
servo unit is 100 kn.
10.2.6 +15V power (+15V, El

1) This power supply is used to give analog speed command using the variable
register, from outside the unit in manual input.
2) Maximum 30 mA current can be used in this +15 V power source.
10.2.7 Spindle rotation speed override (OVR1, OVR2)

1) Unusable with models 6S - 22S (Models 1S - 3S are not provided with this
function)
2) This signal is used to override the spindle speed of the automatic speed
command, to gain the optimum cutting condition. The NC system also has the
spindle speed override function. Use the function of the NC system normally.
3) When using the speed override function of the AC spindle servo unit,
establish the circuit as shown in the figure hereunder externally.
- 121 -
Cancellation resistance CNI
,~--- _______ ----,e, OVRI
(2 7)
:, Parameter
I setting F-02
I Parameter
VR ~ set ting F-03 _ __,,AA
2 r::--,
OVR2
1k Q ?----O--O------!--l----------+_J_---O-----.+Vvltr-<1,-/\}\A,...__.~
( 28)
R
OS ov
,,,1_ _ _ . - - - - - - - - - - ( 14)
Shield line
ov
Override cancel (Short SWl-2)
Speed override (Short SWI-3)
AC Spindle servo unit
4) When performing synchronous feed as thread cutting or other external manual

velocity commands, the override must be cancelled, Switch the circuit (short
SWl-2) and set the override precisely to 100%,
5) Setting on the AC spindle servo unit for speed override function and the
range of override is as fo llows.
Parameter
Function
F-02 F-03
Speed override function not used 0 0
Speed override function used Override range
Up to 120% (upper limit) 1 1
Up to 100% (upper limit) 1 0
6) The override range is determined by the resistance value of R in the figure.

When R = 1.0 kn: 60 to 120%
R 2.4 kn: 80 to 120%
%
120
100
I
Override 80 --- - - - ,---,--
I I
R =: 2.4k!1
1 I
60 ---- - -~- - ~-- - - - - -- - R = 1.0k!t
I' II
0 0.2 0.4 VR 0.6 0.8
Resistance of between :2 to 3
- 122 -
7) If the override range upper limit is set to 100%, short cancel resistor
1.8 kn, since this resistor is not needed.
10.2.8 Torque limit command signals (TLM1, TLML, TLMH, OT)

(Models 1S - 3S, TLMl, OT: Models 6S - 22S., TLMH, TLML, -OT)
1) The torque limit is used to temporarily reduce the output torque of the AC
spindle motor during the AC spindle motor rotation in case of mechanical
spindle orientation, gear shift, etc.
2) The machine tool builder is requested to set the orientation output torque
and the revolution at the orientation time for every model so as to reduce a
shock when the machine stopper operates.
3) Adjust the torque at the time of torque limit by parameter F-18.
The torque limit value is+ (set value of F-18)% of the maximum torque when
TLMH is ON. When TLML is -ON (TLMl is ON as for the models 1S - 3S), the
torque is about 1/2 of the TLMH:ON.
4) When the torque limit command signal turns on (closed), the torque is
limited. (This signal is effective at once, even if this torque limit
command is given during the motor rotation.) The torque limiting signals
(TLMS, TLM6) are sent outside, immediately when the torque is limited.
5) For executing the mechanical orientation during ATC of a machining center,
take the following items into consideration when designing the power magnetic
sequence so as not to damage the stopper.
(1) The output torque is suppressed during orientation so as not to allow it
to be excessively large.
(2) The revolution is suppressed during orientation so as not to allow it to
be excessively high. If an excessively high revolution is detected by
the speed detection signal, take the interlock not to operate the
stopper.
(3) The stopper should be securely retreated when the torque limit was
released.
+ 2.1 V
Spindle servo unit
CNI
Torque limit command
TLML (05)
(TLMll Receiver
+2 4 V
(Note) TLMH ( 2 1)
Receiver
(-)
OT (06)
ov
(-) is for models 1S - 3S.
- 123 -
Example of mechanical orientation sequence
Torque limit commands TLMH, TLML (TLMl)
Orientation speed command

Commands SFR/SRV
(forward/reverse rotation command)
Torque limiting signals TLMS, 6

Zero-speed .
signal OFF ON SST!, 2
Servo unit
{ Speed I ON at a speed lower than

signals detecting signal than a certain speed
Motor slowly rotates
Motor ~ - - - - . under the limited
torque condition (Stop)
revolution
(Stop) . ~.,...,..---i-,-,-r7-r777"77"77"7'7'77"V'7fri
Stopper (Retreat)
Machine (Retreat)
Limit switch
(Stop check signal)
ATC
(Tool exchange)
If the above conditions are difficult, adopt the electric spindle orientation
(option) without stopper.
10.2.9 Alarm reset signals (ARST1, 2)

1) After eliminating causes of alarms such as motor overheat, excessive speed
deviation, circuit short-circuit, overspeed, overvoltage, overcurrent,
overload, power drop, etc., then input the alarm reset signal, and the alarm
is released to place the unit in readiness for operation.
2) This signal is ineffective, if it is inputted during the absence of alarm.
3) The servo unit is also provided with a reset sw;i.tch, which has the same
f unction as this alarm reset signal.
10.3 Orientation Signal (ORCM1, 2)

Connected when using the spindle orientation control circuit (option).
Description of the signal is mentioned in Chapter IV.
10.4 Spindle Control Output Signals

For the output signal rating, refer to section 10 . 1.
10.4.1 Speed arrival signals (SAR1, 2)

1) The contact is turned on (closed) when the actual rotation speed of the
spindle motor reaches a certain preset range with reference to the command
speed.
Detection range (See items (2), (3))
Commanded speed - - -
.,,. --
0
Motor speed
(Closed)
(Open)
SARI, 2
- 124 -
Commanded speed (2)
Detection range
(See items (2), (3))
Commanded speed(!) - - - -·~----1
0
Motor speed
SARI, 2
2) The preset range is adjustable within a range of +l to 100% of the command

speed; provided that the detection range becomes wider than the preset range,
if the speed is lower than 10% of the maximum speed.
3) This detection range of the speed arrival signals is set to +15% as the
standard setting before shipment. However, it is expanded as illustrated
below at low speed.
200
180
176% (at 0.1 V/45, 60 or 80 rpm)
160
140
.._,.,!!l
0 al
i::
120
<I) t:I)
t:ll •-
i:: "'
o/o
r:!~ 100
i:: · -
-=0u :::
cu
-0
.... ., ,....._
<I) .,
80
<I) o..~
Cl "',_,
60
40
24% (at 0.1 V /45 , 60 or 80 rpm)

20
0
0 2 4 6 8
Speed command voltage [VJ
0 1,600 3,200 4,800 6,400 8,000 rpm

0 1,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 6,000 rpm
0 900 1,800 2,700 3,600 4,500 rpm
Speed (rpm]
- 125 -
If a 45/60/80 rpm of speed command is issued, the arrival signal is sent when
actual motor speed reaches 45/60/80 rpm +76%.
4) This signal is not outputted, unless either SFR or SRV is turned on.
5) The reverse rotation at the tapping cycle is controlled by using this signal
as follows.
SFR (forw:ud rotation command)

ON
SRV (reverse rotation command)
ON
II ------------
_,~ms
ON
SST (zero-speed detecting signal) OFF
SAR (speed arrival signal) Minimum
ON About pulse
----j ....___.,._,--~4-'0-m_s-+-w_i_d_th_ ___,
T1 ~ 40ms Note: r, time is delayed until
OFF SAR signal turns off.
Normal rotation
Motor speed
0 Zero-speed detection range
Speed arrival
detection range - - ' - - - + - - - - - - - - Reverse rotation
When the reverse rotation command is sent, the spindle motor starts
deceleration, and the speed arrival signal turns off within 40 ms.
Then, the next turn-on of the speed arrival signal is detected as the reverse
rotation command end.
Sp_indle servo unit
CNI
(!) SARI
Speed arrival
signal
SAR2
(2)
Note) Models 1S - 3S are output by an open collector transistor (polarized).
6) This signal is employed as the check signal (FIN signal) for forward rotation
(M03) and reverse rotation (M04) command.
- 126 -
10.4.2 Zero-speed detecting signals (SST1, 21
1) If actual rotation speed of the spindle motor is reduced to be lower than the
zero-speed detection point when the stop command was given, the contact is
turned on (closed).
Zero-speed detection point

(±0.75% of maximum speed as
the standard)
SST! , 2 (Closed)
. (Closed) (Open)
2) The zero-speed detection point is fixed at 0.75% of the maximum speed as the
standard.
In other words, the zero-speed detection signal turns on when the rotation
speed is lower than about 33, 45 or 60 rpm.
3) This signal is outputted when the above condition is satisfied, irrespective
of rotation commands (SFR, SRV) .
4) The minimum pulse width value of this signal is about 40 ms. Refer to
section 9.4.1-(5).
Spindle servo unit
CNl
Zerq-speed
detecting signal
L-----<4-)-< 1 ssT2
10.4.3 Speed detecting signals (SDT1, 2)

1) The contact is turned on (closed) when the actual motor speed is lower than
the speed being set on Parameter F- 17 .
2) The detection point is fixed at the maximum speed x (set volume of
F-17/1000)%.
Spindle servo unit
CNl
SDTI
Speed detecting (IS)
signal
SDT2
(16)
- 127 -
3) This signal is used to detect the rotation speed which becomes lower than a
certain speed set such as clutch selectable speed or gear selectable speed.
It is usually set to 3% of the maximum speed (standard setting) in case of
gear change or 30% of the maximum speed in case of clutch change.
The machine tool builder is requested to set the check terminal voltage to a
desired value by the variable resistor.
. Motor speed Speed detection level
I
I
SOT! - 2 I :
~~?T,aj
> ~ci~n)~
"'"'?... ?..,..?.""'?/.
'"'?""7?..,.t..,.i.,..
1/.'"'?'"'
/ '"'
/.1""7 .?:.,..?'"'7.
/./...
(Closed) ~...._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __.,~ (Closed)
4) The signal contact is turned on (closed) when the absolute value of the motor
speed is reduced to be lower than the preset detection level, irrespective of
rotation commands (SFR, SRV).
(Reference)
Sequence of the gear shift
The gear shift in the CNC machine tool is one of sequence controls. The
e lectric circuit signal on the sequence is used to move the spindle gear, which
is an important component of the machine. It is then necessary to check that
the spindle motor revolution is in low speed to switch the gear safely.
The following is an example of sequence at gear shift, when the speed detection
signal (gear selectable signal) was used. This example can be referred to when
designing the magnetics sequencer.
An example of gear shift sequence using speed detectton signal
(Sequence) (Check signal)
Gear shift command
Low speed revolution command

of the spindle motor
Speed detection signal ON
(Zero-speed signal ON)
Speed check Turns ON when slower than
the gear selectable speed
Shifter moves
End of gear shift
To change the gear safely, check that the spindle motor r evolution is low enough
before moving the shifter. I f the zero-speed signal is also a pplied, the safety
can be doubly checked.
- 128 -
If the shifter moves when the spindle motor is rotating in high speed, the gear
will break.
Spindle motor speed Gear selectable motor

speed range
Spindle motor speed

at gear shift (Low speed)
Shifter moves
I
End of gear shift
ON
Speed detection signal _ _O_F_•F_•_ __._~ _____ _ ________ _: ____ L.___ _ _ _O_F_F_• _ _ __
(Gear selectable signal) l I
Zero-speed detect signal - - - - - - - - ' ' . _ ___ __ __ _ _ _ I
10.4.4 Load detection signal {LDT1, 2)
When the load becomes greater than the set value (%) against the maximum
detection level (10 V) of the load meter, the contact is ON (closed).
Note) For models 1S - 3S
LDTl CNl (33)
LPT2 . .... CNl (34) Spindie servo unit
CN3
Note)
- -- - - ~ ;LDT!
(17)
Load
detection
signal
.___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _r1LDT2
(18)
• Output by an open collector transistor (polarized).
10.4.5 Spindle alarm signals (ALM1, 2)

1) If the spindle motor operation cannot be continued due to trouble, the
spindle motor power is turned off to stop the spindle motor.
An alarm signal is also sent to the exterior concurrently. (The output
contact is open under an alarm condition.)
2) The alarm signals employ one contact only. For the alarm contents, refer to
section 10 .5 . alarm contents signal.
3) Reset the command signals (speed command, forward rotation, reverse rotation
commands, and torque limit command) to the spindle servo unit by using this
alarm signal output without fai l (clear all signals from PMC). Otherwise the
spindle motor may rotate when the alarm of the spindle amplifier was
released, and a dangerous accident may result.
- 129 -
4) Since the spindle motor is decelerated and stopped simultaneously when an
alarm signal is outputted, it is necessary to set the emergency stop
condition or feed hold condition on CNC or the power magnetics control panel
side.
5) The contact is open under an alarm condition.
The spindle motor is being decelerated and stopped during alarm signal off
(open contact), irrespective of external commands.
6) The relation between alarm signals and alarm reset signal is as illustrated
below.
Speed command voltage
Forward/reverse rotation
commands SFR (SRV)
Commands
ARSTl, 2
(Alarm reset)
(Open) \
Servo unit
signals { ALM!, 2
Eliminate a case of
(Closed)
an alarm
Motor rotation
speed
Moto r
(Stop)
I
Motor does not operate, even I
if a command is given. Usable condition
. I.
Spindle servo unit

CNI
ALM!
(11)
Alarm signal
ALM2
( 12)
Note) Models 1S - 3S is output by an open collection transistor (polarized)
- 130 -
10.5 Alarm Content Signals (ALB, AL4, AL2, AL1)
1) These signals are provided with models 6S - 22S. (Models 1S - 3S are not
provided with these signals)
2) The alarm conditions of the AC spindle motor and AC spindle servo unit are
indicated by light-emitting diodes on PCB of the AC spindle servo unit.
Alarm contents are sent to the exterior by code signals concurrently.
~-------n* - [ D
AL4
~-"COM _ _ __ _
3) The correspondence between LED display and alarm signals is as shown in the
following table.
Alarm content signals

LED display
ALB AL4 AL2 ALI
AL-01 0
AL-02 0
AL-03 0 0
AL-04 0
AL-05 0 0
AL-06 0 0
AL-07 0 0 0
AL-08 0
AL-09 0 0
AL-10 0 0
AL-11 0 0 0
AL-12 0 0
AL-13 0 0 0
AL-14 0 0 0
AL-15 0 0 0 0
o: Contact ON (closed)
4) Alarm signals can be received at magnetics sequencer and their signals can be
displayed on the CRT of CNC. These signals can be used to design magnetics
sequence by the MTB.
Alarm contents are shown in the Table 10. 5 (a) (Models 1S - 3S) and Table
10.5 (b) (Models 6S - 22S).
- 131 -
Table 10.5 (a) Alarm (Models 1S - 3S, 1S/15000, 2S/15000)
Alarm No. Meanings Contents

AL-01 Motor and This lamp lights when internal temperature
radiator of motor and radiator of the units is higher
overheat than the specified value.
AL-02 Excessive This lamp lights when the motor speed is

deviation of largely deviated from the command speed.
speed
AL-03 Defective Detects that regenerative current has flown

regenerative longer than the allowable time
current
AL-04
AL-05
AL-06 Over speed This lamp lights when the motor exceeds ll5 %
(Analog of the rated speed.
det ection)
AL-07 Over speed This lamp l ights when the motor ex ceeds ll5 %
(Digi tal of the rated speed.
detection)
AL-0 8 Ove rvoltage This lamp lights when voltage largely exceeds
the rated working voltage range due to
a tap selection failure, etc.
AL-09
AL-10 Detec ts lower Det ects the input power voltage lessened.
voltage
AL-11 Excessive high Detects over DC voltage of power.

voltage of DC
link
AL-1 2 Abnormal Detects over current of circuit.

current of DC
link
Defective
transistor
AL-13 - 15
AL-16 - 23 Defective arithmeti c circuit and peripheral circui't.
No display Defec tive ROM.
- 132 -
Table 10.5 (bl Alarm (Models 6S • 22S, 3S/12000 • 22S/6000, 8P - 40P, SVH, 12VH)
Alarm No. Meanings Contents
AL-O1 Motor overheat This lamp lights when internal temperature

of motor is higher than the specified value.
AL-O2 Excessive This lamp lights when the motor speed is
deviation of largely deviated from the command speed.
speed
AL-O3 +24 V fuse is +24 V fuse of the control power section is

blown. blown.
PCB with
version No. of
O9A or earlier
PCB with No AL-O3 on the PCB version lOB or later.

version No. of
lOB or earlier
AL-O4 Open phase of A phase of input power is open.

input power
AL-O5
AL-O6 Overspeed This lamp lights when the mqtor exceeds 115%
(Analog of the rated speed.
detection)
AL-O7 Over speed This lamp lights when the motor exceeds 115%
(Digital the of rated speed.
detection)
AL-O8 Overvoltage Voltage extremely excesses the rated voltage.
AL-O9 Overheat of Temperature of radiator such as semiconductor

radiator is extremely high.
AL-1O Lower voltage Detects lower voltage of

of input power input power.
AL-11 Excessive high Detects over DC voltage of power.

voltage of DC
link
AL-12 Abnormal Detects over current of circuit.

current of DC
link
Defective
transistor
AL-13 Defective Abnormal transmission between microcomputer

arithmetic and peripherals.
circuit
AL-14 Defective ROM Detects defective ROM.
- 133 -
Table 10.5 (cl Alarm (Models 6S • 22S, 3S/12000 • 22S/6000, BP • 40P, BVH, 12VHJ
Alarm . No. Meanings Contents
AL-15 Defective Detects defective optional circuit and

optional erroneous connection to optional circuit.
circuit
A-16 - 23 Defective peripheral of arithmetic circuit and circuit.
A Defective ROM.
10.6 Speed Indication Voltage Signal (SM1, OM)

1) The rotation speed of the AC spindle motor can be indicated by externally
connecting a speedmeter.
+ 1ov
Output voltage (DC)
ov 4,500/6,000/rpm
0
(Forward rotation/reverse
Motor rotation speed rotation)
A voltage (DC) proportional to the rotation speed is outputted, irrespective

of the forward or reverse rotation of the motor. A +10 Vis outputted at the
maximum revolution 4,500/6,000 rpm.
2) Use the following speedmeter (DC voltmeter)
- One-sided deflection DC voltmeter
- DC voltage 10 V full scale
- Internal resistance higher than 10 kilo ohms
Example) DC voltmeter LM-80: Kuwano Electrical Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
3) The speed indication voltage is used for the speedometer, and the forward
rotation/reverse rotation output voltages are not calibrated. The voltage
accuracy is max. ±3%.
Spindle servo unit
SMl
Speed indication
voltage Speedometer
Load indication
voltage
Loadmeter
ov
- 134 -
4) SMl, LMl, and OM indication interface can be used from terminal board TB for
models 6S - 22S as well as connector CNl.
Use a 2-conductor shielded cable.
10.7 Load Indication Voltage (LM1, OM)

1) The load indicator indicates the load factor, which is the ratio of the load
to the maximum output obtainable by the spindle motor at the input voltage
and working revolutions when the machine tool spindle is rotating without
load or when cutting is in progress.
2) The revolutions-to-spindle motor output relation, revolutions-to-torque
relation and revolutions-to-indicating voltage relation are as illustrated
below approximately when the rated input voltage is applied.
Maximum output of motor

I (-::: 30 min. rated output x 120%)
Spindle motor output I
[kW] I 30 min. rated output
----t--..._
I: -------- - Continuous rated output
I
I
0 (Maximum speed)
(Basic speed) Motor revolutions
Spindle motor torque Maximum torque of motor

[kg·m] / (c:< 30 min. rated torque x 120%)
. -,
i 30 min. rated torque
' - - -- -- - ' - - - - ---L_ _ _ _ _ I ---- - -

L __ .....1. - Continuous rated torque
_ __
0
Motor revolutions
_ Maximum output of motor

(-::: 30 min. rated output x 120%)
Load indicator " ' 30 min. rated output

indicating voltage -------- -
[VJ
- - - \ Continuous rated output
0. ' - - - - - - - - ' - - - - - - - ' - -- - - - - ' ' - - -- --....L..

0
Motor revolutions
3) The relation between each spindle motor output and the indicating voltage of
the load indicator is as shown in Table 10.7 (a), assuming that the
continuous rated output of the spindle motor is 100%.
- 135 -
4) Three types of indications of the load indicator may be considered
approximately from Table 10.7 (a). For the indication of the load indicator
in this case, refer to examples shown in Table 10.7 (b).
5) Machine too l builders are requested to prepare a load indicator (DC
voltmeter) which complies with the following specification.
- One-side deflecting DC voltmeter
- DC voltage 10 V, full scale
- Internal resistance 10 kilo ohms
Example) DC voltmeter LM-80 made by KUWANO DENKI
6) The indication interface of these signals are usable from the terminal block
TB in addition to the connector CNl. (Models 6S - 22S) When TB is used, use
2-core shielded cable.
Table 10.7 (a) Relation between each spindle motor output

and indicating voltage of load indicator
Indicating Ratio Example of load indicator

Output voltage of assuming Type of
Model load indi- that conti- applicable Ratio to
(kW) full scale
cator (V) nuous rated load
(Note) is 100% (%) indicator (%)
1S 1.5 5.7 100 102.2
1S/15000 2.2 8.3 147 A 150
2 .64 10.0 176 180
1.5S 1.1 2. 5 100 100
3.7 8.4 338 D 338
4.4 10.0 400 400
2S 2.2 5.0 100 100
2S/15000 3.7 8 .3 166 C 166
4.4 10.0 200 200
3S 3.7 5.6 100 100.8
3S/12000 5.5 8.3 148 A 150
BP 6.6 10.0 178 180
6S 5.5 6.1 100 109.8
6S/12000 7.5 8.3 136 A 150
12P, 6VH 9.0 10.0 164 180
8S 7.5 5.7 100 102.6
8S/8000 11.0 8.3 146 A 150
8VH 13. 2 10. 0 175 180
12S 11 6.1 100 109.8
12S/8000 15 8.3 136 A 150
22P, 12VH 18 10.0 164 180
15S 15 6.7 100 100.5
15S/8000 18.5 8.3 124 B 125
30P 22.2 10.0 149 150
18S 18.5 7.0 100 105
18S/6000 22.0 8.3 118 B 125
40P 26.4 10.0 142 150
22S 22.0 7.0 100 105
22S/6000 26.0 8.3 118 B 125
31.2 10 .o 142 150
Note) Accuracy of the load indicator voltage depends upon the speed used or the
input voltage. The maximum deviation is approximately ±15%.
- 136 -
Table 10.7 (b) Examples of load indicator type
Type Indication of load indicator Model
Color
Yellow Red 1S, 3S, 6S,
White band band band 8S, 12S,
division I I I I 1S/15000,
Indica-
I I I I I I I I I I 100I I I I I 150~180 3S/12000,
6S/12000,
0 50
tion 8S/8000,
A I %
I
I
12S/8000,
I I
0V I I I BP, 12P,
I I I
Correspond- 5.55V 8.3V 10.0V 22P, SOP,
ence to 6VH, · 8VH,
voltage
12VH
Color Yellow Red 15S, 18S,

division lf -_ _ __ _ h1_·t_e_b_an_d_ __ _-1-J~b_an_d_➔t-b_
W an_d--iJ 22S,
18S/6000,
Indication 0
l,i ,l1l1 l1i5 0 ,l,l,l,l1l10011,1RI150
22S/6000,
125 15P, 18P,
B %
I 30P, 40P
I
ov I
I
I
I
I I
Correspond-
ence to 6.66V 8.3V 1 o.ov
voltage
Yellow Red
Color White band band band
2S,
2S/15000
C
In:::::::11...0 50 100
,_~=
150 166
~~. . . . I
....1.l.......1..I...JIL..-J.I__,_I....11.......1..I.....L...I....1.l__,_i....1.l___,_I-'''--'-'_._I......
200
I
I
ov
I: ro I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
Correspond-
I
I I I
ence to 5.0V 8.3V 10.0V
voltage
Red
Color White band Yellow band band 1.5S
division!t-o•-----1-f------------Li------11
I
D 0
I
Indication .__._I_._I__._I_,.__,.__IL.....Jl__,Jl__,Jl---1--LI
100 200
11 -L.1
--1..1
--1..1 .1
--1.
- .
....J....:...~:1.L.<:J.u::IL-4
300 338 400
I I
I I I
I I o/o I I
I I I
ov I
I I
lI I
I
I
I
Correspond-
5.0V 8.3V 10.0V
ence to
voltage
- 137 -
11. RIGID TAPPING
Response characteristics needed for the normal operation mode and the rigid
tapping mode are different from each other when using AC spindle motor. Noise
on the spindle may possibly get louder depending on machines when response
characteristics are improved. In this case set the parameter for rigid tapping
according to the type of machine.
1) Selecting rigid tapping mode
I
Select the parameter number .-,-F---3-1-,I to display 0001I.
2) Contact signal TLML-0T (TLM-0T: Models lS - 3S)
Treat the power sequence to close the contact signal TLML-0T (TLM-0T) when
rigid tapping is made.
CNl +24V
TLML (5)
(TLM)
RV
OT (6)
ov
3) Confirming the ready signal

Check the contact of the control output signals TLM5 and 6 is closed as the
ready signal, to start rigid tap machining.
CNl
TLMS (9)
RV
TLM6 (10)
Note) . Models 1S - 3S are output by an open collectar transistor (polarized).
4) Improving response characteristics

Select the parameter number F-34 to display 0100 I I.
Lessen the setting value from 0100 to input proper data, when the spindle
on the machine makes noise. Setting range: 0100 - 0010
Cautions on application
(Note) that the torque limit command signal TLML cannot be used when the
rigid tapping mode is selected.
Use the torque limit command signal TLMH when torque limit is necessary.
- 138 -
Ill. AC SPINDLE MOTOR P series
1. GENERAL
The AC spindle motor P series is suitable for structural rationalization by
eliminating the machine spindle gear box.
2. FEATURES
1) As the rated output range is wide at 1 :8, a gear box structure for speed
change is not required, thereby allowing the structure of the machine to be
simplified.
Accordingly, vibration and noise caused by the gear box structure is also
eliminated.
2) Improvement in efficiency of construction equipment
In the conventional motor, it was necessary to stop the spindle when
switching the gear to change the speed. However, the P series AC spindle
motor reduces unnecessary use of time, other than that needed for machining,
to a minimum by eliminating gear switching.
3) Despite a compact configuration, a large low-speed torque can be obtained.
4) Similar to the standard series, the method of fan exhaust can be selected
from either a exhaust front type or exhaust rear type, thus preventing heat
deformation of the machine.
- 141 -
3. SPECIFICATIONS
Series P s eries
Model 12P 15P 18P 22P 30P 40P SOP
SP
Item
AC Out- Continuous kW 3 .7 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18 . 5 22
spin- put rating(*l) (HP) (5. 0) (7. 4) (10, O) (12,0) (14. 7) (20 , 1) (24.8) (29.5)
dle
motor 30-min. kW 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22(*5) 30(*5)
rating(*l) (HP) (7.4) ( 10. 0) (12.0) (14. 7) (20,1) (24. 8) (29 . 5) (40,2)
50% ED(*l,*2) kW 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 30

(HP) (7 .4) (10 . 0) (12.0) (14 . 7) (20, 1) (24. 8) (29.5) (40 . 2)
Rota- Basal speed rpm 750 750 750 750 750 575 575 575
tion
speed Maximum speed rpm 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 4500 4500 4500
Output torque(*4) N.m 47 . l 70 95.4 114.5 140 249 307 365

(kg.cm) (480) (714) (974) ( 1169) (14 28) (2540) (3133) (3726)
2 2
GD kg, m 0, 11 0.36 0,36 0 .51 0.51 1.18 1.18 2. 48
2
Ro t or i nertia N. m.sec 0.027 0,091 0.091 0, 126 0.126 0,29 0.29 0,62
2 (0,28) (l. 29) (3 .0) (3,0)
(kg.cm.sec) (0.93) (0.93) (1.29) (6.33)
Weight kg 80 110 110 143 143 250 250 460
Vibration vs VlO
Noise 75dB 80dB
Cooling system Totally enclosed external fan type
Mounting Use the output axis in the horizontal or vertical direction
Overload tolerance 120% of 30-min. rating

(1 min . )
Insulation F type
Ambient temperature 0 - 40°C
Painting color Munsell N2.5
Spare parts Pulse generator , Thermostat
Bearing lubrication Grease
AC 30-min . rated power kVA 9 12 15 17 22 26 32 411

spin-
dle
supply capacity
I
servo Power s upply (*J) AC 200/220/230V, 10%/-15%; 50/60Hz ;!:lHz
unit
Main circuit sys tem Transistor PWM inverter
Feedback system Speed feedback by pulse generator
Braking system Regenerative braking
Input command voltage DC +lOV (High speed) - ov (Stop)
Speed control range 60 - 6000rpm 45 - 4500rpm

(Speed ratio 1:100) (Speed ratio 1: 100)
Speed fluctuation 10% of maximum speed for load fluctuation in the range
of 10% - 100%
(*1) Rated output is guaranteed in the rated power s upply voltage . When the input power supply
voltage fluctuates, even within the allowable fluctuation range, rated output may not be
obtained .
(*2) With a cycle time of 10 min. and 50% ED: the ON period will be 5 mins. and the OFF period, 5 min.
(*3) A transformer is needed when the power supply voltage is outside the voltage stated in this manual,
(*4) Output torque is expressed as "Continuous rated torque in the rated torque range",
(*5) Guaranteed when separately stipulated conditions are satisfied.
- 142 -
4. OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
1) Model BP
kW
8 t-----,-------,----.-------....---......,.----,
6t-----+---+---+----t----t-----,
30 min., 50% ED operating zone
-~4t----,~-t----t---+----t----t--~
::,
(5.5 kw)
3.7
0 Continuous operating zone (3. 7 kw)
1,000 2,000 3,000 4.000 5,000 6,000 rpm

Motor speed
2) Model 12P
kW
8 i------ ---,-----,, -- -, -- - - , - - - - - , r - - - - - ,
. 30 min., 50% ED operating zone (7.5 kw)
·continuous operating zone (5.5 kw)
~4t--rt--t----t---+----t----t--.,.........J
::::
0
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6 ,000 r pm

Motor speed
3) Model 15P
kW
121----r---.-------,------,---,------,
,30 min., 50% ED operating zone (9 kw)
7.5
; 6 1-----+---+--~ '---
,-- (7 .5 kw)t--- - t - - ~~
.e,
::, 5.5
0
2.000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm

Motor speed
- 143 -
4) Model 18P
kW
12
/30 min., soi ED opeTing zone 1(11.kW)
9
Continuous operating zone (9kW)
;
e, 6
1/
:::,
0
3
A
I 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm

Motor speed
5) Model 22P
kW
161---~---.------,-----,,----,.-----,
30 min., 50% ED operating zone (lSkWJ
11
Continuous operating zone (11 kW)
;~ 9
81--+-+--+---+----+-----11------1------1
;
0
1,000 2,000 3,000 '1,000 5,000 6,000rpm

Motor speed
6) Model 30P
{kW) '
25
20 1 8. 5 kW 30 min., 50% ED operating zone -

I
I I L "'-
15 kW Continuous operating zone
15 I'--,. 151 'Yv
I""' ~llkw
5
575 3450 4500
2 3 4 5 { x 1000 rpm )
Motor speed
- 144 -
7) Model 40P
(kW)
25
I I I I
22 kW 30 min., 50% ED operating zone
20
I I
18. 5 kW Continuous operating zone "-.
"' 18.,kW
15 ~ 15kW
10
5
575 3450 4500
2 3 4 5 ( x 1000 rpm)
Motor speed
8) Model SOP
(kW) 30 kW 30 min., 50% ED operating zone

30
25
J;\,
~
Continuous
2 2kW opera ting zone
20
r; ~
;
;"" l5
\ 1 5kW
0
I
I0
5 -575 3000 4500 -
0
0 2 3 5 ( x IOOO rpm)
Motor speed
- 145 -
Note) When the ambient temperature of the model 40P servo unit is high, the time
of continuous use at the motor's 30-min. rated output is shown in the
figure below in terms of servo unit thermal limitation.
c 30
:e
;
~
0 20
.§
~
~
0
10
e
i=
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambie nt 1cmpcr:11urc {deg C)
Note 1) Use four three-phase fan motors (model 5915PT-20W-B30-504 made by

MINEBEA or equivalent).
Note 2) For duct dimensions, refer to the following figure.
tt F~n molar (2)
I{)
'<:I
- -,
I
I
I
I
Cooling fin
I
r- _,I
I I
I I (\J
a,
I I
,_ '°
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Duct
178
tt
Ai r
F;m motor (2)
Reference fig. of the Model 40P servo unit external cooling fin method
of cooling
- 146 -
5. ORDER SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 AC Spindle Motor
Specification
Name Description
numbe r
Model BP Flange mount ing A06B- 0725-Bl02 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exh aust rear
-Bl03 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust fron t
- B302 6000 rpm, no key, has oil seal,
exhau s t rear
-B303 6000 rpm, no key, has oil seal,
exhaust front
Foot mounting A06B-0725 - B202 6000 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
exhaust rear
- B203 600 0 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
exhaust front
- B402 6000 rpm, no key, no oil seal,
exh aust rear
exhaust front
Model 12P Flange mounting A06B- 0726- Bl02 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust rear
- Bl03 6000 r pm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust front
- B302 6000 rpm, no key, has oil seal,
exhaust rear
exhaust front
Foot mounting A06B- 0726-B202 6000 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
exhaust rear
- B203 6000 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
exh aus t front
exhaus t r ear
exhaust front
- 147 -
Specification
Name Description
number
Model 15P Flange mounting A06B- 0727-Bl02 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust rear
- Bl03 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaust front
Foot mounting A06B- 0727- B202 6000 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
exhaust rear
-B203 6000 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
exhaust front
-B402 6000 rpm, no key, no oil seal,
exhaust rear
exhaust front
Model 18P Flange mounting A06B-0728-Bl02 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust rear
-Bl03 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaust front
Foot mounting A06B-0728-B202 6000 rpm, has key, no oil seal,

exhaust rear
'\ -B203 6000 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
/ Qi exhaust front
~ 1 exhaust rear
exhaust front
Model 22P Flange mounting A06B- 0729-B102 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust rear
- Bl03 6000 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaust front

exhaust rear
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaust front
- 148 -
Specification
Name Description
number
Model 30P Flange mounting A06B-0730- Bl004500 rpm, has key , has oil seal ,
exhaust rear
-BlOl 4500 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaus t front
Foot mounting A06B-0730-B200 4500 rpm, has key, no oil seal ,

exhaust rear
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaust front
Model 40P Flange mounting A06B-0731-Bl00 4500 rpm, has key, has oil seal,
exhaust rear
-BlOl 4500 rpm, has key, has oil sea l,
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaust front

exhaust rear
exhaust f ront
exhaus t rear
exhaust front
(L
Model SOP Foot mounting A06B-0732-B2!1t 4500 rpm, has key, no oil seal,
exhaust rear
exhaust front
exhaust rear
exhaust front
\½} O"\
\)+3L - \~ 1QO
f7 1o-1
- 149 -
5.2 AC Spindle Servo Unit
Classi- Specification
fication drawing number Description
Basic For the spindle control A06B-6059-H206 External radiation type,

unit model BP IIH550 6000 rpm
For the spindle control A06B-6059-H206 External radiation type,
unit model 12P IIH55 l 6000 rpm
For the s pindle control A06B-6059-H20B External radiation type,
unit model 15P IIH552 6000 rpm
For the spindle control A06B-6059-H21B External radiation type,


For the spindle control A06B-6055-H322 Internal radiation type,
A06B-6055-H422 External ventilation

I/H551 type
Basic Connectors A06B-6059-Kl03 Soldered type
For models BP - 40P
A06B-6059-Kl04 Crimp type

For models SP - 40P
Fuses A06B-6059-K012 For models BP - IBP
A06B-6059-K022 For models 22P - 40P

Option Speed gain switching A06B-6059-J700 For models BP - 40P
circui t
Option Power supply trans- A06B-6059-J006 For models Primary

former BP - ISP side
380VAC
A06B-6059-J007 For models 415VAC
IBP and 22P 460VAC
Secondary
A06B-6059-J010 For models side
30P - SOP 200VAC
Unit adapter A06B-6059-K031 For models BP - IBP
A06B-6059-K032 For models 22P - 30P
- 150 -
in Part V.
(*2) For details such as option of spindle control unit for model SOP and the
like, refer to FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B-53422E/10 or
earlier.
- 151 -
6. CONNECTIONS
Models BP - SOP
U (Z)
Coil .
V (X)
W (Y )
0 G
~
+s v connector connections
@ Blue ® Black
ov CD Red
PA PB PA +SV
Pulse
generator
RA
® White ® Green © Yellow
PB - RB RA ov
RB
® ® 0
ss
O H2 ss OHi
: OHi
Ol-1 2 1
)
Ove rheat
signal
PM U Jl Connector specifications
FM\' ( Fan mo tor AMP unipulser model/mate-n-lock
F' :'1 1\V
Motor side Cable side
I Housing 350782- 1 350720-1'
I Contact 350706-7 350689- 6
The pulse generator and overheat signals are connected to the AMP connector.
The others are connected to the terminal block.
Terminal block screw dimensions
~ e U,V,W, G FMU - FMW
BP - 22P MS M4
30P, 40P MB M4
SOP MB H3 . 5
- 152 -
7. PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO USE
1) Terminal box
The terminal box is made from plastic. Therefore, the metal plate that was
attached to both side faces of the present terminal box have been
discontinued. Mount the conduit by directly fastening with a nut, as
shown in the diagram below. (Model BP - 40P)
Conduit
(Elbow etc.)
. Fasten with a
_pressure nut
One side is covered

by a rubber bush
2) Allowable radial load

Use the motor output shaft with allowable radial load shown in the below
table or less.
Motor model Allowable radial load Output shaft bearing
Model BP 300 kg 6210

Models 12P, 15P 300 kg 6312
Models lBP, 22P 450 kg
Models 30P, 40P 550 kg 6314

Model SOP 1100 kg 6317
Note) The above-listed allowable radial loads are values obtained when the load
was applied to the end of the output shaft. In cases when the center of
belt tension is beyond the end of the output shaft, the values for
allowable load will be smaller than those given above.
- 153 -
8.1 AC Spindle M otor Model BP

a) Flange type
Rubber bush for covcrinn
the wirini; holes
Tcrmim1ls for fan molar Termin:tls for power line Q)Dlu• (i)Bbck G)Rrd
(FMU, FMV, FMW) (lJ(V{W/G) PB PA •5V
Puls.e tcnentor connector

®""''" (S)Crn:n @Yello,
RB RA DV
® (ill (/)
OH2 ss OHi
QB 314 173
'190
f .d _p on
Note) I. The output sh::i.ft should be horiIOnU.I o r vcr1Je2I down w:i.rd in use.
2. Use hex.icon bolts M 12, length 40 mm or less 4J mountinc bolts. "'
3. T11c motor in whkh cooling ;lr flow direction is reversed is illo 3V.a..ll::i.bic.
3-MS, deep 10
on "40
b) Foot mounting t ype
Rubber bush for covering
1hc wiring holes
Terminals ror fan motor Terminals fur power line {J) Dluc C!) llbct 0a~
(FMU, FMV, FMW) (U/V/W/G) PB PA •5V
@ Whil~ G}Crccn @ Ydlov.
Pulse ccnc~lor conncclor RB RA DV
® @ (/)
□H2 ss 0'-11
208 31 d 173
18 4.1':I
55 2•2 I
r:M ~
I -
Ai.Jin A
~ B~ h
90
,- S::J_
0
I I 1§)
~
--
<O
-- - - _,_ --1-
q
-<0a
110
u ho:
''
178
''
I
[7
Air out
35 272
490
Nol e) I. TI1c o utput daft should be horiz.onUI or ¥1:ttk~I down w:;nd in use.
2. Use hexagon bolts MIO. Jcngth 30 mm or Jw as mountin g bolts.
3. The molar in which coolins :Ur flow direction is re't'Crscd is :i.lso u:Ub:blc.
Hl•5,du p 10
on¢40
154 -
8.2 AC Spindle M otor Model 12P, 15P
a) Flange type
U1c wiring holCJ
TcnnirulJ for fan mo1or Tcrmllul.s for power line

(J)Dlus
®"'"' 01t.d
(FMU, FMV, FMW) (U/V(W/G) PB PA •5V
@Wltll• ~Clttfl @YcDo•
Pulse generator ronncctor RB RA ov
GI ® (!)
0H2 55 OHi
91 173
bd
4 0
162
co- ~
"'M
0 0
~l
~ ; I
0
"' lf) O
"'
0
- -111-- -H -- "'
Qo
"'
~ I Air OU(
,g
4-015 on"26S L 11 0
Nole) I. The autput shdt sJtould be horU.onbl 01 VCJt1c21 down w:ud ln u1c.
0
i ¥:,: ~~ ~':i11'tci~:!;~'~iso~~¼C:~ :~~~~ualbblc. 3-MS, deep 10
on ¢40

Rubber bu1h for ccm:tlnc
the wiling holes
{J) blul (2)8b t.k (DJh\J

Terminals for fltn motor Tcrmln:tls for power line
(FMU, FMV, FMW) {IJ/V(W/G) PB PA • 5V
@Wbllc ec,eaa @'ft.do"'
r ube gcncr~tor conncc1or RB RA ov
® ® (!)
0H2 55 OHi
29 1 173
264
420
18
232
Ah In
NO
"'"'"'
0
0
lf)
co
ll i -1
90
I()
l'l
0
"'
c:::::> "'
Afr out
0
'°
~t-= 95
I
95
I 127
2L
127 4-015
I 10
50
1108 178
259
466
Nole) 1. The output ahoft should be horir.onbl or YcttJcal down ward in use.
2. Use hcx~gon bolts Mll, length .. 5 mm or las 2J mountlnf boJU.
3. The motor in which c00Ua1 air now direction is rcvcncd is ilia :anJbblc.
HIS, deep 10
on "40
155 -
8.3 AC Spindle Motor Model 18P, 22P
a) Flange type
the wiring holes
Terminals ror fan motor Tcrmina!J for power line (J)Dluc (2)n1ac::t 0R.td
(FMU, FMV, FMW) (l//V/W/G) PB PA · SV
(ii}WhJI• @Green G)YcUH 1
Pulse generator conncc!or RB RA ov
® @ ('J)
0H2 55 OHi
36 1 173
490
302
0
"'
0
If)
(\J
0
r..:
0
I")
(\J
IS)
J Q
0
"'a
Air ou t
536
• •0
~
Note) 1. The output ffl3ft should be horttontal or vcr1ic::1l down wud ln Use.
2. Use bcugon bolts M 12, lcnflh 4S mm or Jcu ;u mounting bolts.
0 .,,N
3. The motor in which cooling .air flow direction is reversed b also av:lilablc. a
3-MS, deep 10
on 4>45

Rubber bush for covering;
the wiring holes
Tcuniruls for flU'I motor Tcrmin.ds for power line C[)nwc: Q}Dbtk ©Rtd
(FMU, fMV, fMW) (U/V/W/G) PB PA •5V
@White Ca')C rta1 @YcUO'oi-
Pulse gene.rater conncc(or RB RA av
® ® ('J)
0H2 55 OHi
264 361 173
182 490
302
Air ln
~
<O
90 l"l
0
[\/ 0
c,.."' "'
[\/
[\/
QC
AJr OUI
108 I 178
11 0 50 299
290 536
0
Note) I. The output stun &.houkl be hotiz.ont41 or Yen ic.ll down ward in use.
2. UIC hc.xi&on bollJ Ml2, lcn&th 45 mm or Jcu as mounlin,: boJts.
J . The motor in which coolin,g air flow dlrcctlon is rc1'CNcd b ~.lso 11v.iibbk.
J.MS, deep JO
on->45
- 156 -
8.4 AC Spindle Motor Model 30P, 40P
a) Flange type
4•MS Sacv.,
TcrmlnW for Tctmlruls for fan motor

powa line (FMU, FMV. FMW)
(G/UN/Wl / Pulse &cn.enttor connector
a, Illa, C>DW (I) . . .
PD PA .,v
CZ,\ltl :bt (J)O.- 10Yollo.
•• RA ov
(I)
0 10
(I)
.. Cl)
011 1
5 60
0
,,,
"'
4-<>l 9 on ¢350 e,,:n 626

IUTangcment required
Noto) I . Titc cu tpu 1 shn!\ lhould be horlzonllll or vertle2l downwnrd

,,~" -~-~=:-?-:~
in UJC, 3-M6 T•p depth 10, on ,>SO even
2. Use hexagon bolU Ml6, lensth 50 mm or less 43; mounting bolts, ananccmcnt required
3. TI1c motor in which cooling air flow direction is reversed ls (ln c::ue ofslmn without key,
l!bo available. there is no tiptap.}
4-1,15 SctOWl
TcrminnlJ for
power line
(G/U/V/W) Pulse generator connector
tl>Dbs tl)BJ.t.:t(II Ra.I
PD PA .,v
G>Mi.. (Ilutnn (!)Yr.Do.
R.D M D\I
Ill a> Cll 560
om ss om
170
78 3 6
~ _,_I :,.,!,,_O-+--+Ilc,2._lc.;1e-----"'2.=5c:,A_
60 362
_ --1' j
Noto) l. The outpu1 sha.ft s.hould be horltontnl or nrtie.tl downwud

.~
r-J~ ~
lQ=f
§'1
- -
0 6 6
~-
~I
In use.
2. Uie hcxas on holtJ Ml 6, lcns th 40 mm o r !cu u mounting bolu, ,, - 7
3. The motor in which cooling a.tr Oow direction Ls rcVt:ncd is 3·M6 Tap depth 10, on o.50 even
IWO •Vllhlblo. a.rrungcmcnt required
On cue of shaft without key,
there b no tlpt•p.)
157 -
8.5 AC Spindle Motor Model 50P (Foot Mounting Type)
(8) MS screws
Terminals for fan motor .
(U, V, W) Terminals for power line
(U/V/W X Y/Z/G)
715.5
380
546
397
1
-~
::i
:.ii
6J
Air in
I
~-
oic____;--+--1----
_ 1_10_+--+--'-'"'-"'-'------'•""
06.,___ _-;
520
7 79
Note) I. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical downward

in use.
2. Use hexagon bolts M20, length 45 mm or less as mounting bolts. 3-M6 Tap depth 10, on <f,70 even
3. The motor in which cooling air flow direction is reversed is arran ement re uired
also available . (In case of shaft without key,
there is no tiptap.)
For the external dimensions of models BP to 4OP, refer to AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT
S series in Part II. For model SOP, refer to FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series
DESCRIPTIONS B-53422E/1O or the later.
- 158 -
IV. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR VH series
1. GENERAL
The AC SPINDLE MOTOR VH series is able to operate at high speeds with minimal
heat rise due to its use of an oil/ air lubrication method and a unique oil
cooling system which utilizes a piped cooling oil mechanism.
2. FEATURES
1) Because the VH SERIES uses an oil/air lubrication system, thereby eliminating
worries about lubrication oil life which accompanies grease lubricated
systems, it is able to run at high speed for extended hours.
2) In the VH SERIES, the forward flange and the stator core outer surface are
oil cooled, enabling the motor to run at high speed for extended hours with
minimal heat rise throughout the motor. This minimizes any heat deformation
effects on the machine.
3) Vibrations are minimized even in the high rotation speed range, due to strict
dynamic balance corrections on the rotor and the use of high precision
bearings.
4) Since no cooling fans are used, the noise level is low.
- 161 -
3. SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Specification Table
3.1 .1 AC spindle mot or VH series
Table 3.1 Specification table
Name
6 VH 8 VH 12 VH
Item
Output Continuous rat ed kW 5.5 7.5 11
*l
30-min . rated 7.5 11 15
50%ED rated *2 7. 5 11 15
Rotation Base speed rpm 5,000 5,000 2,500

speed
Maximum speed 20,000 20,000 15,000
Output torque (continuous Nm 10. 5 14.3 42

rated torque in the rated
torque range) kgcm 107 146 428
2
GD 2 kgm 0 . 086 0 . 11 0.36
Rotor inertia kgcm 0 . 22 0 . 28 0.93

2
sec
Weight kg 60 80 110
Cooling system Liquid cooling system
Cooler capacity kcal/h 1500 - 2000 2000 - 3000
Bearing lubrication system Oil air lubrication
Allowable radial load 80 kg or less at the tip of the output

shaft
Instal l ation The ou tput shaft should be horizontal

(underside the oil air drain hole) or
vertically downward .
Allowable overload capacity 120% of 30-min. rated ou tput

(for 1 min . )
Insulation Class F
Ambient temperature 0 - 40°c
Noise 75 dB
Vibration V 5
Accessories Pulse generator , ther mostat
- 162 -
(* l ) The rated output is guar an teed at the rat ed input vol t age (200V/220V/230V
AC). If t he input voltage fluctuates, it is possible that the rat ed output
cannot be obtained even when such fluct uations are within the allowable
fluctuation range,
(*2) With a cycle time of 10 minutes and 50%ED: the ON period will be 5 min.
and the OFF period 5 min .
3.1.2 AC spindle servo unit VH series
Name
Item 6 VH 8 VH 12 VH
30- min. r ated power kVA 17 22 26
source capacity
Power source *l 200V/220V/230VAC+l0%, -15%

50/60Hz +lHz
-
Feed back system Velocity feed back by pul se generator
Braking system Regenerative braking

Input command voltage +lOV DC : Maximum speed, OV: Stop
Vel ocity control range rpm 200 - 20,000 150 - 15,000

Speed variation Less than 0.1% of the maximum speed in the
load variation range from 10 to 100%
Cooling system External radiation type *2
(*l) A transformer is needed when the power voltage is other than specified
herein .
(*2) No cooling fan, for heat radiating sections, is supplied with the SERVO
UNIT. Cool the radiating sections with forced air with a 3m/sec-or-greater
veloci t y using a fan, etc . , when operati ng.
3.1.3 Miscellaneous
1) For detailed specifications on the AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT for Models 8VH and
12VH , refer to the sections on Model s 12S and lSS, respectively, in Part II.
For detailed specifications and outline drawings of the AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT
for Model 6VH, refer to B-53422E/10 and fol l owing sect i ons in the FANUC AC
SPINDLE MOTOR SERIES Specifications Manual . For t he display voltage and type
of dynamometer, refer to sect i on 10.7.
2) For cooling requir ement s fo r the AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT, refer to the sections
on 12S and 15S for Mode l s 8VH and 12VH, respectively, in Chapter II, Section
10 " Cooli ng and setup requirement s".
- 163 -
3.2 Oil Air Lubrication Conditions
Item Setting condition
Oil supply 0.03 cc every 16 minutes
Oil type Turbine oil or spindle oil, 32 est or equivalent
Air supply 20 NL/min./bearing (dry air)
Air pressure 2
3.5 - 4.5 kg/cm
Drain piping ID of r/J6 or more, piping length within 300 mm
3.3 Motor Cooling Conditions
Item Setting condition
Coolant Turbine oil or spindle oil, 10 est or less
Pressure in the outlet Lower than 2.0 kg/cm2
Flow rate 5 - 10 L/min
Oil temperature setting 30°c
3.4 Reference Drawing for Piping Parts
I . 8±0.os
0-ring (Pll)
PT3 /8
(\} '-.0
-tj" (\}
0 LO
lSl lSl
23
36
2-,P5 .5 through hole
GJ
- 164 -
3.5 Output Characteristics
1) Model 6VH
10.-------.-- - - - , - - - - - - , - -- ,
8 1-----t- 30-min. rated output 7.SkW
Output (kW)
5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 rpm

Motor speed
2) Model 8VH
12,.......----,..- -- . -- ---,- - - ,
30-min. rated output llkW
Output (kW)
0 L-- - - - - '- - - ---'--- -...L..- - ,....,...-J

5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 rpm
Motor speed
3) Model 12VH
20.----.----,----,----.-- -r-- --.
30-min. rated output 15kW

15f-- - - - , - - - - - - - - , - - -
Output (kW) Continuous rated output llkW

101---+-H-- --t--+-- -+--- +-- ~
0 2,500 5,000 7,50010,00012, 50015,000 rp m

Motor speed
- 165 -
4. ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER
Name Spec. DWG. No. Remarks

Model 6VH Flange mounting A06B-1056-B308 No key, 20,000 rpm
Flange mounting A06B-1058-B398 Same as above, built-in sensor

included (512 p/rev)
Flange mounting A06B-1062-B398 Same as above, built-in sensor

included (512 p/rev)
Amp Name Spec. DWG. No. Remarks

For model 6VH (*2) A06B-6055-H208#H534 External radiation type
A06B-6055-Hl08#H534 Internal ventilation type

For model BVH A06B-6059-H212#H544 External radiation type
For model 12VH A06B-6059-H215#H545 External radiation type
(*l) For options for the AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT for Models 8VH and 12VH, refer to
Part II, AC SPINDLE SERVO UNITS SERIES.
(*2) For options for the AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT for Model 6VH, refer to
B-53422E/10 and following sections in the FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR Series
Specification Manual.
- 166 -
5. OUTER DIMENSIONS
5.1.1 Model 6VH (liquid cooling type)
Oil au plpin,i joint

for rcsln pipes or ¢4
Connector for pulse acncrotot
...... .. ...
Q ..... t<D ...
.. .. ""
I'll
"""" '"""- ~Ydlo-
.. ••
OID :,
OY
DIii
4-+.lS tap with deptl\ of 10

l-¢10 (cool>nt piping hole/
. 0-rln; Pll usw)
(Nole) 1. The output slufi should be dthct hotiz.onu.l or "-crtietl. "I[)c""'Ull=ct1=p"'1"
p'tn=-s-,-cct=-Io,.,n-,I
If the SN ft U in the vtrticil politJon. the spindle should
be pointlns down ..-.nls.
2. Use hcx:ssan bolts M12, length JS mm or Jess, .as mounting boJu.
3. TI1c motor in which cooling a.Ir Oow direction is rcvc:ncd is
oboanlbble. ·
4. lu the se,I for the stun end h a simple llbyrinth type,
tll.c care so tJ~t t he surf.ace of the fla.ngc is not spbsbcd
dlrcdly with lubrlc:ating oil or the like.
5.1.2 Model BVH (liquid cooling type)
OU air piping joint

for resin pipes o f o4
(Coobnt piping hole)

4-¢1S on ¢11S tv-cn
,
nmngcmcnt required
¢22 ~vcn unngcment required

.
HIS t>p wiU1 depth or 10, on Oll w dn.ln hole fM"-i+-- -- - -- -1--,:.,...-1
I P 1 116 > \ a .. ,.
Cllbo a,m.a. <D ...
.,v
~
..•• .. ..
a,w,.., QC- G>Y.-
OY
010 :;s
"'0111
4-MS top with deptlt of 10

l-¢10 (eoobnt plplna hole/
<>-<Ing r 1 I used)
!Dcailcd piping 1«ilon i
(Note) 1. TI1c o~uput .duh d1ou)d be either horizont::tl o r vatic:;al.
lf the stun is 1n the venial position, the spindle , hould
b0 pointing down~-irds.
2. Use hexagon bollJ Ml 2, length JS mm or lcs:s, u mounting bolu.
) . The motor in which cooling all Oow direction iJ rc.vcncd is
aho1.,~bk:.
4. tu tho seal for lhc slLJn cod is a simple bbyrlnth tyPc,
take arc so.th.it tho nuf~co of the fhngc is not spl:uhed
dircaly with lubric:itlng all or the like.
- 167 -
5.1.3 Model 12VH (liquid cooling type)
Connector for pubc gc:ncr3tor

Oil 11ir pipin&inlc1
\
373 a,m.
I'll PA
a,ww,. CIIO- Cl>Y.,,_
.,.
(11111'-' a)llol
Power line tcrmiJU..I IUI RA DV

a, a, a,
CID s, OHi
'¼,IS on ¢265 even

:ur.mgr:mcnt rcqul,ed
Oil au piping joint
,:,24 =ef
3-MS tap with depth or 10, on
= required
for resin pipes of o4
:;1Jj ~HIS . tap 1'1tb depth or 10

1 2-o!O (cool>nt piping hole/
. 0-ring Pl! u,cd)
j Det>ilcd piping section I
Note) 1. The output !lu1.ft should be horizonbl or vcrtJcl downw:ud

lnuse.
2. u~ hexagon bolts Ml 2,fongth 40 mm or ~,umountina bolu.
3. The motor in whkh cooling o.ir flow dhcctJon U rcvcned .iJ
al!o anllable.
4. /u lha seal for the sbnft end I.J a simple Jabyr!nth type,
take cnrc so th11.t the rurface or the fl.o.ngc mmy not be
q,loshcd dlrcctly with lubrica.ting oil or lllc like.
168 -
V. SPINDLE ORIENTATION
1. GENERAL
Unlike conventional mechanical spindle orientation using stoppers, etc., the
spindle orientation stops the spindle at a fixed position by directly feeding
back position signals from the position coder or magnetic sensor directly
connected to the machine spindle.
2. FEATURES
1) Mechanical parts are not required.
This orientation is accomplished simply by connecting the position coder or
magnetic sensor to the spindle without any need of mechanical orientation
mechanism (stoppers, pins, etc.) for spindle orientation.
2) Reduction of orientation time
Since the spindle motor connected to the spindle is utilized and the
orientation can be done directly from high-speed rotation, irrespective of
gear shift, the orientation time is largely reduced.
3) Simplified power magnetic sequence control
This sequence consists of the spindle orientation command, its completion
signal, spindle high/low speed signal and spindle medium speed signal only
without any need of other signals. Neither orientation speed command
sequence nor torque limit command sequence is needed.
4) Low price
This simplified orientation control circuit designed for the spindle
orientation only is simplified and low-priced.
5) High reliability
Electrical system assures improved reliability without any damage to the
mechanical section against an external impact.
6) High accuracy and rigidity
The spindle orientation accuracy and rigidity are enough to execute automatic
tools exchange (ATC).
7) Positioning of workpiece
Workpieces can be positioned to arrange their loading and unloading
directions in lathe.
8) Reduction of the number of processes in boring
Since the spindle orientation can be done in the same direction as the
rotating direction of the spindle when boring ends, workpieces will not be
damaged by tool blades.
Since these tool blades can be mounted or dismounted in a fixed direction
with reference to workpieces, programming is easy.
- 171 -
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION
3.1 Position Coder Type (Stop Position Internal Setting)
r-~-----,
I Ml 9 I
Spindle orientation command
I I .-------,
I I
I I Spindle
I I servo unit Gear or belt
I I
I NC I r-------7
I I I I CNl
I I Power magnetic
I r--iI sequence r---
: I I control circuit I
1 I I I : Spindle T l
'--- - VJ
1
I *
L - - - - - - - _J
'---------- . ----------
L---1--,.......--1---=--CNA
CNB:
./ Position control
loop
t17.._.~4Jm
I
Connected directly to gear
or timing belt ( 1 : 1)
Orientation circuit ARII, ASII, Position coder
AHRII, AHS, ES (option)
3.2 Position Coder Type (Stop Position External Command)
r-----,
I I Orientation circuit BRII, BSII,
I I BHRH, BHS, FS (option)
I I
I I Spindle
I I servo unit
I NC I
I I Gear or belt
I I jPo-;;;.-7
I I I magnetic I
I L---1 sequence}--
Spindle
I I I control I
I I I circuit I motor
L ___C?_J L - _J
I
:' - -*- - - - - -
Position Spio•I•
~ . : $
~
---- - _ _ _ .J
control
loop ~• Connected directly to gear
'----- or timing belt ( 1 : 1)
'-----1-----
Po sition coder·
Stop position external
command signal
(12-bit binary)
(4096 = 360°)
Note 1) When a pos i tion coder is attached to lathe, etc , , it can be used for
this purpose.
Note 2) The broken line marked with* is the cable route when the position coder
attached to lathe or the position coder for the synchronous feed for
machining center is used concurrently.
Note 3) When a built-in sensor signal conversion c i rcuit is used, refer to the
items related to built-in sensor conversion circuits in Part VII.
- 172 -
3.3 Magnetic Sensor Type
i ~ Spindle orientation command
:
I ~ :
I .------
I I
I I Spindle
I I servo unit
I I
1
r------ -,
1 Gear or belt
I 1 , Power I
I NC I J I CNl
I I I magnetic t
I 1--..i sequence ~--
1 I I control
1
I I I circuit
l
L _____ _J L _______ _J1 Spindle
Tool
Position
control i- -, <8Jzm
loop i '{ Magnetizing element
Orientation circuit CR, GR,
CSII,GSil,HSII,DSII Magnetic sensor I l""- (Directly connected)
i Magnetic sensor head
I
-~
mplifier
- 173 -
3.4.1 For models 1S - 3S
Classi-
fica- Name Spec. DWG. No. PCB DWG. No. Remarks
tion
Option Orienta- A06B-6059-Jll0 A20B-0008-0242 Position coder system
tion Two-speed variable,
ARII stop position internal
setting type
Spindle speed of 8000
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jlll A20B-0008-0243 Position coder system

BRII stop position externally
connnanded type
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jll2 A20B-0008-0244 Position coder system

AHRII stop position internal
setting type
Spindle s peed of 20000
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jll3 A20B-0008-0245 Position coder system
BHRII stop position externally
commanded type
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jl20 Al6B-1300-0110 Magnetic sensor system,
tion CR two-speed variable
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jl21 Al6B-1300-0lll Magnetic sensor sys tem ,

tion GR two-speed variable
rpm or less
- 174 -
Classi-
fica- Name Spec . DWG. No. PCB DWG. No. Remarks
tion
Option Posit ion A86L- 0027-0001 #101 - Balanced transmission
coder C type, 0160 with flange
4000 rpm specification
Position A86L-0027-0001#001 - Balanced transmission

coder D type, 0160 with flange
Position A86L-0027-000 1#201 - Balanced transmission

coder G type, 0160 with flange

coder J type, 068 with flange

coder K type, 068 with flange
Position A86L- 0027 -000 1#202 - Balanced transmission

coder L type, 068 with flange
Position A86L- 0027 - 0001# 103 - Balanced transmission

coder E type, no flange
Position A86L- 0027-0001#003 - Balanced transmission

coder F type , no flange

coder H type, no f lange
- 175 -
Classi-
tion
Option Magnetic A57L-0001-0037/N - Spindle speed of 12000
sensor N rpm or less
Magnetic A57L-0001-0037/P - Spindle speed of 12000
sensor P rpm or less
Small type
Magnetic A57L-0001-0037/Q ID of ~40, cylindrical,
sensor Q - high-speed type
rpm or less
Magnetic A57L-0001-0037/R - ID of ~50, cylindrical,

sensor R high-speed type
rpm or less
Magnetic A57L-0001-0037/S - ID of ~60, cylindrical,
sensor S high-speed type
rpm or less
Magnetic . A57L-0001-0037/T - ID of ~70, cylindrical,
sensor T high-speed type
rpm or less
3.4.2 For models 6S - 22S
Classi-
fica- Name Spec. DWG, No. PCB DWG. No. Remarks
tion
Option Orienta- A06B-6059-J130 A20B-0008-0242 Position coder system
ASII stop position internal
setting type
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jl31 A20B-0008-0243 Position coder system
BSII stop position
externally commanded
type
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jl32 A20B-0008-0244 Position coder system
AHS stop positi on internal
setting type
rpm or less
- 176 -
Classi-
tion
Option Orienta- A06B-6059-Jl33 A20B- 0008- 0245 Position coder system
BHS stop position
type
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-J134 A20B-1000-0462 Position coder system

tion Four-speed variable,
ES stop position internal
setting type
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jl35 A20B-1000- 0463 Position coder system

tion Four-speed variable,
FS stop position
type
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-Jl40 A20B-0008-:-0032 Magnetic sensor system,

tion two-speed variable
CSII Spindle speed of 8000
rpm or le ss
Orienta- A06B-6059-J141 A20B-0008-0033 Magnetic sensor system,

tion two-speed variable
GSII Spindle speed of 12000
rpm or les s
Orienta- A06B-6059-J142 A20B-0009-0521 Magnetic ·sensor system,

tion three-speed variab le
DSII Spindle speed of 8000
rpm or less
Orienta- A06B-6059-J143 A20B-0008-0033 Magnetic sensor system,

tion + two-s peed variable
HSII A06R-6044-J948 Spindle speed of 20000
rpm or less
For the specifications for position coders and magnetic sensors, refer to
Subsection 3.4 . 1.
3.4.3 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit

When the built-in sensor . signal conversion circuit is used as a position coder,
refer to the section related to built-in sensor signal conversion circuit in
Part VII.
- 177 -
4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Type
Name System Explanation Purpose
Orienta- Two-speed Stops only at one • For lathe type spindle

tion variable point during one positioning (loading/
ARII, Position rotation of the unloading works, etc.)
ASII coder system spindle, which is set . Machining center type spindle
Stop freely inside the orientation
position PCB. . Machine tools with spindles
internal of two speeds or less
setting type . Spindle speed of 8000 rpm or
less
Orienta- Two-speed Can move the stop . For lathe type spindle
tion variable position set in positioning (For indexing che
BRII, Position adva~ce inside the spindle of a turning center,
BSII coder system PCB to any one point etc. However, mechanically
Stop during one rotation locking is needed while
position of the spindle by cutting.) Can be used for
externally inputting a 12-bit positioning when arranging
commanded signal from the the mounting/dismounting
type outside. directions of workpieces
using a robot .
• Machine tools with spindles
of two speeds or less
. Spindle speed of 8000 rpm or
less
Orienta- Two-speed Stops only at one • For lathe type spindle

tion variable, point during one positioning (loading/
AHRII, high-speed rotation of the unloading works, etc.)
AHS type spindle, which is • Machining center type spindle
Position set freely inside orientation
coder system the PCB. • Machine tools with spindles
Sto_p of two speeds or less
position • Spindle speed of 20000 rpm or
internal less
setting type
Orienta- Two-speed Can move the stop . For lathe type spindle
tion variab l e , position set in positioning (For indexing the
BHRII, high-speed advance inside the spindle of a turning center,
BHS type PCB to any one point etc. However, mechanically
Position during one rotation locking is needed while
coder system of the spindle by cutting.) Can be used for
Stop inputting a 12-bit positioning when arranging
position signal from the the mounting/dismounting
externally outside. directions of workpieces
commanded using a robot •
type • Machine tools with spindles
• Spindle speed of 20000 rpm
or less
- 178 -
Name System Explanation Purpose
Orienta- Four-speed Stops only at one • For lathe type spindle

tion variable point during one positioning (loading/
ES Position rotation of the unloading works, etc.)
coder system spindle, which is • Machining center type spindle
Stop set freely inside orientation
position the PCB. . Machine tools with spindles
internal of four speeds or less
setting type . Spindle speed of 8000 rpm or
less
Orienta- Position Can move the stop . For lathe type spindle
tion coder system position set in positioning (For indexing the
FS Stop advance inside the spindle of a turning center,
position PCB to any one point etc. However, mechanically
internal during one rotation locking is needed while
setting type of the spindle by cutting . ) Can be used for
inputting a 12-bit positioning when arranging
signal from the the mounting/dismounting
outside. directions of workpieces
using a robot •
• Machine tools with spindles
of four speeds or less
less
Orienta- Magnetic Can stop at a . Machining center type spindle

tion sensor specified position orientation
CR, system using a noncontact • Machine tools with spindles
CSII position detector. of two speeds or less
Stops at a position • Spindle speed of 8000 rpm or
where the magnetic less
generator faces the
Orienta- magnetic sensor. . Machining center type spindle
tion orientation
GR, . Machine tools with spindles
GSII of two speeds or less
• Spindle speed of 12000 rpm or
less
Orienta- . Machining center type spindle

tion orientation
DSII . Machine tools with spindles
of three speeds or less
• Spindle speed of 8000 rpm or
less
Orienta- . Machining center type spindle

tion orientation
HSII . Machine tools with spindles
less
- 179 -
4.2 Specifications
4.2.1 Position coder system
Explanation
No. Item
Stop position internal Stop position external
setting setting
1 Position coder Coupled to the spindle one to one ratio.
1024 pulses/rotation (A-phase and B-phase signals)
1 pulse/rotation (One pulse/rev. signal)
Balanced transmission type for 4000 rpm, 6000 rpm,
8000 rpm.
2 Detection units One spindle rotation (360°) is divided by 1024 x 4

(Note 1) (4096) pulses, i.e. 0.088° is made one pulse unit
(detection unit).
360°/4096 pulses= 0.088°/pulse
3 Stop position The distance between the

internal setting setting point indicated
by the (Internal)
position coder one
pulse/rev. signal and the
actual stopping point is
set for the number of
pulse (N) using three
digital switches of
4-bits each.
4 Repeated ~0.2° (spindle angle) Machine error factors

positioning (for example, the backlash of the coupling between
accuracy the spindle and position coder) are excluded.
(Note 1) Depending on the fineness of the position gain
adjustment, the spindle may move for one detection
unit (0,088°),
5 Stop position Position to be stopped

external setting can be specified by a
12-bit (4096) contact
point signal (M pulse)
from the outside.
Stops at the position of
the number of pulses
(M+N) specified from the
position of the one
rotation signal of the
position coder.
- 180 -
Explanation
No . Item
Stop position internal Stop position external
setting setting
6 Operation - When orientation command
is given, spindle rotates
1 to 1
2 turn s after
2 2
spindle speed has reached
orientation speed, and
stops at the specified
' stop position.
Incremental positioning
is not available.
7 Orientation circuit ASII, BSII AHS, BHS ES, FS

ARII, BRII AHRII, BHRII
Allowable H (High speed) 2000 - 8000 6000 - 20000 1500 - 8000

range of rpm rpm rpm
maximum
spindle MH (Middle high - - 500 - 3000
speed speed) rpm
(No te 2)
ML (Middle low - - 250 - 2000
speed) rpm
L (Low speed) 400 - 2000 1200 - 6000 100 - 1000

rpm rpm rpm
8 Allowable range of gear 2 - 5 2 - 5 2 - 5

ratio
Hi~h sEeed H
Low speed L
Hi~h sEeed H
Middle high speed MH
Middle hi~h sEeed MH
Middle low speed ML
Middle low sEeed ML
Low speed L
- 181 -
Note 1) When the built-in sensor signal conversion circuit is used, items 2
"sensing unit" and 4 "repeated positioning accuracy" change depending on
the number of the detection gear teeth.
No, of detection
gear teeth Detection unit Repeat accuracy
256 0.088°
-+0.2°
128 0.176°
-+0.4°
64 0.264°
-+o.75°
Note 2) Make sure to use in the speed range shown above. If the range of the
maximum spindle speed goes out of the range shown above in one of
high-speed, middle-speed or low-speed gear, orientation takes longer
time to cause a practical problem.
4.2.2 Magnet ic sensor system
No. Item Explanation

1 Magnetic sensor See Section 5.3.
2 Stop position Position where the center of the sensor

head faces the center of the magnetic
generator
Position where the center of the sensor
head faces the stop position reference
mark on the magnetic generator
The stop position can be adjusted fine in
increment of one degree on the circuit.
3 Repeated positioning accuracy Within O. 2 °. However, those due to
machine error factor are omitted such as
mounting and the like.
4 Maximum holding torque during Continuous rated torque of the AC spindle

orientation motor
5 Recovery range during

orientation -+240° from the
orientation
stop position duri ng
6 Orientation circuit CR, CSII GR, GSII DSII HSII

Allowable H (High speed) 2000 - 6000 - 4000 - 6000 -
range of 8000 rpm 12000 rpm 8000 rpm 20000 rpm
maximum
spindle
speed
M (Middle speed) - - 1000 - -
2000 rpm
(Note 1)
L (Low speed) 400 - 1200 - 250 - 1200 -
2000 rpm 6000 rpm 667 rpm 6000 rpm
- 182 -
No. Item Explanation
7 Allowable range of gear ratio 2 - 5 2 - 5 3 - 4 2 - 5

Hi~h SEeed •H
Low speed L
Hi~h speed H
Middle speed M
Middle speed M
Low speed L
Note 1) Make sure to use in the speed range shown above. If the range of the
maximum spindle speed goes out of the range shown above in one of
high-speed, middle-speed or low-speed gear, orientation takes longer
time to cause a practical problem.
- 183 -
5.1 Orientation Control PCB
5.1.1 Models 1S - 3S (position coder)
n I -
CN9
00 M
........
"""""'
CNA CNB CNC
~ ~ I
I
265
I
I
I
I I
275
5.1.2 M odels 1S - 3S (magnetic sensor)
n r - - r
I
I
CN9 I
I
I
I
.,., .... I
-
0 -.i-
\,:, I
I
CNA
I I
w
I
I I ·-~
230
Optional PCB are mounted to the PCB of the AC spindle servo unit before
shipment.
- 184 -
5.1.3 Models 6S - 22S
,. 69
.I
n n
r
l I I LJ
CN9
0
0 0 !;
...
~
...
1/"l ...
"'0.
~
u
ti.
0
.--
I I
I
II
17
I
I
265
272 -
PCB and fixtures have the same sizes in the position coder system and magnetic
sensor system.
5.2 Position Coder
5.2.1 Position coder C, D, G (with 160 x 160 flange)
96
5
~ -o/ 30
20
8c
l~
Od
I I
::!RI
00
U')
......
cici -e..
I o
0
co
"6- 2
0
U')
1.5 : g.14 c,:i
t--
I. □ 1 36 + 0 . 1
□ 160
- 185 -
5.2.2 Position coder E, F, H (without flange)
8 93
30
8~ 20
cici
I I
0
tn
-e.
"""
8~
ad
I I
0
tn
4-M3 -e. 2
depth 7
efJ 60 circumference
5.2.3 Position coder J, K, L (with 68 x 68 flange)
98
30
ceo;s
' s
31
'"'t=B
; ; . ,. ,
~!::-t;~
. r"' Ill
-I--- .
;
"'
"'...
Ill
20
N
'"
....
N
--2
056
068 /. \ Koy p<»Woo

S3102A20-29P
- 186 -
5.3 Magnetic Sensor
5.3.1 Types of magnetic sensor
Items Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor

Unit p
N Q R s T
Maximum spindle speed rpm 12,000 20,000 15,000

Magnetizing element 33 14.8 315 460 770 1000
weight g
+1.5 +0.7 +10 +10 +15 +15
- - - - - -
Allowable centrifugal
force (Note 3) kg 255 130
Mounting radius from the

spindle center to the
magnetizing element mm 40 to 110 20 25 30 35
(Note 3)
Gap width from

magnetizing element to. mm 1.0 to 2.0
sensor (Note 1)
Deviation between the

magnetizing element
mm 0 to -+2.0
center and the sensor
center (Note 2)
Working temperature oc 0 to +50

range -
Note 1) Note 2)
Magnetizing element Center deviation
T l - 2mm f 1-2mm
Note 3) When the mounted radius to the magnetizing element is large, maximum
revolution is restricted due to allowable centrifugal force.
Note 4) It is recommended to mount the magnetizing element using high- s t r ength
bolt.
- 187 -
5.3.2 Magnetizing element
1) External drawing of the magnetizing element for the magnetic sensor N.
SPC
2.0 t ~::i:::::j::===::t:=:::::::t=q--!--
,-:
Cover
0.5 t
Mounting ho!~
4 - QI 4.3
Discriminative
standard hole QI I. 0 SPC
Cover 2.0 l
Cover 0.5 l
0.5 t
"'
30
1-..----50----~
Weight 33 g ± 1.5 g (Take care in respect of spindle balance)
2) External drawing of the magnetizing element for the magnetic sensor P
2- Ql4.3
Stainless steel cover ( t 0.8)
It)
,-:
Mounting plate (chromate tl.6)
Model name plate

50
- ( t 0.1 )
- 188 -
3) External drawing of the magnetizing element for the magnetic sensor Q
RINGFEDER
20 RFN 8006 40 x 45 4-M4
Stainless steel case

SUS-303
u::,
u::,
-s
Stop position
_____....__.,____, verification gradation
..,_
2-q,5 ±0.15
on the circumference of q,54
4) External drawing of the magnetizing element for the magnetic sensor R
RING FEDER
RFN 8006 50 x 57 4-M5
23
SUS- 303
~ ''
co
.....
-0
~o
+ I
.....
' u::,
u::,
-s
::r::
0
,n
-0
2-¢5±0.15
Stop position on the circumference of q,66
verification gradation
- 189 -
5) External drawing of the magnetizing element for the magnetic sensor S
RINGFEDER
RFN8006 60X68 4-MS

SUS-303
.,,. 8do
C'l +I C'l
-e. t- t-
::c -e.
0
lD
"G-
Stop position 2-q,5±0.15

verification gradation on the circumference of rt,79
6) External drawing of the magnetizing element for the magnetic sensor T
28 RINGFEDER
RFN8006 70 X 79 4 - M6

SUS-303
m ~o
0 + I 0
t- C'l
-0 -e.
::c
0
t-
-0
Stop position
verification gradation 2-rt,5±0.15
on the circumference of ,P90
- 190 -
5.3.3 Magnetic sensor
Metal plus reccpt2clc

inlCJface
Mcu) plug rcccpu.clc (7 wires
Magnetic scruor hc::id

Direction of movement
of m:innctiz:ing clement
Pin poove { 1-)

SPC 0.5 t lt(ct.21 plug rca::pt.1.clc (mJ.de by TAJ JMI)
~~
IT:..
~
.,,
FANUC
MAGNETIC SEN SOR
.1... i A57L·000I-D037
22
Ex,mpic of mounting bo,ud

16
~ ~ 2.7
::j4 I
C:lb1c Jeng
500mm
1--------.--------)r _,_. . ,. .-.. ~--·-
3 7.5 ----j ,
0
~
2 • M4
~
------95
UoJt: mm
5,3.4 Precautions on use

1) As a spann element (RINGFEEDER) is used in the magnetizing element , use 4
bolts to conduct uniform tightening.
Conduct gradual repeated tight ening in

the order from (D to ® .
2) Relation between the discriminative standard hole and magnet polarity is

shown in the diagram below.
Discriminative standard hole ¢1.0
:FANUC ;
: S . N:
'----------
-$--
3) Use the 2 165. 0 holes on the opposite side of the screw clamp of magnetic
sensors Q, R, S, and T for the orientation positioning jig.
- 191 -
6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
6.1 Interface (For position coder)
Models 1S - 3S
CNI Sp ind le SCTYO unil
"5 ◄"
SFR
CNC ablnct or K.S JO 2!1 28
power m4g.11ctic
sequence control
MR- SOLFII
Ma.c.hlnc
CC!leorbc1t
To m:anua.1 puhc-acncr.dor
KIO To proximity switch for ncu :.cro point l Tool
Uota 1) 51anal cable (12 to uoed vitb tbc orientat!on Hll/Bllll.Il. Position coder Spindle ~
Uote 2) C4bh ti l h uud vhen the lnthe pouictcn coder or the synchronout:l [ud
po■1c1on codu· for che Da:chlntng center 1a u■cd concurrently.
D1rcctlY coupled or
timing belt
Models 6S - 22S
CN I Spindle servo unil
◄ 5 ◄ 4 ,CJ
CNC Clbin.et Of
power nu.gnc1ic
sequence control
MR-20RMA(CNA, D)
Ma.chine
Gcuor belt
KIO 'I Tool
Note 1) Signal cablo 1.12 ill uo.d vith ~a or1encac1on BSII,BUS,F·S circuit.
llotc 2) Cabla 1:11 1a uud vhcn the lact,c po ■ ltlon coder or the synchronous feed
Posllloncodcr ~~
po■ tcion coder Cor the i:u.ch1n1na center 1• u■cd concurrently.
• ~ Directly coupled or
timina belt
- 192 -
6.1.1 Connection when synchronous feed position coder is concurrently used
for lathes and machining centers
Orientation
I CNA I ' Manual pulse
generator
ARII/BRil
ASII/BSII ~ HA
AHRII/BHR2 r---v---- - - - -- - - OL
ES/FS
~HB
'
i01)(02)(03) OH
+SV power is
supplied from CNC
cabinet
Proximity switch
for near zero point
To CNC cabinet via (IO)
connector CNB ---'-.....;._-nNZX =-=±:::±=-=11±-=:0--,.JYVr-Q::-==-==-=i
-------7
I
I
I
_ _(_1~1)' --nNzz~-~--±--':--t~+--o---1AN--0----_,~1-~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
__c_o_1)_ ,, +12N-+-~1-t--.+---_-_-_-
_-_-_-_-_ __
..
I (Note) When the manual pulse
(20 ) I generator and the proximity
T4, TS ----+----+-----''--'--=---n 00 I switch for near zero point
I·Open I-_y_ov
00
I
I
are not used, HA , HB,NZX,
NZZ and +J2N need not be
I connected.
-:;:- Shield grounding I
I
I
I
I
I Position coder
I
I 1..:: ____________ _
I K( OV)
I
I
l._!: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ - - - - - - H( +SV)
__
( 1_6_)--< I pA
position coder 17 '---------1-r--o N(*PA)

signal input
18 PB - - - ' - - - ' - - . / - \ - - - - - -- ----=---'---n C ( PB )
' i
I
_ __,__(l_9~>
- u *PB-...-,.~
B( SC)
- 193 -
6.1.2 Connection for machining center spindle orientation only (No connection to NC)
Orientation ARII/BRII,
ASII/BSII, AHRII/BHRII,
AHS/BHS, ES/FS I CNA
-7
I I
+sv is +s v · · Position coder

supplied by +5 v ( 01 )( 02 )(03
the spindle
OH ---:::---_--_-_-_-_-_-_-_-
_ -u K ( 0 V)
1 servo unit.
Jumper Tl-T3 400 mA
5H (04 )( 05 )( 06 or less
- --- - - - - - - - - v + 5H ---t~-----=_--_=-c-_-_-_-_-_-_-----...i H ( +5 V )
( 20
- - - - - - -- - ---uOG
00 Jumper
av T4,TS
( 16 )
PA A ( PA )
position coder I
signal input I
( 17 )
* PA
1. N ( *PA )
( 18 )
PB C ( PB )
( I9 )
* PB R (* PB )
14 ) SC B ( SC )
I
I5 * SC P (* S C )
L ____J I
Note) The cable between the AC spindle servo unit and the position coder must
not exceed 20 meters.
- 194 -
6.1.3 Stop positio n external command connection
Or ient ation BRII /BSII

I CNA I Position coder
+ sv
Set by Tl·TS. ~ 0 l )( 0 2 ( 0 3 ) OH K ( OV)
fOjt-5 V Tl·TJ 400mA
or less
L :sH( o4 )( os )( 06 )
--1---4>------- --.., +SH - -=-Q H ( + 5 V )
-i==--=-=-=-=-=-=--= - -=-=-=-=-=--=-=-=-==
( 20 )
- --+-- - - - - -- --v 00
r· 100
L~Jov T4, TS
(16)
PA A ( PA )
position coder
signal input
(17)
* PA
(18)
PB C ( PB )
(19)
(14)
SC B(SC )
(15)
When the synchronous feed control
is performed, these signals are sent
to CNC cabinet via the connector CNB.
Short circuit +SV - SH, and OG -OV ,
to supply +SV from CNC.
Power magnetic sequence control circuit
I CNC I( 0 7 ) HOl -1
20
( 0 6 ) H0 2 2 2'
I
( 05) l-103 4 22 Conversion
circuit
( 04 ) l-l0 4 8 4 096
23
Stop posit ion = 360 °
command s i gnal ( 0 3) HOS . I 6 20 4 8
2"
=1 8 0 °
( 02 l l-106 32 102 4
25
1 =9 0 °
I
r 20 l H07 . fi 4 20 5 12
= 45 °
( 19 ) HOB 128 21 34 1
=30°
( l 8 ) l-l09 . 2 56 2g
( l 7 ) Hl 0 5 12 20
1
I
( 16 ) J Hl 1 1 024
2 ,o
( 1 !i l H1 2 2 048
2 II
l 14 ) OL
-
- St op posi tion connnand1
- 195 -
6.2 Interface (For magnetic sensor)
Models 1S - 3S
MR·50~1~•
CNC ~binct or
power magnetic
sequence conuol ~
~-n
.
Mll·SOLl'll/
CN9
,------- - ------ --c=i-- - ---------------,

I
: CNA Orientation CR, GR :
'I 20 19 JB 17 16 IS I< I
MR·20IIMA~I
CNA I 00 OV +I SV LSD I.SA MSD MSA
I
I
I I3 I2 I I IO I
I I
/ : 07 06 0S O4 03 02 0I :
~t~LFll js_ ----- ----- .----- . -----_ -----___,_:_____J

Machine side
TooJ
Macnctizi~ clement -............
Mcul cannector --.........-.._

Kil
Models 6S - 22S
45 44 43 '2
"' "~l~ SFR

CNCor power J(.5
m.Jsnetk
~quence conuol
I3 I2 II I0
MR · S0L FII
OR
CN9
J,.bchinc s:idc Ge.nor bell
Tool
Macncliting element ............__ Spindle
~
MeuUic. receptacle ~
Kil
- 196 -
6.2.1 Magnetic sensor connection
Orientation CR/GR
CSII/GSII/DSII/HSll
I CNA I
-7 I
Metal connector
MSA A
~
MSB D
(16) I
LSA Magnetic
F sensor
amplifier
LSB E
I
- ---'U =!P--o +1 5 V C
_ _O_!t_ ---u OV
B
OV
L-,----....---
.
Note) The cable between the AC spindle servo unit and the magnetic sensor
amplifier must not exceed 20 meters.
- 197 -
7. INTERFACE SIGNALS
7 .1 Description of Signals (up to 2-stage speed change gear spindle)
I"" reno unit - I CN 1-I 7

i '-~-~-•~~~----~ --- --~~ent,hon command
(J7 )
?
' £7
I--~ I : Spindle High/Low
: I 11 CTH __J "b-:;......-- speed signals
ORCM2
Orientation
completion signal ( 2 2 )
I
~ ORARI ---{CJ-
( 23 ) i
ORAR2
L__ _ _ __
Fig. 7.1 Signals passed between the magnetic cabinet or NC and the spindle servo unit
7.1.1 Orientation command signal (ORCM1, 21

1) This command signal is used to stop spindle movement to the preset position
to allow tool change and workpiece loading/unloading.
2) When this signal is ON (contact closed) while the spindle is rotating, the
rotation decelerates immediately and the spindle moves to the preset
position.
3) When the ORCM command is issued, turn off the spindle forward/reverse
rotation command (SFR, SRV) for safety. In this status, the spindle will not
rotate if ORCMl, 2 contact is OFF (open) during orientation.
4) Turn OFF (open) this signal by the tool change completion signal or workpiece
loading/unloading completion signal.
5) Always set the orientat ion command signal to OFF when turning on power.
Sequence
ON
Power on OFF
I~
Spindle servo on ,-----------
(machine ready signal ___O_F_F_"_"
_,I \ ON
and emergency stop
signal)
Orientation
command O RCM
40 ms or more
6) When an emergency stop occurs during orientation, the orientation command

signal must be reset. Return the ATC arm to safe position so that it will
not Jbe damaged if the spindle or tool rotates when the power is turned on.
- 198 -
7.1 .2 Orientation completion signal (ORAR1, 2)
1) This signal is issued when the spindle moves within about +1° of the preset
position and stops. That is, this signal turns on under the fo llowing three
conditions;
a) Signal ORCM is ON
b) Zero speed signal is ON
c) The spindle is in the vicinity of the preset position.
If the orientation completion signal is not issued within a set period of
time aft er the orientation command signal is input or if the orientation
completion signal is issued when the orientation command signal has not been
input, it is considered to be abnormal. So it should be detected by power
magnetic sequence and an orientation alarm should be issued.
2) Tool chan;;e or workpiece loading/unloading operations can be start ed only
after the completion signal is on.
3) The spindle orientation completion signal is issued when the spindle is
within +1° of the preset position. So it does not always indicate that the
spindle -has stopped completely. Some machine allow a very short operation
time for the ATC arm to grip the spindle tool. In this case, start the ATC
arm operation after 0.1 to 0.5 sec so that the arm will grip the tool when
the spindle has stopped completely.
Zero-speed detection point
Orientation
completion signal
Chattering
ATC arm operation

start signal
0.1 - 0.Ssec
4) This signal will turn off during a tool change if the spindle is pushed away
from the preset position by an external force.
Design a power magnetic sequence so that the tool change operation is
interrupted.
However, don't release orientation command, and if orientation comple tion
signal is issued again, perform tool change.
5) If the automatic tool change (ATC) structure is such that it may cause
serious damage if a malfunction occurs, install a proximity switch to
generate a verification signal when the ATC enters an area in which automatic
tool change operation can be performed. In addi tion to this the power
magnetic sequence should be designed to avoid such damage.
- 199 -
7.1.3 Spindle high-speed/low-speed signal (CTH)
1) This signal is used in order to shorten orientation time when there are 2
speed change stages of High/Low between the spindle and spindle motor.
2) Increase the spindle motor low-speed gear speed to the spindle motor
high-speed gear speed by speed correspond to the gear ratio (high speed/low
speed) so that the spindle orientation time of the high- and low-speed gears
is almost identical.
3) Contact OFF (open) indicates high-speed gear selection, and contact ON
(closed) indicates low-speed gear selection,
4) Be sure to always use the position coder and magnetic sensor systems when
using machines having 2 or less spindle speed change stages.
7 .2 Description of Signals (When 3-stage speed change gear spindle)

The following spindle medium speed signal is needed for magnetic sensor system
orientation (A06B-6059-Jl42) and position coders (A06B-6059-Jl34, Jl35).
---------7
AC spindle servo unit I
CNl-1
r--r7 ( 25 ) 1 -........_
I I r - - --0 ORCM 1 - - _J "'---- - - - 7 Orientation command
L - - .L .J I I ··
,--- ---- ___ ___ J_ --- - ----- - - - - - - 7 I
: r - - r 1 (24 ) 1 -........_ : I
I I I- - - ~ CTM - - .J "'---- - - ~I ~I Spindle medium speed coinmand
L __ LJ y
I : I
r--T7 ~
(l 7 ~ ,
I
I I I- - -
L __ j_J
CTH - - .J - - 7 _JI
I
Spindle high-speed/low-speed signals
~--- - --- - --- - -1 ___ _____ _______ __ _; I

I I
2
r - - _J ~ ORCM2 - - - - - __ _J
_J._ y
ov I
I
Orlen tation completion signal I
rr--1
r- __/L -~2~ ORARl -- - i I 1--
LL __ J
I I
I (23_½
L __ - --- y ORAR2 - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - __J
Signals passed between the magnetic cabinet or NC and the AC spindle servo unit
- 200 -
7 .2.1 Spindle medium speed signal (CTM)
By combining this signal with the spindle high-speed/low- speed signal (CTH), it
is possible to adjust orientation when there are three or four speed gears
between the spindle and the motor.
In accordance with the respective speed change stages, control the contact
signals as follows:
a) In case of three speeds
Selection of spindle speed Contact of CTR signal Contact of CTM signal

change stage
High OFF (open) OFF (open)
Medium OFF (open) ON (closed)
Low ON (closed) OFF (open)
b) In case of four speeds
Selection of spindle speed Contact of CTH signal Contact of CTM signal

change s t age
High OFF (open) OFF (open)
Medium high OFF (open) ON (closed)
Medium low ON (closed) OFF (open)
Low ON (closed) ON (closed)
7 .3 Sequences
7 .3.1 Orientation command while stopping
Orientation command ON (Closed)

ORCMI, 2
CW direction Stop
Motor speed
- - - - - -~
,, -+-.!-- - - -+--- . - - - - - - - - - --f- + - - -
\,.._ ___
*1 ..J ,..,-..1
CCW diE_e_:t_!s>:1_,,/
15 - 20 ms
Orientation completion
signal ORARl and 2. ON (Closed)
ATC operation
ATC operation
Start Completion
- 201 -
*l The spindle motor rotation direction can be changed by setting. In
standard setting, the spindle motor will rotate in the direction the
spindle motor was rotating before this orientation COilll!land signal was
generated.
7 .3.2 Orientation command during high-speed rotation

Rotation command
SFR and SRV
M03/M04
Orientation command
ORCMI and 2
ON (Close)
High speed
--+-1.
CW direction Deceleration
Stop
Motor speed ,
,. ,..... _,.
/
15 - 20ms'
;
,,
Orientation /
completion CCW dire~tj_op_/ ON (Closed)

signal ORARI
and 2
ATC operation
ATC operation
Stop Completion
- 202 -
7 .4 Description of Signals (Stop Position External Command Type of Position
Coder System)
(A06B-6059-Jlll (Orientation BRII), -Jl3l(Orientation BSII), -Jl35(0rientation
FS))
(A06B-6059-Jl13(0rientation BHRII),-Jl33(0rientation BHS))
7.4.1 Stop position command signals (H01 to H12-OL)

1) These 12-bit contact signals are used to control the stop position.
2) When these signals are all OFF (open), the spindle is stopped at the
reference stop position (0°).
This reference stop position can be set by using 3 digital switches on PCB.
3) Stop position command (In case where a 1024 p/rev position coder is used)
The following stop positions (X 0 ) are designated according to ON/OFF
conditions of HO! to Hl2 contact signals with reference to the reference stop
position (0°).
360 [ 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256

X(degree) = 4095 (HOl)+(H02)+(H03)+(H04)+(H05)+(H06)+(H07)+(H08)+(H09)
512 1024 2048

+(HlO)+(Hll)+(Hl2)
1
The numbers corresponding to HO! to Hl2 become effective when contacts are
turned on and those correspondi ng to HOl to Hl2 become zero when contacts are
turned off.
Example) HlO contact only is turned on.

360/4095 X 512 = 45°
In this case, the spindle stops at the position where it is turned clockwise
by 45° as viewed from the reference stop position.
4) The minimum shift unit is 360°/4095 = 0.088°.
When a built-in sensor signal conversion circuit is used, the least moving
increment differs corresponding to the number of detection gear teeth as
shown in the table below.
No. of detection gear teeth Least moving increment
256 0.088°
128 0.176 °
64 0.264°
5) Positioning time
The positioning time is usually 1 . 4 to 20 sec when the s peed change gear
stages are 2 or less.
It becomes longer as the spindle inertia increases.
- 203 -
6) Setting error
Since the position is set to integer times of the minimum shift unit (0.088°)
in case of 30° indexing, 10° indexing, and 1° indexing, a setting error is
produced.
Setting error : Max. +0.044°
Example)
30° indexing command (Min. shift unit) x 341 29.974° (Error 0.026°)
10° indexing command (Min. shift unit) x 114 = 10.020° (Error + 0.020°)
1° indexing command (Min. shift unit) x 11 = 0.967° (Error 0.033°)
To determine actual accuracy, a setting error is added to the repeti tion
positioning accuracy (+0.2°).
7) Necessity of mechanical clamp
A mechanical clamp is required for indexing of the spindle for cutting using
this system.
Since the motor is displaced when load fluctuates during cutting, the spindle
must be mechanically fixed, if cutting is made after indexing.
8) Mechanical clamp timing
Orientation command
ORCMl,2 ON (Closed)
Spindle motor
speed Stop
\ ccw,_,,.,,-~\
\,_; __ ..f
Orientation
completion signal
O RARI,2
- : - - - - - \-I-------'
Clamp command Unclamp command

MF (Miscellaneous function)
"---+--,\
Clamp \
Machine clamp (
0.1 ~ 0.5 sec. usually

Cutting after (This value depends
indexing of spindle upon machine tool)
Completion signal
FIN _ ___,!1,____ _~17.____
- 204 -
8. DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Position Coder

1) Electrical specifications
a) Number of square waves/rotation
Channel Signal
1 ch 1,024 pulses/rotation (A, B phase)
2 ch 1 pulse/rotation (C phase)
b) Power supply
Voltage Current
+5 V +5%, -10% 400 mA or less
c) Working ambient temperature range

0 to +50°C
d) Output terminal
- Cannon connector MS3102A20-29P: Position coder side
- Cannon connector MS3106A20-29S: Cable side
The cable side cannon connector and the cable clamp are provided with the
position coder.
e) Output terminal
A PA K ov
B PZ L
C PB M
D N *PA
E p *PZ
F R *PB
G s
H +5 V T
2) Mechanical specifications
a) Input axis inertia: 1.0 X 10-3 kg. cm. s 2
b) Input axis torque : 1,000 g.cm or less
c) Input axis load tolerance
- 205 -
When stopped During rotation
-----------
Thrust load 10 kg or less 5 kg or less
Radial load 20 kg or less 10 kg or less
d) Structure
The main frame is made of an aluminum alloy finished with alumite.
Dust-proof and oil-proof structure using an oil seal. (IP43)
e) Weight: about 1 kg (without flange)
f) Accessories
No. Name Specifications Number of pieces
1 Cannon connector MS3106B20-29S 1
2 Cable clamp MS3057-12A 1
3) Storage
Avoid storing in a humid place.
When moving the product, put it in a packing case and do not drop or throw
it.
4) Notes on installation
a) If there is backlash in the interface between the position coder and the
spindle, the stop position will vary. Therefore, the position coder
should be linked to the spindle so as to eliminate backlash. if the
position coder is installed with a timing belt or a gear, check carefully
and periodically for backlash due to ageing or mechanical wear.
b) Eccentricity of the body and the center of the axis ahouls be 0.02 or
less.
c) Do not give a strong mechanical impact as plate glass is used.
To avoid penetration of oil or water from cannon connector, the cannon
connector is to be installed upside down.
d) Keep at least 50 cm away from the magnetics cabinet.
Keep at least 30 cm away from the cable' line of a motor or the like;out of
which a substantial amount of instantaneous current 'f lows at the time of
ON-OFF. Especially, when an object which generates radiation noise (such
as discharge processing device, electric welder and the like) is in the
vicinity, an electro-magnetic shielding is to be considered.
- 206 -
8.2 Magnetic Sensor
The magnetic sensor makes sure that the spindle stops at the specified position
by attaching a magnetizing element to the spindle rotation part and installing a
magnetic sensor at the stop position.
The magnetic sensor emits analog signals corresponding to the position of the
magnetizing element attached to the spindle.
Control circuit
Magnetic sensor
amplifier
Magnetic
1----se_n-1sor h e a L D _
+lSV
100mA or less
I~
Mangetizing
element
A shielded wire should be used. Shield insulation must be connected to OG. The
following shows the magnetic sensor electrical specifications and how to attach
the sensor.
1) Electrical specifications
a) Number of waves per rotation
Channel Signal
1 ch I/rotation (MSA-MSB)
2 ch I/rotation (LSA-LSB)
b)
Power supply Current
+15 V +10%, -10% 100 mA or less
c) Maximum number of rotation (Magnetizing element) 8,000 rpm

d) Working ambient temperature range (Magnetic sensor): 0 to +50°C
e) Output terminal
Metallic receptacle type. Receptacles for the cable of the magnetic
sensor amplifier are provided,
f) Output terminal layout (Magnetic sensor amplifier)
- 207 -
Terminal Signal name
A MSA
B 0 V
C +15 V
D MSB
E LSB
F LSA
g) Weight of magnetizing element, refer to item 5.3.
- 208 -
2) Magnetic sensor mounting method
The following show magnetic sensor mounting examples Fig. 8.Z(a), (b), (c),
(d) •
(Rotating part)
Mounting distance
H (mm)
60 to 110 mm
Gap L = 6mm
1.0mm
-- ---- _,,,. /M agnetizing element
Pin groove (upper position)
Mounting board
(Thickness 8 mm
or less)
Magnetic
sensor head
Metallic receptacle
20.0 dia.
Magnetic sensor
0 amplifier 0
Fig. 8.2 (a) Magnetic sensor mounting example (1)
- 209 -
Mounting distance H
60to 110mm
Spindle (Rotating part)

I
0
I
Moun ting board

(Thickness
8 mm or less)
6L = 1.0 to 2.0mm
L = 8 mm or less
(6mm: Standard
value)
Note) Gap between mounting board and magnetizing element is 8 mm or more.
Fig. 8.2 (bl Magnetic sensor mounting example (2) (When mounted on cylinder)
Magnetic sensor head
Mounting board
(Thickness
8 mm or less)
L= 1 to 2mm
Mounting
distance H Magnetizing clement
60to110mm
I
~---~
/8 \
......
/
/ ''
I \
I \
I \
o R1
I
-
\ I
\ I
'' ...... __ ___ /
' /
/
Center
Fig. 8.2 (cl Magnetic sensor mounting example (3) (When mounted on disk)
- 210 -
Mounting method of magnetic sensor
6 L= 1 to 2mm
Magnetizing element
polarity indication
Stop position check
scale Moun ting board
(Plate thickness: Less than 8 mm)
Magnetic sensor head ¢ 36
Metallic receptacle ¢20
>-:j
;s::: z
>
;>C Magnetic sensor amplifier
> 0 (")
....,
01
zt:j
c-'
I o-,3
H
0
0 0
(")
0
....
0
(I)
I t:j
0
0 '2
(I)
w
...., 0
::;:,
Fig. 8 .2 (d) Magnetic sensors m ounting example (4) (Q, R, S and T )
- 2 11 -
a) Magnetic sensor head pin groove
When a magnetizing element is mounted to the spindle of a machine tool,
the polarity is produced between the magnetic element and the magnetic
sensor, and the mounting direction differs according to the composition of
the spindle (belt transmission, gear coupling, etc.)
For the connection shown in the magnetic sensor interface, arrange the
relative positions of the magnetizing element marking hole and pin groove
of the magnetic sensor as illustrated below.
If this mounting is wrong, the spindle motor will repeatedly turn in the
forward and reverse directions without being stopped.
Magnetizing element
Magnetic sensor marking hole
head 'pin groove
Rotating
~ direction
The spindle motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW) as viewed from the motor
shaft by forward rotation command (signal SFR contact ON (closed), speed
command VCMD (positive voltage).
Arrange the magnetizing element marking hole and the magnetic sensor pin
hole face to face by forward rotation command ON, so that the spindle
motor rotates in the rotating direction specified in the figure.
3) Cautions on installation
a) Since the magnetizing element is mounted onto the rotating body of the
spindle, be careful not to allow the magnetizing element to be detached by
means of centrifugal force.
Limit the circumferential speed of the magnetizing element to lower than
3770 m/min (N, P type).
(Take the depth of the screw holes of M4 x 4 into consideration)
b) Mount the magnetic sensor amplifier as close to the sensor as possible.
c) Do not allow a magnetic field producing substance to be -close to the
magnetic sensor (stop position changes). Do not arrange · any solenoid in
the vicinity of the magnetizing element, in particular .
d) Be careful not to attach iron powder and other substances sensible to the
magnetism to the magnetizing element.
e) If the spindle is provided with a built-in electromagnetic clutch for
HIGH/LOW selection and other parts which may compose a magnetic loop,
mount the magnetizing element on a non-magnetic substance (aluminum, etc.)
without fail.
The magnetic flux of the magnetizing element is zero at the stop position.
However, if it is affected by a magnetic loop of the electromagnetic
clutch, the magnetic flux is added normally when the magnetic clutch is
turned on. It should be carefully noted that if the clutch is turned on
and off during the stop at the fixed position, the stop position changes
due to a change of the steady-state magnetic flux.
- 212 -
f) Do not contaminate the magnetic sensor cable, sensor amplifier, and
connecting cables with lubrication oil and cutting oil.
g) Mount the magnetizing element of the magnetic sensor onto the spindle
directly.
If the magnetizing element is mounted by gear coupling or spindle
coupling, the repetition orientation accuracy may f luctuat e by a backlash
quantity between the sp i ndle and the magnetizing element.
Examine this accuracy by taking a change due to a secular change caused by
mechanical abrasion, etc. into considera tion.
(Installation example 1) (Installation example 2)

Magnclizing clement
rn•rking hole Forward rolalion Magnetizing clcmcnl
M:agnctic sensor
Magnetic sensor SPINDLE command pin groove marking hole
pin 1roovc SFR on (closed)
~
MOTOR
~ "' Gcor link age

Dell linbr,c
Counterclockwise
SPIND LE
MOTOR
= c:::,
C:oun I erclo ck wise
Clockwi,c
Clockwise

Magnetizing clcmen I Magnctizina element
marking ho le marking hole
~
Magnetic sensor
pin' groove
Gear link age ~
Magnetic sensor
pin groove
Counterclockwise
SPINDLE Bell llnlcagc
MOTOR
= =
i
~
Counlcrcloclcwise
Counterclockwise
Countcrclock wise
- 213 -
Screw flxins Sacw flxln&
Polarily direction M11ncUz.tn1 Polarlly dltccllon M11nc1lc
indlcilion
clement
Indication I element
~
AC SPINDLE AC SPINDLE
MOTOR MOTOR
Mqncllc Kn10r
pln '100Ye
Counccr,lock.wisc Coun1crclockwiu:.
Cur llnk&10
Coun1crclock:wi1c Counlcrclockwlsc
- 214 -
9. TWO-MAGNETIC SENSOR ORIENTATION
9.1 General
According to this technical data, a spindle can be selectively stopped at two
different orientated positions by two magnetic sensors.
9.2 Configuration
Spindle motor
Power line, signal line

Spindle servo unit
Spindle
Orientation
control
circuit
I I
CNl CNA
Cable C
I
Magnetic sensor A
Cable A
Switching1------+-----~1 I I Ill
circuit 1 I -
Cable B Magnetizing element
I
Power magnetic sequence I
control circuit
Magnetic sensor B
NC
(Notes related to Configuration Drawing)
1. It is necessary to install a switching circuit to allow switching of the

magnetic sensor signal in the power magnetic sequence control circuit. This
switching circuit is to be provided by the user.
2. Two magnetic sensors are required.

Magnetic sensor specification: A57L-0001-0037/()
- 215 -
9.3 Change-over Circuit _
The change-over circuit is shown in next page.
The MSA and LSA signals of the magnetic sensor A and Bare transferred .to the
orientation circuit by shifting them within a change-over circuit.
9.3.1 Selection signal of magnetic sensor (SB signal)

When the SB signal is set at HIGH LEVEL, the magnetic signal A is selected.
When set at LOW LEVEL, the magnetic sensor Bis selected by actuating the relay.
The power +V supplies voltage to the relay solenoid. For changing timing,
select the selection signal of magnetic sensor (SB) so that· it may be completed
before turning ON the orientation command (ORCM) as in the figure below.
t ~ 0 msec
I / ON (closed contact)
Orientation command I/
(ORCM) - - - - - - - - + - _ _ ; ,
Selection signal of
magnetic sensor
(SB)
___________X~---------------
L Magnetic sensor
selecting completed
9.3.2 Signal change-over relay

1) Contacting point type
Contacting points for two circuits are switching simultaneously with a single
operation coil and contacting point between 1 and 2 (or point 3 and 4) may
not be shorted out.
r----- -------,
I
I
I
8
'
: 0>----'-,- - - 0 2
I I
sH0~-__,__ _-- --:----- -7
3
I
7 n--- -,--() I :
: 0>-----1:- - - 0 4
I
I
' I I
l------7------.J
I
I
6()----~ '------{ l 5
Note 1) Numbers are given for convenience.

Note 2) The SH terminal is used for shielding statics.
2) Contact resistance 100 mQ or less

3) Capacity of contacting point 1 VA or greater
4) Switching life of contacting point: Select according to the actual freq uency
of use.
- 216 -
Switching circuit interface
Switching circuit MSA Cable A

Spindle servo unit
Magnetic
MSB i --- sensor A
I
I
I
LSA I
Relay I
I
,------, LSB I
I
I I
I ---r--l
I I
MSA I I +1sv : Shield
Orientation I
I
Io+-'
I I
I
I
circuit MSB --- 1---:--,I

I
I I
I }--+,-+-_J
- ov I
C NA Cable C ___ JI
LSA I---.;..:-(~ ), I I - 00
- - --- r----- I
I
I
:
I
}--,-I-+--.
ur
LSB n L--r--
1
I
+ 1sv I MSA
I Cable B
I
OV ...___ I
MSB Magnetic
Shield I
,--- sensor B
I 1
---- OG
--- I
I LS A I
I
I I
I I
I
,---r---, LSB - I
I
__ T_J
kPoi
L--:--J I
+ 1sv I Shield
I
I
I
I
OV I
I
I
__ _ J
I 00
+v
T,ower
+v
rr~ :
Diodo :
t---+-----if'"~
Magnetic sensor select signal
SB 1----- - - - - ~" " Relay coil
~ Common line
1 0
J_
0
SH
Electrostatic shield
Internal wiring of circuit should be as short as possible.
9.4 Fine Adjustment for Stop Position

In two- magnetic sensors type, design on machine s ide is required to enable fine
adjustment for the other side stop position since fine adjustment for stop
position can be done at only one side.
- 217 -
VI. SPEED GAIN SWITCHING CIRCUIT
1. GENERAL
The speed gain switchi~g circuit (models 6S - 22S) controls, while switching
by the external signals, the speed loop gain i n the AC spindle servo unit. It
improves the accuracy as well as the stability of the spindle at the time of
stop at oriented position of the spindle; while r aising speed loop gain in the
AC spindle servo unit by contact signals whenever an oriented position stop
control is performed while making use of one of the position control circuits
other than the spindle orientation circuit of the AC spindle servo unit by
catching the feed back signal of position from the position coder which is
linked directly to the spindle of the NC machine tool.
Use this circuit without fail when performing spindle oriented position stop
control by employing the NC position controller.
2. FEATURES
1) A stable control is available
A stable control, such as an improvement of the accuracy of orientation, is
possible when using one of the position control circuits except that of the
option for the AC spindle servo unit S series.
2) Easy control
A control can easily be done only with the contact signal.
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Configuration
The option of the speed gain switching circuit is connected to the PCB of the
AC spindle servo unit S series.
r - -• - - - - - - - .I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Spindle servo unit
I
I
I r----------,
I _ ~ Power magnetic ~ Gear or belt
CN9
I I
sequence c~cuit J, i1 CN I
i LI __________
Position
control ' r-.J ._ __
circuit r------------------ '-----➔J,
L ____ f ____ J1 L-------' ,' Spindle .
1Jg
:
:
Speed gain switching circuit
(option)
~
~
c:::::ffJ=i
1 Position control loop ~ Connection, gear or timing belt
I - -- - - - (1:1)
L_ - - - - --- - - - ---- ------ - --- --- - -- - -----J
Position coder
3.2 Order Specifications
Category Name Specifications
Option Speed gain switching circuit A06B-6059-J700
- 221 -
The connecting cables to the PCB of the AC spindle servo unit is not included,
,---7
j\ ,-
:
I
I
I_
D
I I 0 I =-~-
I
CN9 I 0
I 0
0 0
IO co I
I
I
0 0
I
I -
I. 100
272
.I
.I
[J
5. DESCRIPTIONS OF INTERFACE SIGNALS
Describes the interface signals on which special precautfons are to be taken
when using the speed gain switching circuit. As for the signals other than the
under-mentioned; refer to the item 10 of "II AC SPINDLE SERVO UNITS series".
5.1 !Forward Rotation Command Signals (SFR, OS)

1) Command forward rotation (SFR) without fail, as for the rotating direction
command utilizing the speed gain switching circuit. (Pay attention as reverse
rotation command cannot be used.)
2) With the contact ON (closed), the spindle motor rotates counterclockwise
(CCW) as viewed from the motor shaft when the speed command voltage is in the
positive direction, and rotates clockwise (CW) when the voltage is in the
negative direction.
fClockwise rotation (as viewed from the motor shaft)

Max.Speed
- lOV
-~------.J<--------'--+ Speed command vo 1 tage
+lOV
Max.Speed
Counte·rclockwise rotation {as viewed from the motor shaft)

Relation between the command voltage and
the rotating speed
5.2 Orientation Command Signals (ORCM1, ORCM2)

1) This is the contact signal used for raising the speed loop gain by switching
it from the exterior when utilizing the speed gain switching circuit, and
there is no spindle orientation function. Switching of speed loop gain is
carried out when the contact of this signal is ON (closed) and the rotation
speed of the motor becomes less than about 1/ 100 of the maximum -rotating
speed.
- 222 -
2) Although the forward rotation command becomes ineffective when this signal is
input, keep the forward rotation command in OFF (open) status while this
signal is given, in order to maintain the safety. In this way, it keeps the
spindle motor from turning should the contact of ORCMl or ORCM2 be in OFF
(open) status during orientataion or in case the orientation is released .
6. OPERATION WHEN USING THE SPEED GAIN SWITCHING CIRCUIT
6.1 Operation at the Time of Stop
ON . {closed)
Forward rotation command
signal SFR-0S
ON · {closed
Orientation COffi!Tland
ORCM1-0RCM2
Clockwise direction
cw
L 15~20ms
(delay of the receiver)
Motor speed I
I
I ' '~------
I Rotation speed of approx.
Counterclockw~~~.9-~E~sf.ion /100 of the maximum speec
ccw
Hich
Speed loop gain status
6.2 Operation as from Rotating at High Speed
Forward rotatiQn ~qrnmand ON {closed)

signal SFR-0S
Orientation command ON (closed)

ORC11l-ORCM2
High speed
Clockwise direction deceleration
cw
Motor spe ed
/
/
,..----- --- -- - Rotation speed of approx.
1/100 of the maximum speed
/
,. /
/
Counterclockwise direction ,,"'
ccw ---------- ~/ JI ir.h
Speed loop gain status
- 223 -
Vil. BUILT-IN SENSOR SIGNAL CONVERSION CIRCUIT
1. GENERAL
This chapter describes the signal conversion circuit for outputting signals for
speed detection and for the position coder by receiving signals from the
built-in sensor used for the AC spindle motor and the built- in motor of the
built-in type NC machine tools.
2. FEATURES
1) With a single set of this signal conversion circuit, you can obtain both the
signals for speed control of the motor and the signals for the position
coder .
2) The external dimensions of the AC spindle motor of the built-in sensor type
is the same as those of the S series standard.
3) A function has been added which monitors the detection signal level and, when
any abnormality is found, issues an alarm (that wire disconnection has been
detected) .
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS
3 .1 Configuration
3.1.1 When position coder system orientation is used
Example configuration
AC Spindle motor (Built-in sensor including type)

·----·-····-······---- ---·-------------···-----·-····-········· ·· ···· ···· ~
Built-in sensor + Built-in motor
Sensor signal ICN1 I Power for motor
Built-in Velocity feedback Spindle control signal

Spindle servo
sensor signal signal
unit
conversion
circuit CN3 CN2 CNl PC
ICN2 CNA CNB NC device

lorientati~n circui~
Position coder signal Positioi:i coder signal
3.1.2 When position coder system orientation is not used
Example conitgUration
AC Spindle motor (Built-in sensor including type)

········--····-·· ······· ·· ··· ··- -·······---··-·· ·--------------·······--· 0
Built-in sensor + Built-in motor
Sensor signal ICNl I Power for motor
Built-in Velocity feedback Spindle control signal

sensor signal signal Spindle servo
conversion unit
circuit CN3 CN2 CNl PC
ICN2 NC device
Position coder signal
- 227 -
3.2 Order Specifications
3.2.1 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit
Category Name Specifications PCB DWG. No.

Option Built-in sensor A06B-6063-H730 Al6B-1600-0440
signal conversion
circuit
3.2.2 Built-in sensor built-in type AC spindle motor
Category Name Specifications Remarks

Model lS Flange mount A06B-0750-Bl90 8000rpm,
type exhaust rear
Model l.5S Flange mount A06B-0751-Bl90 8000rpm,
type exhaust rear
512p/rev.
Model 2S Flange mount A06B-0752-Bl90 8000rpm, Note 1)
type exhaust rear
Model 3S Flange mount A06B-0753-Bl90 6000rpm,
type exhaust rear
Basic type exhaust rear
Model BS Flange mount A06B-0755-Bl90 4500rpm,
type exhaust rear

type exhaust rear
1024p/rev.
Model 15S Flange mount A06B-0757-Bl90 4500rpm, Note 1)
type exhaust rear
type exhaust rear

type exhaust rear
Note) You can obtain an equal signal with the position coder by using the signal
conversion circuit, however, there are two pulse numbers; that of 512
p/rev. and 1024 p/rev.
- 228 -
4. SPECIFICATION S
4.1 Position Coder Output Signal
4.1.1 Number of detectio n gear teeth and o utput pulses
No . of I I
detec tion i
No . of
Magnifi- : SH SH outpu t pul ses/ Remarks
gear tee th/ cation I 6 I 7
I I one rotation
one rotation I
I I
Phase A 512 2 IA IA 1024 Compatible with
I I pulses/rotat ion A06B- 6044-H606
Phase B tee t h/rotation I I
I
256 4 I B 'I A 1024 Compatible with

I I
teet h/rotat ion I pulses/ r otation A06B- 6044- H603 and
I I
I H605
128 I I 512
I I
tee t h/rotation I I pul s es/rotation
I I
64 I I 256
I I
teeth/rotat ion I pulses/rotation
I
I
-- 8 IA
I
IB
I
-- Not used .
-- 16 1B IIB
1•
-- Not u sed .
'
Phase Z One 1 On e Same as before
t ooth/rotation pulse/rot ation
Note) Magnification is set with the setting pins SH6 and 7.
4.1.2 Output signal s pecifications (connector CN2 s ignal) at constant s peed of 1500 rpm
Poin t to be measured Item St andard Example waveform
Between CN2-16(PA) Phase 90 +100 *PA

and CN2- 18(PB) and difference (When rotating PA -~
between CN2- 17(*PA) clockwise e
and CN2-1 9(*PB) viewed from *PB
the gear side) PB _lL___Jl_
CN2-16(PA)
CN2- 18(PB)
CN2- 17(*PA)
High level Minimum 2 . 5 V
PA, etc.
ov
l 1I I I
CN2-1 9(*PB)
Low level Maximum 0.5 V
PA, etc. l 1 ! I
ov 1
PA , *PA, PB, *PB Duty ratio 50 +7%
-
PA, etc.
__}=th_
CN2- 14(SC) Wid t h 116 :t2lµs
CN2-1 5 (*SC) *SC
SC
J=L_
- 229 -
4.1.3 Output circuit configuration
Balanced output with line driver IC AM26LS31
4.2 Input Power Source
Applicable range of voltage Maximum applicable current
+5 V +5% 200 mA
-5%
4.3 Maximum Speed for Use
Number of detection gear

512 teeth 256 teeth 128 teeth 64 teeth
teeth
Maximum speed 5000 rpm 10000 rpm 20000 rpm 40000 rpm
4.4 Temperature Range for Use

0 - +55°C
- 230 -
5. ADJUSTMENT
When the built-in sensor is installed by the user, the adjustment described
below is necessary.
5.1 Configuration of Output Signal (Speed Detection Signal)
Measuring conditions CH20- CH10, CH21- CH10
Direction of rotation
CW, ccw
OV
,...
1
-- ,.._
A
,
I
70 mVor less
1___
- 1--
Vs
Speed 1500 rpm

~--- ~'- ~ ~
1--
Note) Set so that output s ignal ripple is 70 mV or less (detected vibration of

30 µm or less) . If the value i s 70 mV or more, the adjustment described
in 5.2 may not be possible.
CHlO; DC 2 .5V Vs; 0.36 - 0 . 5V
5.2 Offset Adjustment (Position Detection Signal)
Adjust- Measure-
Measurement Adjustment Measurement
ment ment Remark
conditions value device
location location
VRl CH7-CH10 Direction of 0 +56mV Digital Adjust so that
-
rotation multimeter the adjustment
VR2 CH8-CH10 cw, ccw 0 +56mV
- (Iwatsu values will be
Speed SC- 7404 the same in both
VR3 CH9-CH10 1500 rpm -17 0mV - etc.) the CW and CCW
-230mV DC range directions
'
5.3 Example of Wave Pattern
CH7-CH10, CH8-CH10 CH9-CH10
cw
( CCW )
ov -- .,,_--l-------',,--l...__-1-_--<-
ccwcc
Adju
-56 mV or less
Vp- p = 1.44 V ~ I.8,1V Vp - p = 0.90\1 ~ 2. 00V
- 231 -
6. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND EXAMPLE OF M OUNTING
6.1 Built-in Sensor Signal Conversion Circuit
. (Unit mm)
0 0
CN l
108 12 0
CN3 CN2
</>4.5 - 4 points
0 ~
I.
128
140 j
6.2 Built-in Sensor Built-in Type AC Spindle M ot or
Refer to t he chapter " I . AC SPINDLE MOTORS SERI ES".
6.3 Example of Mounting
220 ( Uni t mm)
(Size with a connector mounted)
15
I I
Insulating sleeve and others Approx. 10
t
Mounting plate
A PCB shall be mounted apar t by s e tti ng an insulating s l eeve, e t c.
Ins t a ll withi n 1 m f rom t he spindle serv o uni t.
- 232 -
7: CONNECTION
7.1 When using Position Coder Method Orientation
r----- ----- ------7 Waveform conversion

I I drcult
I I Al6D-1600.0440
I I CNt
I I
II AMP
C.p
II AMP
Pl ug
J)070l-l. J 350735-1
I
I ~ -- - - - - - - - ,
Pin
;so7o6-7
I Socket
1 350689~
NC
l Built-in !l:nsor 1-~ - - --1 ' f--- ---

lI CNJ
llonda connectar HRP-20F'O I
Honda connector
I MRO-20FO
I cu:
II
Honda connector
CN!,CN2: Z-34
ON2 Hon(U contiact AMP plug
CN !, CN2:
IIKP-F4ll 1 5V 7 vz AC splodlc ~rvo unii
: VA a •vz
3 *VA!>
• ov 10 OH!
sa
CND
Duilt·in motor Clft"--"---- - - - l ' VD 11

G ~VD I~ OU2 CllB tlonda
Oricnt.itlon
Connect.or tmr-20F01 conttol
CH2n--i-- -Th
- arn
_ o_s_u _,1 circuit
Cable len111b lirnit.ition
uvw
I
I
I
... Within
Im "tHA Honda
I l:ll Within
7m
Conn•ctor
11RP-20FOI
G I 102 Within
Im
I Within CH) lloru:la
I "" Im Connecto['
L _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _J I ... I With.in
14m
HAl'- 20POI
PowCJ lino
7 .2 When not using Position Coder Method Orientation
Duilt-ln scruor sl&n:il

cnnvcnion cirrul t
Al6D-1600.0440
ClH
NCcontJollcr
Kil
ONt
CN! Honct,
CII: connector
MRP-l0F0!
HonLl:i
connector
CN l ,CN2,
CN2 z.374 AMPpluc 105
Honda
cont:act t 5V 7 vz
CNI.CN2 VA n •vz
IIKP-F413 'l * VA 'J
• av
VD II
10 091
ss
Built-in motor Clfl 0--1-- - --l '• VB 12 or.
cm 0--1-- ----' AC spindle servo unH
U V W Cable lcnsth llmibtian

I
G I <to Within
I Im
I I .,, Within
I I 7m
Within
I I "" Im CN3 Hood> CN2 Hone!, ' - --
connector connector
- ~ ~~ ~ -- - -'
I _____ __ _ JI 105 Within
14 m
MRP·20FOI MRP-20FOI
L
Power Hne
- 233 -
7.3 Details of Connection between Each Unit
7.3.1 Built-in sensor and connector (Motor) (Cable symbol: K10)

(The cable is built-in in the case of built-in sensor built-in type AC spindle
motor.)
r---------------,
I
Built-in motor
CN 1 ( 05 )
VA , AMP ( 02)
' / '
'I
I
( 02 )
* VA ' ( 03 )
( 06) VB ( 05)
AMP connector
Built-in sensor ( 03 ) *VB ( 06)
(01) --VZ (08)
CN2( 02 ) vz ( 07)
( 04 ) 5V ( 01 )
( 06) ov I I
I
I ( 04)
'
( 05 ) ss --- -- - --
( 11 )
Thermostat
(IO)
( 12 )
I
I
IL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.I
Connectors for use (Honda) Connectors for use (AMP Japan)

Connector Z.374 Cap 350783-1
Contact HKP-F413 Pin 350706-7
Cables for use: 8-wire of shielded cable

02 mm 2 (7 / 0.18)
- 234 -
7 .3.2 Motor and built-in sensor signal conversion circuit (Cable symbol: K11)
AMP (Ol )
5V ,
~- ..- - - - -- -
I
--;-,
I CN1 ( 04,05 )
ov I
I
I
I
( 01,02 )
VA I I ( 1 6)
AMP connector I Built-in sensor
*VA ( 1 7) Signal conversion
I I
circ~t..
I
I Al6B-1600-0440
VB I I ( 1 8)
* VB ( 19)
vz ( 14)
(08) *VZ (15)
OHl (0 9)
I
I I
OH2 I
I
I
( 0 8)
I I
ss (2 0 )
------ - -
Connectors for use (AMP Japan)

Plug 350735-1 Connectors for use (Honda)
Socket 350689-6 MRP-20F0I
Cable for use: 10 pairs of shielded cable

2
0.2 mm ( 7/0.18)
[Reference] Use the tools listed below for
pin crimping and welding .
Pin/AMP crimping tool
Manual tool type number 90300-1
Welding tool 458994-1
* AMP Manual Tool Operator's Manual; IS 7706

* When using .a manual tool, wire size 22-24 dies
Note) Cable length should be within 7 m.
- 235 -
7.3.3 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit and position coder method orientation circuit
(Cable symbol: K02)
CN2(01) OH
,.-,- ---- -- - -..-, CNA ( 0l )
' '
( 04) +SH (04)
( 02) OH ( 02 )
Built-in sensor signal (05) +sH ( 05) Oriented position stop

conversion circuit control circuit
(position coder method
A16B-1600{)440 ( 03 ) OH (03) orien tation control circuit)
( 06) + SH (06)
( 14 ) SC ( 14)
( 15 ) *SC (15)
( 16 ) PA (16)
( 17 ) ,WA ( 17 )
( 18) PB (18)
( 19) * PB ( 19 )
( 20 ) ss I
( 20 )
------
Connectors for use (Honda) Connectors for use (Honda)

MRP - 20M01 MRP-20F01
Cables for use: 10 pairs of shielded cable

0.2 mm2 ( 7 / 0.18)
Note) This cable K02 i s especially sensitive to noises. It is recommended to

u se a cable with length of 1 m or less, and ' connect the shield with pins
No. 20 of b ot h connectors.
- 236 -
7.3.4 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit and AC spindle servo unit
(Cable ~ymbol: K03)
CN3 ( 01 ) ov I , - - - - - - - '?""- CN2 ( 01 )

I
I
( 13) +5V ( 13)

I I I
( 02) OH2
I
I I
''I ( 02) AC spindle servo
I I
I I
unit
Built-in sensor signal ( 03) OHl I I ( 03)
I
conversion circuit
Al6 B-1600-0440 (14) PA I 'I (14 )
I
I '
I
(15) RA I
I
I (1 5)
( 16) PB ( 16)
I I I
I I
I I
( 17) RB I
' ( 17)
I
I
( 20 ) ss I
I
- - - -- __ .,. ( 20)

MRP-20F0I MRP - 20F01
Cables for use: 10 pairs of shielded cables

0.2 mm2 ( 7/ 0.18)
Note) Cable length should be within 1 rn.
- 237 -
7.3.5 Position coder method orientation circuit and NC (Cable symbol: K04)
CNB ( 01 ) OH ,-..
'I . ----,' ... (01)
I
+SH ( 04)
OH ( 02)
NC controller
+SH ( 05 )
Oriented position stop
control circuit
(Position coder method OH ( 03)
orientation circuit)
+SH ( 06)
SC ( 14 )
* SC ( 15)
PA ( 16 )
* PA ( 17 )
PA ( 18 )
* PB ( 19)
ss OG
Earth plate (Note)

(Cable clamp)
Connector for use (Honda) Connector for use (Honda)

MRP-20F01 MRP-2 OFO 1

0.2mm 2 ( 7/ 0.18 )
Note 1) Cable shall be clamped by the clamping metal (A02B-0083-K301)

Note 2) Cable length should be within 14 m.
- 238 -
7 .3.6 Built-in sensor signal conversion circuit and NC (Cable symbol: K05)
CN2 ( 01 ) OH ( 01)
,- ...- - - - - - - - :- ',
( 04 ) +SH ( 04 )
( 02 ) OH ( 02 )
NC controller
Built-in sensor signal ( 05) +SH ( 05)
conversion circuit
Al6 B-1600-0440 ( 03 ) OH ( 03)
( 06 ) + sH ( 06 )
( 14 ) SC ( 14)
( l 5) * SC ( IS)
( 16) PA ( 16 )
( 1 7) * PA ( l 7)
( 18 ) PB ( 18)
( 19 ) * PB ( 19 )
.
I I
I I
I I
'...!.... - - - -~
E.uch plate (Note)
(Cable clamp)

MRP - 20M01 MRP-20F01

0.2mm 2 ( 7/ 0. 18 )
Note 1) Cable should be clamped by the clamping metal (A02B-0083-K301).

Note 2) Cable length should be within 14 m.
- 239 -
8. CABLE
8.1 List of Cables

The cable -specifications are as follows. These cables should be provided at the
MTB.
Applications Symbol FANUC spec

General specifications
ification
Built-in sensor signal K02 MRP - 20MO I MRP- 20F01 A06B-60S9-
conversion circuit
-
a
-0
I K800( lm)
Oriented position stop
control circuit
/
10 pairs of shielded cable
0.2mrn2 ( 7, 0.18)
Built-in sensor signal K03 MRP - 20FOI l\lRP- 20FOI

A06B-60S9-
conversion circuit \ -
0 K801 ( lm)
I -0

/
l O pairs of shielded cable
0.2 mm2 ( 7. 0.18)
Oriented position stop K04 MRP - 20F01 MRP - 20F01 A06B-60S9-

control circuit K802( 7m)
I
NC device
/
0.2mnl ( 7 / 0. 18 )
Built-in sensor signal KOS MRP-201\101 MR,P- 20FOI

A06B-60S9-
conversion circuit K803( 7m)
I
NC device
/
0.211;,,.,2 ( 7/ 0. 18)
Honda connector Z-374 AMP cap 350783-1

Built-in sensor KlO A06B-60S9-
Connector HKP-F413 Pin 350706-7
I ,,., K804(0. Sm)
AMP plug -0
A06B-60S9-
K80S ( lm)
/
8-wire shielded cable
0.2mm2 ( 7 / 0.18 )
AMP plug 350735-1

AC spindle motor or AMP Kll MRP- 20FOI A06B-60S9-
Socket 350689-6
cap
-
0
-0
I K806( 7m)
Built-in sensor signal
conversion circuit /
0.2nm2 ( 7./0. 18)
- 240 -
8.2 Details of the Cable (K10)
FANUC specification drawing No.: A06B-6059-K804

A06B- 6059-K805
C
No. displaying surface
1 - L--.,~,-----.---,---:~
b_.......,...o'i]-
Cable material:
8-wire shielded cable 0.18 mm 2 (7/0.18)
~
D
1) Cable dimension
~ Dimension
Symbol A06B-6059- K804 A06B-6059-K805
A 26.67 26.67
B 20.32 20 .32
C 25.91 25 . 91
D 27.43 27.43
L 500 +20 1000 +20

- -
2) Detector wire connecting table
1 2 3
Red Black Blue
5V VA *VA
4 5 6
White/yellow Green White/orange
ov VB *VB
7 8 9
Gray White/brown
vz *VZ
10 11 12
blue/trans-
parent
OH(Note) ss OH(Not e)
Note) Connect the OH wire of the motor to Nos. 10 and 12.
- 241 -
3) Accessories
Name Manufacturer Model No. Q'ty
Plug A.M.P 350735-1 1
Split pin A.M.P 350706-7 2
Socket A.M.P 350689-6 10
Reference: Use the tools listed below for crimping and pulling up pins.
Pin/A.M.P crimping tool
Manual tool type number 90300-1
Tool for pulling up 458994-2
* AMP Manual Tool Operator's Manual: IS 7706

* Use the dies on the wire size 22-24 side for a manual tool.
- 242 -
9. NOTE
1) Adjustment
Adjustment is needed during installation in order to match the built- in
sensor with the signal conversion circuit well. For the adjusting method,
refer to the maintenance manual corresponding to the spindle servo unit which
is currently bei ng used such as FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT S series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (Version 03 of B650 15E or later) and the like .
2) Built-in sensor system orientation
No . of
No. of output
detection Detection Repositioning
pulses/one
gear teeth/ unit accuracy
rotation
one rotation
Note 1
Phase A 512 1024 0.088° -+0 . 2°
Phase B teeth/rotation pulses/rotation
1024 0 . 088°
256
teeth/rotation pulses/rotation
-+0.2°
128 512 0.176°
teeth/rotation pulses/rotation
-+0.4°
64
teeth/rotation
256
pulses/rotation
0 . 352°
-+0.8°
Phase Z 1 1 -- --
tooth/rotation pulse/rotation
Note 1) Error fac t ors due to the machine side are excluded . Movement of +l
detection unit occurs at the time of stopping in a specified position by
orientation.
Note 2) When the orientation circuit A20B- 0008- 024* is used, set the orientation
rotating direction to counterclockwise using the setting pin SHOl 4-13 .
3) Take care to observe the following points in order to prevent malfunction

caused by noises, drift at the time of orientation stop and the like .
G) Do not inc l ude the signal cable (K l O) and the power cable in a same duct.
@ Make sure to use shielded cables, and connect them to the SS terminals of
each connector. (KlO, Kll, K02 and K03)
G) The cables K02 and K03 between the built-in sensor signal conversion
circuit and the spindle servo unit are especially sensitive to noises.
Therefore the length of the cable should be within 1 m, and keep them
apar t from power cables .
© If grounding of the spindle servo unit or the motor is not sufficient,
noises may be mixed with feedback signals , speed command vol tage and the
like, and i t may occur drift at the time of ori enta t ion s t op, irregular
rot a t ion, queer sounds and the like. Connect the grounding cables
referring to t he corresponding part i n this manual.
- 243 -
4) Grounding
(D Connect the G terminal of the machine power panel to that of the spindle
servo unit.
® Connect the G terminal of the spindle servo unit to that of the spindle
motor.
G) Connect the G terminal of the spindle servo unit as close as possible to
the frame of the power panel.
Reason) If the cable is apart from the G terminal of the power panel, there is a
possibility of insufficient grounding.
@ Connect the G terminal of the machine power panel with the external
grounding cable.
Note 1) Connect the G terminal of the machine power panel with a terminal
grounded in conformity to the third section "Insulating/grounding a
cable way" of "TECHNICAL STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT."
Note 2) Use cables with sufficient thickness (5.5 mm2 or more) to connect the G
terminal of the CNC control circuit and the grounding terminal, and the
grounding terminal and the G terminal of the machine power panel. Also,
connect them as close as possible.
Machine power panel
CNC control
circuit
G Spindle servo
unit
Grounding
tenninnl G
Spindle motor
Power source
G
terminal
0 0 0 Tenninal G
- 244 -
5) When performing threading or rigid tapping by means of built-in sensor which
is built in the motor, and in the case of a machine tool of which the spindle
and the motor are linked by gear or belt, a deterioration of the accuracy of
screws may occur due to gear backlash or expansion of the belt.
[Backlash] [Expansion of belt]
Pulley
Built-in sensor
Built-in sensor
Gear Belt
Motor Motor
Pulley
When a backlash of 1 mm is produced on the circumference of the gear of ~100,

an error of rotation angle 1/(2~ x 100) x 360° = 0.573° will generate at the
bottom of the screws during rigid tapping.
6) When performing orientation by means of built-in sensor which is built in the
motor, and in the case of a machine tool of w~ich the spindle and the motor
are linked by gear or belt, it is impossible to execute orientation.
- 245 -
7) The built-in sensor which generates signals same as that of position coder
can be mounted in the motor. Numbers of pulses for models 1S - 3S are 512
p/rev, and for models 6S - 22S are 1024 p/rev.
Primary coil
w
Connection
QG
rF +5V
(3) Blue (2) Black (1) Red
*PA *PA +5v
ov ( 6) White/ (5) Green (4) White/
orange yel.J.ow
r------- PA Pulse *PB PB av
(8) White/
!I
generator (9) (7) Gray
*PA
brown vz
I
L--------' *VZ
PB
(12) (11) (10)
*PB OH2 ss OHl
vz
*VZ
ss
:OHl Connector
\
Over heat
signal
AMP universal type MATE-N-LOK
OH2 connector
,
FMU Motor side Cable side

FMV F an motor
Housing 350783-1 350735-1
FMW
Contact 350706-7 350689-6
Signals of pulse generator and over heat are connected to AMP connector.
Others are connected to terminals. AMP connector and contact are attached to
the motor.
- 246 -
8) Regarding the built-in sensor method spindle orientation
Item Specifications
No.
Built-in sensor type Type A (A860-0390-T002) Type B (A860-0390-T004)
1 Allowable maximum 10000 rpm 10000 rpm

revolution
2 Output of built-in A phase 1024 pulse/ A phase 512 pulse/

sensor signal revolution revolution
conversion circuit B phase 1024 pulse/ B phase 512 pulse/
revolution revolution
Z phase 1 pulse/ Z phase 1 pulse/
revolution revolution
3 Detecting unit 360°/4096 pulse 360°/2048 pulse

= 0.088°/pulse = 0.176° pulse
Repeated positioning
4
accuracy
-+0.2° -+0.4°
Note) However, element of error by machine's side
is excepted. Movement of 2 detecting units
may occur at the time of oriented position
stop by orientation.
- 247 -
VIII. OUTPUT CONVERSION CONTROL
1. GENERAL
Output conversion control conducts control of output characteristic conversion
in one motor (motor designed specifically for output conversion control) using
the FANUC AC spindle servo unit S series.
2. COMPONENTS AND ORDER DRAWING NUMBER
2.1 Components
The following items are needed in addition to the FANUC AC spindle servo unit S
series,
1) Output switching control circuit
2) Relay circuit (including electromagnetic contactor and drive relay)
3) Conversion signal f rom PMC
Configuration of the components is shown in the figure below.
Output conversion control circuit

Conversion signal
NC
p
M
I Relay
circuit
C
Detector
AC spindle seivo unit
The machine tool maker is required to provide the relay circuit and conversion
signal.
2.2 Order Drawing Number

1) AC spindle ' servo unit
Specified numbers vary with specifications
2) Output conversion control circuit
I A06B-6059-J703 I
- 251 -
3. SPECIFICATIONS
In order to conduct output conversion control, the AC spindle servo unit S
series, an output conversion control circuit and a relay circuit are required.
As specifications of the AC spindle servo unit used for output conversion
control varies with different motors, be sure to refer to the specification
manuals of each relevant AC spindle motor used for output conversion control.
* Precautions related to finishing when the output conversion control circuit is
provided with the AC spindle servo unit S series
1) The spindle conversion control circuit can not be added.
2) As the speed detecting signal (SDTl,2) is used for output conversion speed
detection, it cannot be used for gear conversion speed detection etc.
3) The spindle high/low speed signal (CTR) is used as a power cable conversion
completion signal, and therefore, can not be used as a signal for gear
selection status.
4) The spindle orientation circuit and speed gain conversion circuit can be
used even when the output conversion control circuit is included.
- 252 -
4. EXTERNAL DRAWING
For items other than those given below, refer to Chapter II of this
specification manual.
4.1 AC Spindle Servo Unit S Series (when an output switching control circuit is
mounted)
4.1.1 AC spindle servo unit models 6S - 12S (without unit adaptor)
300
200
a,
N
r--- V I
0 I
I
I
It iE / ~
I
I
0 POWER SELECTOR I
[
I
CONTROL P. C. B. I
I
I
I
I
I
0
0 0
I1,, ___
-- g
[
..,.
n
CT)
r--- N
a,
I CT)
0 ORIENTATION P.C. B. 0 [
4 01 TERMINAL SCREW
- o MS (7 POINTS)
0
'- - --
-- g
[
'- ~
"' I
1-
,_
a,
N
2 74
~--------------------------,
I
I
I
,.
'
V
'
- - - - t-
~ E:9e3e3E9E9e9e::J L--.. .J
'C
0
a,
6 I II 6
- 253 -
4 .1.2 AC spindle servo unit models 15S - 22S !without unit adaptor)
300 a,
N
i -
200 ~
/
~--- -------- ------- -- -- - - 77 r--
r-,....i: /.
0 c-:1:
POWER SELECTOR
CONTROL P . C.B.
Ji □-
----- - ---- - -- - ----- -------0
o __ _ ___ _ _ ____ __ _ __ _ __ ___ _ _
--- --
r--- -
I ~
I
I
I
I
I
ORlENTATiON P. C. B. o I [
I
0 0 I N
,n N
t- t- I
en
<D
I
I
-
I
I 'i?
L-- -
0
0 [
'
"
TERMI NAL SCREW

4-010 MB I 7 POINTS I
-
,c - -
0,
N
274
0
en
-6 -.·I
- 254 -
4.1.3 Outline drawing of the output conversion control circuit
r-
0
CN IO CN2M CN2S CNAM CNAS
18
u
0 I~ 0
lD r-')
( ]0
I ::
1£
0
CNO CN2C CNAC I
I
L_
265
-1_1
272 69
5. INSTALLATION
Refer to Chapter II of this description manual.
In addition, forced cooling is required for this AC spindle servo unit S series .
We will contact you separately about details related to cooling conditions .
- 255 -
?>
....?> C')
I»
0
2
C') 2
Relay circuit 0
::, m
C')
::,
-f
- - Output conversion
control circuit
Cl)
~
o·
0
z
l
CN J CND Electromagnetic contacto Single phase
conversion circuit ::,
AC200V
- - I I
S?.
I»
I I .,
tC
j l [ 1:1)
3
NC ::i
Power cable contactor <
and PC conversion circuit u 'C
Cl)
V
~
[ CN3
w
Tl
,,,--)OH
0 SM! TB u )
N
V,
CJ\
No fuse breaker l
- -0 LM I
TI
:bj Li
I IW motor
AC power supply;
- -0
R r'\
5 r---, J
three-phase 200-230V - - 0 0 0 S
J
0 -,
I
r-
L OT
i
R
Orientation
G t.?.....?..i
i1-ff
rr: :
T / '\ circuit ...:....+-a-I-,()
___G
___________,6G
-0 0 CNA
i : 6J L~_G-,-,-'
110 o: j
~--2- - - - - - - ' - ' _MC'' - '- G-6>-:: : :___,J

... Built-in sensor ...
si1,,'Tlal conversion
circuit
·· •
Items such as units and ca!bes other than the AC spindle servo unit, output conversion control circuit and AC spindle motor,
which arc surrounded by the unbroken line, must be provided by the machine tool builder.
Relay circuit 0
0
::I
::I
(!)
Output conversion
control circuit ~
CNl CND Elcctro~agn~tic. con tac tor
conversion cucu1t
1S ingle phase
AC200V
o·
::I
I I C
iii'
..
Ul
1
I»
3
::j
NC
and PC
Power cable contactor
conversion circuit U2 ,,<
(!)
V2 CJ
Cll3.
r.CC2
AC spindle servo unit Tl U2
OH ,,.--Cf-- -P-;-10 0 : V2
SHI TB
un O ! W2
l
N -{ )---1'-,I-;-!{ J
V,
1- - 1 AC spindle
8
--.J
-{ )·-_,.-+-+--;-< J motor
--N-~-~jeaker Tl • ............ ·
HCC!
AC power supply; S ,........_, R
three-phase 200-230~ ~. - ~ - - - - - . , --O ; I
.
Orientation circuit:
.
G
- - - - - - - - - - - - -- , I G
l......~!~····-···············l
CN2 ' ' ' 9

~-------r-U-L............................U Built-in sensor
l--'--
--i _ _ _ j
, .. j signal conversion j
i!
••••-••••••••• >.u♦oooouuo ••••••• ••••••••••••• ••••••o•u••• •• ~ •• j circuit i
Units and cable other than the AC spindle servo unit, output conversion control circuit and AC spindle motor, ... ~ -.---------.. ----.-......--__ l
which arc surrounded by the unbroken line, must be provided by the machine tool builder.
6.2 Connectors
For details related to connectors other than the below-described CND and CNl
used with the output conversion control circuit, refer to Chapter II of this
specification description manual.
1) CND specifications and signal layout drawing
14 CIIPI 01 SELi
08
15 CIIP2 02 SEL2
09
16 CFI NI 03 MCFI
ID
17 CFI N2 04 MCF2 Print board (PCB) connect or
II MR-20MA
18 05
12 PMC connector
19 06 MR-20LFH
13
20 ss 07
2 ) CNl s p ecifications and s ignal layout drawing
33 01 SAR I
34 02 SAR2
35 19 ARSTI 03 SSTI
36 20 ARST2 0.1 SST2
37 21 TLWII 05 TLYL
-
38 22 ORARI 06 OT
39 23 ORAR2 07 YRDYI
,10 2.1 CTll 08 MRDY2

·-
.11 ?-
-" ORCMI 09
TLM5
- -,_
.\2 26 ORCM2 10 TI.U6
43 26 OVR I 11 ALH I
~ ·- - Print board (PCB) connector
.i.i 28 OVR2 12 ALll2 MR-SORMA
45 srn 29 , 15V 13 OR PMC connector

MR-SOLF H
•16 SRV 30 J.\ OS
-
I
.\7 ESPI
I
31 DA2
I 15 SDTI
•18 ESPI 32 E 16 SDT2
•19 LMI 17 CTII (Connect Cr-IN 1)
50 SY! 18 OU (Connec t CFIN 2)
* Definition of numb e r s 17 and 18 are d i ffer e nt.
- 258 -
7. EXPLANATION OF INTERFACE SIGNAL
For deta ils about signals other than those described below, refer to Chapter II
of this specification description manual.
Also, re f er to section 7.2 and thereafter for details about connector CND which
is not described in this specification description manual and connector CNl
number 17 and 18 pins, whose signal definition is different.
7 .1 Input Signals
7 .1.1 Conversion demand signal (SEL1, 2)

This signal is input to change the characteristics of output .
The following are selected by opening and closing connections.
Open (OFF) - High-speed output characteristics (HIGH)

Closed (ON) - LOw-speed output characteristics (LOW)
PMC side Output conversion control circuit

(Receiver circuit)
CND
SELl - 01
SELZ - 02
OFF : HIGH
ON : LOW ov
7 .1.2 Power cable status confirmation signal (MCF1, 2)

This signal is input to confirm the se lect ion status of the electromagnetic
contactor used for spindle motor output conversion.
The following are selected by opening and closing connections.
For details, refer to the Chapter 9.
Open (OFF)- High-speed output characteristics (HIGH)

Closed (ON) · Low-speed output characteristics (LOW)
Relay circuit Ou tput conversion control circuit

(Receiver circuit)
CND
MCF l - 03
MCC contact
MCF2 - 04
OFF: HI GH
ON :LOW ov
- 259 -
7 .2 Output Signals
7 .2.1 Speed detection signal (SDT1, 21

This is used at the time of detecting converted speed when conducting output
conversion.
(OFF) - converted speed or higher
(ON) - converted speed or lower
24V 24V
AC spindle amp. Relay

CNl
- 15 SDTl
Contact capacity
30V
-16 SDT2 50mA
Photcou pier PMC side
7.2.2 Power cable conversion signal (CHP1, 21

The conversion demand signal (refer to section 7.1.1) to the output conversion
control circuit causes power supply to the motor to be switched OFF. Status of
this signal changes when the power is switched OFF. Therefore, conduct
conversion of the electromagnetic contactor to convert the power cables
following the order shown in signals (3), (4), (5) in "8. SEQUENCE". For
details, refer to the connecting example in the Chapter 9.
Select as follows using ON/OFF of this signal:
(OFF) - High-speed output
(ON) - Low-speed output
24V 24Y
Output conversion , - - -- - AC 200V
control circuit
CND
- 14 CHPl I
1 AC200V
Relay I ,
I I
: MCC
L _____ J
I
- 15 CHP2
Relay circuit Contact capacity
Photocoupler 30V
50mA
- 260 -
7.2.3 Conversion completion signal (CFIN1, 21
After the output conversion demand signal has been input, the power cable status
confirmation signal is input to confirm conformity of selection status, then
this signal is output when the initial setting of the spindle control circuit is
completed and the next action becomes possible.
By ON/OFF of this signal, the following selection statuses of the spindle are
displayed.
(OFF) - high-speed output (HIGH)
(ON) - low-speed output (LOW)
Output conversion
control circuit CND CN 1 AC spindle amp.
- 16 CFINl CTH - 17
Input CF!Nl, 2 to numbers 17 and

18 of the spindle control circuit's
CN 1 respectively.
- 17 CFIN2 OM - 18
Photocoupler
ov
- 261 -
8. SEQUENCE
8.1 Low-speed Output (LOW) - High-speed Output (HIGH)
1) Conversion demand ON ( LOW) OFF ( HIGH )

signal (SELl,2)
Refer to 7 . 1.1.
2) Power cable conversion ON ( LOW) OFF ( HIGH )

signal (CHPl,2)
Refer to 7. 2 . 2.
3) Electromagnetic ON ( LOW) OFF (HIGH )

contactor 1 (MCCl)
Output conversion
speed or less.
4) Elec t romagnetic OFF ( LOW ON (HIGH )

contactor 2 (MCC2)
Output conversion
speed or more.
5) Power cable status ON ( LOW ) OFF ( HIGH )

confirmation signal
(MCFl,2)
Refer to 7.1.2 .
6) Conversion completion
ON ( LOW ) OFF ( HIGH )
signal (CFINl,2)
Refer to 7. 2.3 .
7) Drive enable signal

ON OFF ON
- 262 -
8.2 High-speed Output (HIGH) - Low-speed Output (LOW)
1) Conversion demand
OFF ( HIGH ) ON ( LOW )
signal (SELl,2)
Refer to 7 .1.1.
2) Power cable conversion

signal (CHPl,2) OFF ( HIGH ) ON ( LOW )
Refer to 7.2.2.
3) Electromagnetic
OFF ( HIGH ) ON ( LOW)
contactor 1 (MCCl)
Output conversion
speed or less.
4) Electromagnetic
contactor 2 (MCC2) ON ( HIGH ) OFF ( LOW)
Output conversion
speed or more.
5) Power cable status

confirmation signal OFF ( HIGH ) ON ( LOW )
(MCFl,2)
Refer to 7.1.2.
6) Conversion completion
signal (CFINl,2) OFF ( HIGH ) ON ( LOW )
Refer to 7.2.3.
7) Drive enable signal ON OFF ON
Warning) When converting from high-speed output to low-speed output, conversion

demand exceeding conversion speed can not be input.
- 263 -
ID
Vl m
Electromagnetic contactor
~ts:
-f
Output switching n .,,
control circuit switching circ;::uc,.:it'-----------~ ~I""'
...---.CND-14 CHP I zm
C) n
no
-.,I -z
DV :oz
I
I nm
I
I
Sn
I -f -f
Relay
I
I
I
a
2
0V +24V I
I
I
+24 V stabilization I
I
'11
0
power source
_..I
I
::0
-f
:I:
m
CND - 04 MCF2 200 VAC
m
I""'
m
n
--------, -f
::0
0
RV
CND - 03 MCFl s:
)>
MCCl (For low speed) C)
z
m
-f
________ ..., c=s
n
0
2
,-- -----------, ~
n
AuxW.ry
D cont.act -f
0
Note 1: The above figure is an example coMcction for doing the switching operation with ::0
one driver and one receiver. MCC2 (For high speed)
Note 2: Refer to the connection diagram in item 6 for the connection between the main
contact terminal of the electromagnetic contactor and the power line.
Note 3: Connect a surge absorber to the operation coil on the electromagnetic contactor,
if necessary.
Note 4: AJ, a necessary condition for turning on the operation coil of the electromagnetic
contactors (MCCl and MCC2), you must install a circuit which prevents both coils
from simultaneously switching on, by connecting the B contact of the other coil.
10. PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO USE
1) Use an electromagnetic contactor for output conversion that has an adequate
capacity.
The example given below shows model ratings of Fuji Electric Co., Ltd,
Applicable Electromagnetic con-

kVA tactor model ratings
12 kVA SRCa3631-2
22 kVA SC-2S
26 kVA SC-3
32 kVA SC-4
37 kVA SC-4S
2) As a photocoupler is used for signal output, polarity exists. Take adequate

care in relation to polarity of the contact circuit.
3) Maximum voltage that can be applied to the photocoupler is 30 V, and maximum
current is 50 mA. Be sure to avoid exceeding these maximum values.
4) In order to suppress electrical noise generated at conversion in the
electromagnetic contactor for output conversion, use a surge absorber built
into the resistor-condensor.
5) When conducting rigid tapping, set the desired output characteristics in
advance and do not perform conversion.
Accordingly, when conducting rigid tapping, although the high-speed detection
signal will be output from the AC spindle servo unit, but be sure that this
signal is ignored and that the conversion demand signal is not transmitted to
the output conversion control circuit.
6) Setting the machine ready signal (MRDYl-2)
For the purpose of safety, two signals have be en included in the sequence to
operable status . These are the emergency stop signal (ESP 1, 2) and machine
ready s ignal (MRDYl-2).
In other words, close the machine ready (MRDYl-2) contact to allow operation
of the machine.
At this time, set parameter F-01 to "1".
7) Speed detection signal (SDTl,2) and selection signal (SELl,2)
Two coils are installed within the AC spindle motor. By switching these two
coils, output characteristics can be converted.
When conducting output conversion during rigid tapping, control may be
limited to the high-speed coil .
Ensure a sequence in the PMC that allows selection of 2 output characteris-
tics and enable selection of a conversion sequence during rotation.
- 265 -
IX. SPINDLE SWITCHING CONTROL CIRCUIT
1. OUTLINE
Main spindle selector control enables changing over between two spindle motors,
which are not driven simultaneously, with identical characteristics or with
different output characteristics.
In this control one AC spindle servo unit has to have a printed-circuit board
for main spindle selector control circuit and an electromagnetic contactor for
selecting power lines outside the servo unit.
1) In turning centers, the main spindle motor for main turning and the
subspindle motor fo r rotary tool are used by changing over the signal lines
for power lines and velocity feedback and the orientation signal lines with
one spindle unit.
2) In five-surface working machines, the vertical spindle motor and the
horizontal spindle motor are used by changing over the power lines and
velocity feedback signal lines and the orientation signal line with one
spindle unit,
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION
2.1 Configuration
For the control of 2 motors by a single servo unit the following items are
required in addition to the AC spindle motor and AC spindle servo unit.
1) Spindle selector control circuit (Option)
2) Power lines selector relay circuits (including electromagnetic contac tor s and
drive relay)
3) Selection signal from power magnetic sequence
The system configuration is shown below.
Mnin spindle motor
Spindle selector Relay circuit

control circuit
p
·2::, M Selector signal
u C
:z
Optional
circuit
Sub spindle motor

- 269 -
2.2 Order Specification
1) AC spindle servo unit
A06B-6059-Hcx:ot/H7CD
Main spindle motor

--r
Appoint ment varies according to
unit number main/sub combinati on
SUB SUB
Ml . 5S M2S Ml 2S Ml SS M2S
8000 8000 6000 6000 8000
MAIN MAIN
M22S M22P
6000 H737 6000 rpm H763
(AMP: 15S)
Ml8S Ml8P
6000 H728 6000 rpm H757
(AMP:12S)
MI SS MlSP
6000 H720 H725 6000 rpm H753
(AMP : 8S)
Ml2S Ml2P
H711 H712 H713 6000 rpm H749
6000
(AMP: 6S)
M8S
H705 H706 H707
6000
M6S
H700 H701 H702
6000
(*1) It is impossible to specify the shaded area i n the table above or combina-
t ions which are not found in it.
2) Spindl e selector control ci r cuit

A06B-6059-J70 1 (Without orientation signa l line selection)
A06B- 6059-J702 (With orientation s i gnal line selecti on )
The above is selec t ed according to whether the orientation circuit is u sed.
- 270 -
3. SPECIFICATIONS
When spindle selection control is required the AC spindle servo unit S series
will need a spindle selector control circuit and, externally, a relay circuit.
The spindle selector control circuit fulfills the following functions,
1) Transfer of motor selector demand and completion signals
2) Transmission of motor power line selector signals
3) Selector of velocity feedback signal lines
4) Selector of orientation signal lines
(That both for Magnetic Sensor and for Position Coder can be changed over.)
5) Protection and malfunction detector functions
(D In the case of changing over a power line status confirmation signal
while the AC spindle motor is in operation that is treated as a
malfunction, the alarm operates and the power supply from the AC spindle
servo unit to the AC spindle motor is instantly cut off.
@ Whether the selected spindle motors and control circuits are the
correct combinations is constantly checked by the power line
confirmation status signal and the alarm operates in the case of any
malfunctions.
Even where a spindle selector circuit is already fitted, the spindle
orientation circuit and velocity gain selector circuit may still be used.
- 271 -
4. OUTER DIMENSIONS
4.1 Spindle Switching Control Circuit
CN I 0 CN2M CN2S CNAM CNAS 0

~
up..
'-
0
0 "'
i:: 0
l!"l
..... "0
C
ct)
.....
e"'0 "
u
CND CN2C CNAC 0
265
2 72 69
- 272 -
5. CONNECTIONS
5.1 Connections
The spindle selector circuit is installed in the AC spindle servo unit.
..··· ····· ········· ········ ······· ·-···- ······ --· ··············· ·· ········· ···· ······ ···· ..·
~-~
Power line selector signal/Power line status check signal Relay

~-------------------;,i; circuit
Velocity feedback signal line
Orientation signal line
MAIN SUB MAIN SUB.--- - - -,
CN2M CN2S CNAM CNAS

Selector demand signal/ SPINDLE MOTOR
Selector completion signal
CND CN2C CNAC
MA IN ._
Signal selector
control circuit
(option) y
1 ·········"····i
SENSOR
AC Spindle Servo Unit S Series
p
M t - - -- - --, CN2M CN2S CNAM CNAS
C SUB
Orientation circuit (option)
CNA
CNl LJ
'~ CN2 SENSOR
'
I y
············
. .
: Spindle control : Power line and fan motor line
: signal . .
·········-·--···························· ·················
No te) The power lines, cables, relay circuits and electromagnetic con tac tors
inside the dotted lines should be provided by the machine tool builder
themselves.
- 273 -
5.2 Signal Distribution
1) CN2M, CN2S (Veloci ty feedback s i gnal)
14 PA 01 ov
08
15 RA 02 OH2
09
16 PB 03 OHl
10
17 RB 04
11
18 05
12
19 06
13 5V
20 ss 07
2) CNAM, CNAS (Orienta tion s i gnal)
14 MSA(SC) 01 (OH)
08
15 MSB(*SC) 02 (OH)
09
16 LSA(PA) 03 ( OH)
10
17 LSB(*PA) 04 (SH)
11
18 +lSV(PB) 05 (SH)
12
19 OV(*PB) 06 (SR)
13
20 OG(OG) 07
Signal name : using magnetic sensor (for posi tion encoder)
3) CND (Sel ector signal )
14 CHPl 01 SELl
08
15 CHP2 02 SEL2
09
16 CFIN l 03 MCFl
10 PCB connec t or MR-20RMA
17 CFIN2 04 MCF2
11 PMC connec tor MR- 20LFH
18 05
12
19 06
13
20 ss 07
- 274 -
6. INTERFACE
For signals other than those detailed below please refer to II AC Spindle Servo
Unit S series.
6.1 Input Signal
6.1.1 Selector demand signals (SEL1, 21

These signals are inputted in order to select the spindle required.
The main spindle and subspindle can be selected by opening (OFF) or closing (ON)
the contact respectively.
Please input these signals after the spindle motor has been stopped .
The velocity O signal is used to confirm that the motor has stopped.
PMC Spindle selector control circuit

(Receiver circuit)
CND
SHLl -01
_______se_L2-<l -02
OPP:MAIN l
ON :SUB I I ov
6.1.2 Power line status confirmation signals (MCF1, 21
Input s ignal to check selector status of electromagnetic contactor for spindle
motor power line selection.
This contact pe rmits the following signal selectors.
OFF: Main spindle
ON: Subspindle
Spindle selector control

Relay circuit circuit (Receiver circuit)
CND
MCFl -03
J
Mee""'"'
OPP:MAIN
Ll~_ _ ____ ----il Mc_F_2 -04
l
ON :SUB I I ov
- 275 -
,
6.2 Output Signals
6.2.1 Power line selector signal (CHP1, 2)

When the selector demand signal (see Section 6.1.1) is received, the motor is
stopped, the power supply to the motor is switched off and this signal status
changes.
This signal should be used to switch the electromagnetic contactor for power
line selection with external relay for power.
Select this signal on and off to make the following selections.
OFF: Main spindle
ON: Subspindle
24V 24V
Spindle selector
control circuit
.----- - - AC200V
CND
-14 CHPl
Roi,~ AC200V
MCC :
Contact capacity .. . .. . .... ........
30 V
50 mA
-15 CHP2
Relay circuit
Photocouplc
ov
As a photocouple is used fo r this output signal, please apply an external relay
for 24 VDC, and take care a polarity of CHPl.
6.2.2 Selector completion signal (CFIN1, 2)

This is output signal when the spindle selector demand signal has been inputted
and, the power line status confirmation signal input, the selection status
checked and confirmed their identity, and the initial setting of the spindle
control circuit completed.
The signal indicates that the subsequent operation is now possible.
Select this signal on and off to make the following s election.
OFF: Main spindle
ON: Subspindle
24V 24V
Spindle selector
control circuit
PMC
CND Relay
-16 CPINI
Contact capacity
30 V
50 mA
-17 CPINZ
Photocouple -:::L
I av
As a photocouple is used for this output signal, please apply an e xternal relay
for 24 VDC, and tak e care a polarity of CFINl.
- 276 -
7. SEQUENCE
Control operations should be carried out in the following sequence.
Spindle forward/reverse rotation SPR

command signal SFR/SRV ON OPP ON OPF ON
Spindle motor velocity
Velocity zero signal (SSTl, 2)

ON OFF ON
Selector demand signal SUB

(input signal) (SELl, 2)
Sec 6.1.1 MAIN (ON) MAIN
COPF) (OPP)
Power line selector signal SUB

(output signal) (CHPl, 2)
See 6.2.1 MAIN (ON) MAIN
(OPF) (OPP)
Power line status confirmation signal

(input signal) (MCFl, 2)
SUB
See 6.1.2 MAIN (ON) MAIN
(OFF) (OPP)
Selector completion signal I SUB

(output signal) (CF!Nl, 2)
Sec 6.2.2
M
AIN (ON) MAIN
(OFF) (OPP)
H
Approx. 0.5 secs. Approx. 0.5 secs.
- 277 -
8. IMPORTANT POINTS FOR USING SPINDLE SELECTION CONTROL
I) The rating of the electromagnetic contactor for power line selector should be
chosen according to the spindle motor.
The electromagnetic con tac tors given as examples below are made by Fuji
Denki.
Motor Electromagnetic contactor
Models IS, 1.5S, 2S SRC3631-5-2
Models 3S, 6S SRCa3631-2
Models 8S, 12S SC-2S
Model 15S SC-3
Model 18S SC-4
Model 22S SC-4S
2) As a photocouple is used for this output signal the connections must be made
the correct direction. Take careful account of the circuit polarity.
3) The maximum voltage for the photocouple is 30 V, with a maximum current of 50
mA. The voltage and current should be restricted to ensure that they do not
exceed these figures .
4) Electrical noise from the electromagnetic contactor for power line selector
should be suppressed by fit ting an S2-A or similar surge absorber with a
resistance and condenser.
5) Main spindle No. 1 and main spindle No. 2 may have different speed meter
voltages and load meter voltages. In that case, the speed meter and load
meter should be made selectable using a circuit such as the one shown below.
SMl
(Ull )
AC spindle servo unit speed and

load meter voltages Speed meter Speed meter
or or
load meter load meter
OM
For main spindle No. 1 For main spindle No. 2
6) Setting for parameter F-01 (Machine ready signal MRDY used/not used)
Parameter F-01 should normally be set to "l".
If parameter F-01 is set to "0", MRDYl and MRDY2 are connected together (pin
7 and pin 8 of connector CNl).
7) Even after switching is complete, the motor does not operate for about two
seconds (in case of models 6S - 12S) or four seconds (in case of model 15S).
8) When the position coder signal is switched, a wire breakage alarm is issued.
Reset it when switching is complete.
- 278 -
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
The cable specifications are as shown below.

Prepare cables by the MTB. ·
1) Power line and motive power line for respective motor models
FANUC
Applications Symbol Specifications specification
Amp side Motor side (Cable assembly)
Model Kl Cabtyre cable

1S K2 JIS C3312, 4 cores
(Lower than
5 kVA) 37/0.26
(2.0mm')
Crimp style Crimp style
terminals terminals
T2-4 T2-5
Model Kl
Cabtyre calbe
1. 5S, K2 JISC3312,4 cores
2S,
1S/15000, 45/0.32
2S/15000 (3.5mm1 )
Crimp style
(Lower than terminals
Crimp style
terminals
7 kVA) TS.5-4 T55-5
Model Kl Cabtyrc cable

3S K2 JIS C33l2, 4 cores
(Lower than
12 kVA)
70/0.32
(5.5mm') pt6.5
Crimp style Crimp style
terminals terminals
T5.5-4 T5.5-5
Model Kl Cabtyrc cable

6S, K2 JIS C3312, 4 conductors
3S/12000,
SP, 12P
50/0.45
(Lower than (8mm 1 ) ~20
Crimp style
16 kVA) terminals
Crimp style
terminals
8-5 8-5
Model Kl
Cnbtyre cable ns C 3312, 4 cores
8S, 12S, K2
6S/12000,
8S/8000 ,
12S/8000, 88/ 0A 5
rp 2 4. 0
15P, 18P, ( 14.0mmz )
8VH Crimp style terminals Crimp style terminals
(Lower than 14-5 14-5
25 kVA)
- 281 -
FANUC
Applications Symbol Specifications specification
Am side Motor side (Cable assembly)
Model Kl Heat resisting vinyl cable (Note)
15S, K2
15S/8000,
22P , 12VH
(Lower than
30 kVA)
Crimp style terminals 8 8/ 0.4 5 Crimp style terminals
14-8 ( 14mm 2 ) Rl4-5
Model Kl
18S, 22S , K2 Heat resisting vinyl cable (Note)
lBS/6000,
22S/600 0,
30P, 40P,
50P
(Lower than
45 kVA) Crimp style terminals 7 / 2 0/ 0.4 5 Crimp style terminals
22-8 ( 22mm 2 ) 22-8
Note) Use flame retardant poli-flex cables (MLFC) with a maximum conductor
temperature of 105 °C .
2) Common cables
The following cables are common for each model.
FANUC Spec.
Purpose Symbol General specification DWG . No.
(Cable assembly)
Motor K3 A06B-6044-K204
Vinyl cabtyrc cable JIS C 3312, 3 cores
cooling fan 7 m
Conductor: 37/0.26 (2 mm')
Shea th: PVC <t>l 0
T2 - 4 ¢10.0 T2-4
Crimp style terminals Crimp style terminals
Spindle servo unit Connector attached to

Spindle K4 connector (basic) spindle motor A06B-6044-K200
servo unit 10,;, or less 7 m
I CN2
AC spindle 4 pairs of
motor (for shielded cable Housing
symbo l s) 350720-1
Contact
MR-20LFH PVC sheath . 350689-6
made by Conductor with
HONDA • braided shield
TSUSHJN
0.3 mm2
- 282 -
FANUC Spec .
(Cable assembly)
Spindle KS Power A02B- 6044- K023

Spindle servo unit
servo unit connector (basic) cpl 2.5 cabinet 7 m
I
Power cabinet
(for signals)
CNIDt========::::!==~~
MR·50LFH made by Vinyl cable with braided
HONDA TSUSHIN shield 50 cores X 0.2 mm'
(7 /0.18) made by
SANYO DENKO
Spindl e K6 A06B-6044- K024

servo unit Spindle servo unit 7 m
I connector (basic) 10¢ or less
Power cabinet
(for signals) CN3 o i - - - - - - . - - - j- ~
MR-20LMH made by 0.3 mm 2
HONDA TSUSHIN
Speedometer K7 A06B- 6044- K201

Vinyl cabtyre cable JIS C 3312, 3 cores
Dynamometer 7 m
I
Spindle
servo unit I
(for 3 0 / 0. 1 8 c/>9.2
Crimp style ( 0. 7 5 mm 2 ) Crimp style terminals
measuring terminals Tl - 4
instruments) Tl-4
3) Other (cable materials used for some models)
FANUC Spec .
(Cable assembly)
Resistor KB A06B- 6052- K200

unit Vinyl cabtyre cable JIS C 3312, 2 cores 7 m
I
Spindle l
~ r
servo unit I
(models ¢12.0
lS - 3S) Crimp sty le terminals 4 5/ 0.3 2 Crimp style terminals
T:i.5-tJ ( 3.5mm2 ) T5.5 - tJ
- 283 -
FANUC Spec .
Purpose Symbol General specification DWG. No.
(Cable assembly)
Resistor K9 A06B- 6052-K203
unit Vinyl cabtyre cable JIS C 3312, 2 cores 7 m
I
Power I
circuit (for "' L
thermostat) Crimp
I
30/ 0.18 </,8.8 Crimp
(models style terminals ( 0.75mm 2 ) style terminals
lS - JS) Tl - 4 Tl-4
4) Cables for spindle orientation

a) For pos i tion coder
FANUC Spec .
Purpose Symbol General specification DWG . No .
(Cable assembly)
Cannon straight type
Spindle KlO MR-20LFH A06B-6041- K201
MS3106B20 - 29S
servo unit MS3057-12A 7 m
Position
coder 6 Cabtyre cable
Ten pairs, shielded together
0.2rrin,2 ( 7/ 0.1 8 )
Cannon angle type

Spindle KlO MR-20LFH MS3108B20-29 S A06B-6041- K204
servo unit MS3057-12A
7 m
Position
coder
Cabtyre cable
0.2mm2 ( 7/ 0.18 )
Spindle servo unit side
Spindle Kll A06B- 6041-K202
servo unit MR - 20LFH NCor 7 m
MR - 20LFH
NC or
position
coder
Cabtyre cable
0.2mm2 ( 7/ 0.1 8 )
- 284 -
FANUC Spec.
(Cable assembl )
Spindle servo unit side
Spindle K12 A06B-6041-K205
servo unit Power cabinet side The shielded
MR-20LMH MR-20LFH
I cable is
Power connected to
cabinet the pin No. 14
of the
~btyre cable connector on
Ten pairs, shielded together the power
0.2mm 2 ( 7/ 0.18 ) cabinet side.
b) For magnetic sensor
FANUC Spec .
(Cable assembly)
Connector
Connector attached lo A06B-6041-K203
Spindle K13 attached to amplified
servo unit option q,13 or less part 7 m
I I
Magnetic
sensor D
MR-20LFH made by
HONDA TSUSHIN
t
3 pairs of cable with
seal braided shield
[]
RVC sheath 0.5mm2
<Reference cables>
•
Details of cable specifications
Electric char-
Conductor
act eris t ics
Sheath
Finished Con- Allow-
Name thick- Designation*
Configu- OD ductor able
Diameter ness
ration resis- cur-
tance rent
Cable A
llOQ/
(10 ~H .05 mm 7/0 . 18 1.4 mm 610 . 0 mm 1.6 A A66L-0001-0041
km
pairs)
Cable B
106Q/
(50 61.05 mm 7/0.18 1 . 5 mm 612.5 mm 1.6 A A66L-0001-0042
km
pairs)
Cable C
45/0.12 38. ?Q/
(3 60 . 93 mm 1.0 mm 610.8 mm km 1.6 A A66L-0001-0108
pairs)
* Length is de signated separately .
- 285 -
APPENDIX 2 TECHNICAL DATA
2.1 How to Obtain Load Inertia Reflected to Motor Shaft

To obtain the load inertia reflected to motor shaft when the spindle holds the
maximum tool or maximum work, full the procedure described below.
Spindle speed change gear stage Inertia reflected to motor shaft
High JH kg.cm.s 2
Low JL kg.cm.s 2
Select the load inertia reflected to motor shaft so that it is less than 3 times
the inertia of the spindle motor employed.
As the load inertia is larger, the acceleration/deceleration time becomes
longer.
1) Calculation method of load inertia reflected to motor shaft (Example)
Workpiece
or tool
Jw
j NL : Max. revolutions at Low

l NH : Max. revolutions at High
SPINDLE
MOTOR
Nm
Nm Maximum speed of motor (rpm)

NL Maximum speed when speed change gear stage is low (rpm)
NH Maximum speed when speed change gear stage is high (rpm)
Ra Speed ratio between speed change stages NH/N
GL Ratio of motor revolutions to revolutions w~en speed change gear stage
is low N /NM
GH Ratio of motor revolutions to revolutions when speed change gear stage
is high N /N
Jl Inertia o~ s~aft directly coupled to motor (kg.cm.s 2 )
J11= Inertia of gear or pulley when the motor side speed change gear stage is
low (kg/ cm. s 2 )
J lH: Inertia of gear or pulley when the motor side speed change gear stage is
high (kg/cm.s 2 )
J2L: Inertia of gear or pulley when the spindle side speed change gear stage
is low (kg/cm.s 2 )
J2H: Inertia of gear or pulley when the spindle side speed change gear stage
is high (kg/cm.s 2 )
JB Inertia of spindle (kg.cm.s 2 )
Jw Inertia of work (kg .cm. s 2 )
- 286 -
CD Calculation formulas when low and high speed change gear stages are
switched by clutch
2
Inertia ref ected to motor shaft when the speed change gear stage is low .
J (kg.cm . s)
1
Inertia reflected to motor shaft when the speed change gear stage i s
2
high. JH (kg.crn.s)
2 2
JH = Jl + Ra x JlL + JlH + GH (J2L + J2R + JB + Jw) ... . ..•..... (l - 2 )
@ Calculation formula when low and high speed change gear stages are
swit ched by gear shift.
JL
G 2
Jl + JlL + JlH + L (JlL + J2L + JB + Jw) ..... ............. (1 -3 )
JH
G 2
Jl + JlL + JlH + H (J2L + J2H + JB + Jw) .... .............. (1-4)
The calculation formulas of respective inertia are given below,

CD Inertia of cylindrical body
L (cm)
The inertia produced when a cylindrical body rotates around its center
shaft is calculated by the following formula . Calculate ball screws,
gears, etc. by approximating this f ormula for cylindrical body .
~y 4 2
J = 32 x 980 D L (kg.cm. s ) . . . . . . . . . . . •. . . . . . . . . . . . . . •. •. . . •. . . . (1- 5)
This can be approximated in case of steel (y = 7 . 8 x 10-3 kg/cm3 ) as

follows .
-6 4
J = 0.78 x 10 D L (kg.crn.s 2 ) (1- 6)
where, J: Inertia (kg.crn.s 2 )

y: Weight per unit volume (kg/cm3 )
D: Diameter of cylindrical body (cm)
L: Length of cylindrical body (cm)
- 287 -
@ Inertia of cylindrical body having a deviated rotation center
2
J = JO + 9~O R (kg. cm. s 2 ) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ( 1-7)
where, J : Inertia around the center of cylindrical body (kg.cm.s 2 )

0
M: Weight of cylindrical body (kg)
R: Rotation radius (cm)
The above formula applies to calculations of the inertia of large

diameter gears when lightening holes were made for reducing their weight .
Cl) Inertia of tapered cylindrical body
L (cm)
(cm)
J = ,ry X
x L (kg. cm. s 2 ) (1-8)
10 X 980
- 288 -
2.2 Load Torque
The friction torque of bearings and viscosity torque of lubrication oil inside
the spindle act as the load to~que.
Tl= Tc+ Tv (kg.cm)
where, Tc: Friction torque

Tv: Viscosity torque
Be careful since the viscosity torque of lubrication oil largely affects the
machine when the spindle rotates at high speed.
Abnormal
TL Load torque _..,~ Normal

--
Spindle revolutions
- 289 -
2.3 Spindle Speed Change Gear Stage
The spindle gear speed change stages are determined according to the specified
output of the spindle.
Output drop start point
Output valley
Output Area where the

output drops
Maximum revolutions Maximum revolutions

at low stage at high stage
Spindle revolutions
To eliminate the output valley, the ratio of high to low stages of spindle is
generally set as follows.
Max. revolutions at low stage Basic speed of motor 1 1

Max. revolutions at high stage Max . speed of motor 3 to 4
Since the revolutions lower than the output drop start point of low gears cause
the cutting power of machine to decrease, the revolutions must be specified
clearly.
- 290 -
2.4 How to Find the Acceleration Time
Find the spindle acceleration time in the following manner.
1) Calculate the load inertia for the motor shaft.
2) Find the value required for calculation based on the spindle motor
characteristic table.
3) Find the acceleration time according to the calculation expression.
1) Motor shaft conversion load inertia (JL) 2

According to para. 1 above, find the load inertia. When GD (kg.m2 ) is
found, convert the unit system according to the following equation.
2
GD (kg.m2 )
(4-1)
4g (m/s 2 )
Therefore, 1 kg.m2 = 0.0255 kg.m.s 2
2) Spindle motor characteristic table
Output
Output
Torque
Pf
Tm
Pm
0 Nb Nf Nm
Speed rpm N
The following relation exists among output P, torque T and speed rpm N.
P (kW)= 1.0269 x N x T/1000 (4- 2)
- 291 -
Characteristics of each model at 30-minute rating output
Model Jm 2 Tm Nb Nf Nm Pf Pm
kg.m.s kg.m rpm rpm rpm w w
1S 0.0003 o. 71 3000 - 8000 - 2200
1.5S 0.0004 2.40 1500 6000 8000 3700 2500
2S 0.0008 2.40 1500 6000 8000 3700 2500
3S 0.0015 3.57 1500 4500 6000 5500 3700
6S 0.0022 4.87 1500 4500 6000 7500 5500
8S 0.0028 7.14 1500 - 6000 - 11000
12S 0.0093 9.74 1500 4500 6000 15000 11000
15S 0.0093 12.01 1500 4500 6000 18500 15000
18S 0.0129 14.28 1500 - 4500 - 22000
22S 0.0129 16.88 1500 - 4500 - 26000
3) Calculation of acceleration time - 1
Acceleration curve
Nm ------------------~-=-~-------
Nf
Nb
Time
- 292 -
Acceleration time
- Speed Oto Nb (rpm)
3
1 + Jm 2,rNb (4-3)
t
1
= Tm x """"6o (sec)
- Speed Nb to Nf
(Nf 2 - Nb 2 )
(4-4)
x 2Nb (sec)
- Speed Nf to Nm
2,r (Nm - Nf) 2

t3 = 1.0269 x (JL + Jm) x 60 x (Pf_ Pm)2
x {- (Pf - Pm) + (P~~= =:;~f) x Ln j:!I) (4-5)
where, L: Natural logarithm

n
Acceleration time ta
ta= t
1
+ t 2 + t 3 (sec) .•.•.•.....••.•.•...................•...•..•.. (4-6)
By controlling the deceleration time to nearly the same time as the

acceleration time, the elongation of the tap during tapping processing can be
reduced.
4) Calculation of acceleration time - 2

The acceleration time at the rated torque is shown below. The mechanical
load torque is ignored.
Nm~x
Acceleration time
1a = 11a + 12a
t 2d t 1d Deceleration time
td td= t2d+ t1 d
Acceleration time
- Speed Oto Nb
JL + Jm x 2,r dN
Tm 60
JL + Jm 2,rNb
Tm x """"6o (4-7)
- 293 -
- Speed Nb to Nmax
Nmax J +
1 Jm x Z7T dN
t2 (sec) =f Nb
Nb
- x Tm
60
N
1
1 + Jm 27T 1 2 2
(4-8)
Tm x 60 x ZNb (N max - Nb)
- Speed Oto Nmax
1
ta (sec)
1 + Jm 27T
Tm x 60
N 2 max - Nb 2 )
+ 2Nb (4-9)
Generally Nb/Nmax = 1/3. Substituting this formula becomes:
1
1 + Jm 27T 5
ta (sec) Tm x 60 x 3 x Nmax (4-10)
where, J : Load inertia converted into motor shaft (kg.m.s 2 )

1
Jm: Rotor inertia of DC motor (kg . m.s 2 )
Tm: Maximum torque (kg.m)
- 294 -
2.5 Calculation of Time Constant for Rigid Tapping
Calculation flowchart
1) Rigid tapping specification check
2) Spindle motor specification check
3) Calculation of time constant
1) Rigid tapping specification check

(D Define the range of the machine's screw cutting capability:
M) - MO)
(Example) M3 - M27
Motor spindle conversion load inertia of main spindle:

JL[kg•cm•s 2 J=
Rotor inertia of spindle motor:
Jm[kg•cm•s 2 J=
Velocity ratio of main spindle to motor spindle (1/gear ratio):
Check the number of teeth on each spindle's gears.
Gearing ratio of main spindle to position coder:
Check 1:1, 1:2 and so on.
<Reference>
I Waveform I
There are two types of the v elocity waveform as shown in Fig . l and Fig . 2,
but the revolutions of the main spindle should be reduced for rigid tap
machining in order to produce the waveform in Fig. 2 where there is, for
example, gear coupling backlash between the main spindle and the motor and
where the screw requires a high degree of machining accuracy.
Velocity Velocity
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Reason: At the pinnacle of the triangular waveform in Fig . l the main

spindle velocity following deteriorates and screw machining accuracy
is lo st.
- 295 -
2) Spindle motor specification check
The following three points should be checked in advance.
Q) The model name and output specifications of the AC spindle which you are
going to use.
@ The appropriate number of revolutions for the AC spindle motor during the
rigid tapping operation.
Number of spindle 1 Number of revolutions

motor revolutions = _(_d_e_c_e_l_e_r_a_t_i_o_n_r_a_t_i_o_a_) x of spindle
G) The calculation, as described in the specification manual, of the 30

minute rated torque at maximum revolution velocity using the AC spindle
motor's velocity curve.
T. ___ 30 minute rated torque

Torque Tr = k, Tr + Cl - kr )Tr
t t
Required torque Required torque
for acceleration for cutting
Kr is assumed to be equal to O.75
...... Acceleration torque
Velocity
The following time constant calculations were made on the assumption that
the 30 minute rated torque is equal to the sum of the required torque for
acceleration up to NrMmax number of revolutions and the required torque
for cutting.
<Note>
Machines with the rigid tapping function must have a small motor spindle
conversion load inertia in order to minimize the acceleration time .
3) Calculation of time constant

a) For the FANUC Series 0-MB (0417 Series)
When the number of revolutions for machining NrMmax has been determined
for an AC spindle motor used for the rigid tapping operation, read the 30
minute rated output torque Tr [kg•m] from the motor's torque velocity
curve.
When only the 30 minute rated output Pr [kW] is known, use the following
formula to calculate the torque Tr [kg•m].
Pr x 1000
Tr 1.0269 x NrMmax [kg•m] · · • · • · · · (1)
- 296 -
The acceleration time tr from 0 to NrMmax during linear acceleration and
deceleration is calculated using the following formula .
JL + JM 2,rN rMmax 1
t r = -- -- X X 100 • • • • • (2)
kr x Tr 60
Where
JL: motor spindle conversion load inertia [kg•cm•s 2 ]
JM: motor rotor inertia [kg•cm•s 2 ]
kr : acceleration torque safety coeffic i ent for linear acceleration and
deceleration (kr = 0.75)
N,Mmax
H.
Formulas (1) and (2) above can be used to calculate the time constant tr
up to the NrMmax number of revolutions.
When a time constant setting is chosen for the FANUC Series 0-MB
[0417 Series] (by setting bit 6 of Parameter No. 37 to 1), the time
constant changes at a constant rate, decreasing in proportion to the
number of main spindle revolutions.
Number of spindle
revolutions
N,1,1max
Nm
Time
(Example 1)
For the FANUC Series 0-MB (0417 Series)
The time constant tr for rigid tapping using the AC Spindle Motor model 3S
(JM = 0.15 kg•cm•s 2 ) at 3000 rpm can be cal culated as follows.
Where
JL (motor spindle conversion load inertia)= 0 . 1 kg•cm•s 2
Tr = 5.5 X 1000
1 . 0269 X 3000 = 1.78 [kg•m]
0.15 + 0.1 2,r X 3000 1

tr = X X
kr X Tr 60 100
= 0,588 [sec]
The time constant should be set the value in ex cess of 588 ms.
- 297 -
b) For the FANUC Series 0-MB (0415, 0416 Series)
For these series the time constant refers to the time required for the Z
axis to reach the limit velocity of the cutting feed [Example: 4 m/min].
This time constant can be f ound as follows.
Find the Z axis cutting feed velocity fm from the number of main spindle
revolutions Nm (rpm) and the screw pitch p.
fm = p x Nm (mm/min) (1)
Z axis feed velocity
t. T. Time
The Z axis cutting feed limit velocity fmax and the time ta required to
reach that velocity stand for the following formulas.
fmax
Ta = frn x ta •.••••••••.•••••..•.•••.••••••••.• •••• .• (2)
Where the number of main spindle revolutions is NM, the number of motor
revolutions is Nm and the deceleration ratio is a, the following
relationship holds
Nm = NM/a ... ..........•........ •.... ......••• . ..•..•.. (3)
Linear acceleration time Nm can be calculated using the following formula.
JM + JL 2,r Nm 1
ta = kr x Tr x ~ x 100 (sec) •.••...•...•.......•.. (4)
The time Ta taken to attain the Z axis cutting feed limit velocity can now
be calculated by using the above formulas (2), (3) and (4) as follows.
fmax
Ta X ta
fm
= fm
fmax
X
JM + JL X
2,r NM/a
X
1
(sec) .... ... ...... (5)
kr X Tr 60 100
(Differences between these series and the 0417 Series)

(D The time constant setting is made fmax/fm times as large.
@ The time cons tant does not change at a constant rate. It is defi nite
whatever revolution velocity is reached.
- 298 -
(Example 2)
For the FANUC Series 0-MB (0415, 0416 Series)
The time constant tr for M3 rigid tapping using the AC spindle motor model
3S (JM = 0.15 kg•cm•s 2) at a main spindle velocity of 3000 rpm can be
calculated as follows .
The maximum cutting feed velocity is 4 m/min.
Where
JL (motor spindle conversion load inertia)= 0.1 kg •cm• s 2
The M3 screw pitch is 0.5 mm, so the cutting feed velocity is
fm - 0.5 x 3000 = 1500 mm/min
The acceleration time up to a main spindle velocity of 3000 rpm (where the
deceleration ratio a= 1 and the number of motor revolutions= 3000 rpm)
can be calculated as follows.
5.5 X 1000
Tr= 1.0269 x 3000 = 1 · 78 [kg•m]
0.15 + 0.1 21T X 3000 1

tr X
100
kr x Tr 60 X
0.588 [sec]
The time constant for the Z axis cutting feed is as follows.
4000
Ta= x 0.588 = 1.57 sec
1500
In this case the time constant appropriate for the number of main spindle
revolutions is as follows.
Number of revolutions
N,Mmax
Nm
Time
- 299 -
c) For the FANUC Series 10M/11M/12M/15M
In order to reduce machining time the attainment of the appropriate number
of main spindle revolutions in three stages with their own time constant
has been made possible.
The number of motor revolutions Nm is found from the deceleration ratio a
and the number of main spindle revolutions NM . The 30 minute rated torque
at each number of revolutions is found from the motor torque revolution
characteristics and the time constant are calculated .
Torque
Tb
Nb Nra N,wmax Number of motor

revolutions
TCl
JL + JM 2rrNb 1
(1)
= kr x Tb x """"w x 100 • • · · • • • • • · • · • · · · • · · • · · · • · · • ·
TC2
JL + JM 2rrNra l (2)
kr x T r a x ~ x 100
TC3 = JL + JM 2rrN rMmax 1

kr x Trb x 60 X 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( 3)
Number of main spindle revolutions in three stages with their respective

time constants
Number of spindle
revolutions
TCl TC2 TC3
Fig. 4-(21
(Example 3)
Using the AC spindle motor model 3S where Sl = 1500 rpm, S2 = 2500 rpm and
S3 = 3500 rpm, TCl, TC2 and TC3 are as follows.
TCl = 0 . 15 + 0 . 1 2,r X 1500 1

0 . 75 X 3.57 100 0 . 146 sec 146 ms
X 60 X
0 . 15 + 0.1 2,r X 2500 l

TC2
0.75 X 2.14
X
60
X
100 = 0 . 408 sec 408 ms
0.15 + 0.1 27T X 3500 1

TC3 0.75 X 1.53 X
60 X
100 0.799 sec 799 ms
- 300 -
2.6 Cutting Amount of Machine
The spindle motor output (HP or KW) of machine tools is specified to indicate
their cutting amount, in general.
Regarding the lathing, milling, and drilling, the relation between the rate of
metal removal and output power will be described by quoting it from the
following reference.
Reference: MACHINING DATA HANDBOOK AIR FORCE MATERIAL LABORATORY
a) Lathe turning
b) Machining center , milling using milling machine
c) Machining center, drilling using drilling machine
a) Turning
N, (rpm)
feed
fr (mm/r e v )
Depth of cut d ( mm )
Cut ting conditions:

1) Spindle revolutions Ns (rpm)
2) Workpiece diameter Dt (mm)
3) Feed fr (mm/rev)
4) Depth of cut d (mm)
Cutting formulas :
1) Cutting speed Ve= rr x Dt x Ns (mm/min)
2 ) Feed rate fm = fr x Ns (mm/min)
3) Rate of metal removal Q d x fr x Vc/1000 (cm 3 /min)
= d x fr x rr x Dt x Ns/1000 (cc/min)
Q = rr x Dt x d x fm/1000 (cc/min)
4) Power required at spindle PS= Q/MRt (kW)

where, MRt: Rate of metal removal per kW
(cc/min/kW)
5) Power required at spindle motor
1
PM= - x Q/MRt
11
where, n: Drive efficiency of spindle
( %)
- 301 -
b) Milling
Feedrate
<;= f m (mm/min)
Workpiece
Cutting conditions:
2) Diameter of milling cutter Dm (mm)
3) Width of cut w (mm)
4) Depth of cut d (mm)
5) Number of teeth in cutter n (pieces)
6) Feed ft (mm/tooth)
Cutting formulas:
1) Cutting speed Ve= TI x Dm x Ns (mm/min)
2) Feed rate fm = ft x n x Ns (mm/min)
3) Rate of metal removal Q = w x d x ft x n x Ns/1000 (cm3 /min)
Q w x d x fm/1000 (cc/min)
4) Power required at spindle PS= Q/MRm (kW)

where, MRm: Rate of metal removal per kW
(cc/min/kW)
5) Power required at spindle motor 1
PM= - x Q/MRm (kW)
n
(%)
- 302 -
c) Drilling
Cutting conditions:
2) Drill diameter Dd (mm)
3) Feed ft (mm/rev)
Cutting formulas:
1) Cutting speed Ve= 1T x Dd x Ns (mm/min)
2) Feed rate fm = fr x Ns (mm/min)
1T 2
3) Rate of metal removal Q = l x Dd x fr x Ns/1000 (cm3 /min)
2
Q= f x Dd x fm/1000 (cc/min)
4) Power required at spindle PS= Q/MR.d (kW)

where, MRd: Rate of metal removal per kW
1 (cc/min/kW)
5) Power required at spindle motor PM= - x Q/MR.d (kW)
n
(%)
- 303 -
Rate o f me t al r emoval per kW (cc/ mi n /kW) (aver age v a lues).
(when t he drive efficiency of spindle i s 80%)
MR: Ra te of metal r emoval per kW

( cc /min/ kW)
TURNING MRt MILLING MRm DRILLING MRd
HARDNESS
(* l )
HSS AND CARB IDE TOOLS HSS DRILLS
MATERIAL CARBIDE TOOLS f eed feed
Brinell
fe ed 0 .1 27 - 0 . 127 - 0. 305 0. 05 - 0. 203
har dness
0.381 mm/rev mm/too th mm/rev
SHARP DULL SHARP DULL SHARP DULL
TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL
STEEL- WROUGHT AND 85- 200 (*4) 20 15 . 7 20 15. 7 21. 9 16 . 8
CAST
Plain Carbon 35- 40Rc(*2) 15.7 12 . 9 14 . 6 11. 5 15 . 7 12 . 9
Alloy Steel s
Tool St eels 40-50Rc 14 . 6 11. 5 12 . 2 10 12 . 9 10 . 4
50-55Rc 10. 9 8. 7 10 . 4 8.4 10 .4 8. 4
55- 58Rc 6.4 5. 2 8. 4 6.8 8.4 6.8

(*5)
CAST IRONS 11 0- 190 31. 3 24 . 4 36.6 27 . 4 21. 9 18 . 3
Gray, Duc t ile and
Malleable 190- 320 15 . 7 12.9 20 15 . 7 13 . 7 10.9
STAINLESS STEELS 135- 275 16 . 8 13 . 7 15 . 7 12.9 20 15.7
Fe r ri t i c , Aus t eni tic
and Martensitic 30- 45Rc 15.7 12 . 9 14.6 11.5 18 . 3 14 . 6
PRECIPITATION
HARDENINGS STAINLESS 150-450 15.7 12.9 14.6 11.5 18 . 3 14.6
STEELS
TI TANIUM 250- 375 18.3 14 . 6 20 15 . 7 20 15.7

HIGH TEMPERATURE
ALLOYS
200- 360 8.7 7.0 10 . 9 8.7 10. 9 8. 7
Nickel and Cobalt
Base
I r on Base 180-320 13 . 7 10. 9 13 . 7 10.9 18 . 3 14.6

REFRACTORY ALLOYS .. . 321 7.8 6. 2 7.5 6.1 8.4
6. 6
Tungsten (*5)
Molybdenum 229 10 . 9 8. 7 13. 7 10 .9 13 .7 10. 9
Columbium 217 12 . 9 10 . 4 14 . 6 11. 5 15.7 12 . 9
Tant al um 210 7. 8 6.2 10 . 9 8. 7 10 . 4 8. 4
NICKEL ALLOYS 80-360 10.9 8. 7 11. 5 9. 1 12 . 2 10
30-150
ALUMINUM ALLOYS 87 . 8 73 . 2 68 . 6 54 . 9 137.2 109 . 8
500 kg
- 304 -
MR: Rate of metal removal per kW
(cc/min/kW)
TURNING MRt MILLING MRm DRILLING MRd
HARDNESS
HSS AND CARBIDE TOOLS HSS DRILLS
MATERIAL (*l)
Brinell CARBIDE TOOLS feed feed
hardness feed 0.127 - 0.127 - 0.305 0.05 - 0.203
0.381 mm/rev mm/tooth mm/rev
SHARP DULL SHARP DULL SHARP DULL
TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL
-·----------- 40-90
MAGNESIUM ALLOYS 137. 2 109. 8 137.2 109 . 8 13 7. 2 109 .8
500 kg
COPPER 80Rb (*3) 21. 9 18.3 21. 9 18 . 3 24.4 20
COPPER ALLOYS 10-80Rb 34.3 27.4 34.3 27 .4 45.7 36.6
80-lOORb 21. 9 18.3 21. 9 18.3 27.4 21. 9
Note 1) Brinell hardness, Standard testing method, Steel ball diameter 10 mm,
Load: 3000 kg, Maximum value about 450
Note 2) Re: Rockwell hardness, C scale, Measurement of hardness of comparatively
hard metals
Note 3) Rb: Rockwell hardness, B scale, Measurement of hardness of soft metals
Note 4) Corresponds to hardness of general steel S45C
Note 5) Carbide
- 305 -
Efficiency of spindle drive system
The efficiency of spindle system can be obtained from the following diagram
according to the V belt, n umber of gear stages, and number of bearings.
NUMBER OF UNITS
INDEX OPERATING IN SEQUENCE
POINTS IN TRANSMISSION DRIVE EFFICIENCY
ANTIFRICTION . 75
BEARINGS '
.so
C
10
9 - . 85
8
7
-6
5
4
-. 90
SPUR GEARS B
UNDER LOAD , 91
(PAIRS) 3
2
,93
V-BELT A .94
DRIVES ..,__
.95
EXAMPLE:
MOTOR .96
t/
1 V-BELTDRIVE
8 BEARINGS •97
X
.98
LINE A: 1 V-BELT DRIVE EFFICIENCY,

o. 9 5
LINE B: 3PAIRS OF GEARS EFFICIENCY;
o. 9 1
LINE C: BBEARINGS EFFICIENCY; 0. 9 2
TOTAL EFFICIENCY = . 9 5 x . 91 x. 92 = 80o/o= 7/
- 306 -
Data on rate of metal removal
The rate of metal removal per minute when steel S45C is cut using a new tool on
a lathe or machining center is obtained within the shadowed range in the
following figure approximately; provided that noload torque such as friction
torque, etc. are negligible .
Machines featuring good

efficiency and rigidity
Ordinary machines with

spindle drive efficiency
80%
3 70cc
3 0 0 cc
240
2 2 0 cc
160 1 5 0 cc
1 IO cc
80
r-
~1
"'
~
,n
~
.... '
~
~
"'
<Xi
0
~1 ml
'
.-.: "'
0 4 8 12 16 20
Motor output P (kW)
- 307 -
2. 7 Constant Surface Speed Control
Purpose of constant surface speed control in lathe
1) Good finish surface
2) Reduction of lathing time
3) Constant rate of metal removal
4) Prolonged lives of tools by setting the surface speed to a suitable value
Constant surface speed control operation
X axis
X=O
Cut ting speed;
Ve [m/min]
- - - - - - - - - t - - - - - - - - - i Diameter of workpiece
Workpiece D,
Radius r
Spindle revolutions Na N,
Ve
Na = 2 rrr [rpm]
Clamped at maximum
revolutions of spindle
Radius r 0 X-axis position
Cutting speed Ve
Radius r
P,Q
Rate of metal removal; Q
Cutting output; P
Radius r
- 308 -
The cutting output during constant surface speed control, or, the output
required for cutting a metal during constant surface speed control under a
certain condition is obtained by the following formula:
I Po ~ -.&t x d x fr x Ve I (kW) (6-1)
where, Po: Cutting output (kW)

MRt: Rate of metal removal per kW (20 usually) (cc/min/kW)
d Depth of cut (mm)
fr: Feed rate (mm/rev)
Ve : Cutting speed (m/min)
Motor output required for constant surface speed control
Both required cutting output and the output for acceleration (or deceleration)
for increasing (or decreasing) the spindle revolutions are required, and the
maximum output is required in the vicinity of the maximum revolutions of the
motor .
Cutting output
Radius r
+ Output for acceleration or

output for deceleration
II Required output
Since cutting speed Ve is kept constant under the constant surface speed
control, the tool position (radius r) on a workpiece is inversely proportional
to spindle revolutions Ns.
Thus, the feed rate per minute fm (mm/min) becomes faster, as the tool
advances toward the innermost of diameter.
Assume that the tool is displaced by -llX in the X-axis direction during flt
time, and a change rate
llX
represents the feed rate given by the following formula.
M
dX fr x Ve
dt
= fm = 21rX
••••••••• • •••••• ••• • •• ••• • i, •••••••• • •••• • • ■ ••••• • • (6-2)
- 309 -
From the formula (6-2), the time required for the tool to be displaced from
radius Xl > rl to X2 r2 is obtained by:
I ta ~ fr : Ve (rl
2
- rz2) (sec) (6-3)
(where, rl > r2)
This is the formula for obtaining the machining time under the constant
surface speed control.
Extension of constant surface speed control area (Patent pending)
The constant surface speed control area is extended over large diameter
workpieces, and the feed rate is reduced by the reduction component of the
motor output. In other words, when a large diameter workpiece is machined,
the spindle revolutions are lowered, and the motor output is reduced by the
reduction component of revolutions in the constant torque area.
Accordingly, the feed rate is reduced, as the revolutions decrease, while
keeping the circumferential speed constant in cutting machining.
Spindle motor output Po
Output Po
Feed fr (mm/rev) is controlled as follows.
f fr'
l fr'=
= fr x !s (Ns ,;;:, Nb)
fr x Nb (Ns < Nb)
l ...... ...... .................... (6-4)
Feedrate fm (mm/min) is controlled as follows.
x 1 (Ns
x
Ns
~
Nb (Ns < Nb)
Nb) l (6-5)
- 310 -
X-axis X=O
T ool
Workpiece
Spindle revolutions Ns Ns
Nm
Nb
Radius r
~
Cutting speed Ve Ve
Feed fr fr
Constant
Rate of metal removal Q Q

Cutting output P p
- 311 -
2.8 Tapping
1) Tapping operation
The tapping means a work of threading a female screw on a workpiece in
machining center .
To spindle
Tapper (Expansible or contractable

in the Z•axis by a certain
quantity)
Workpiece Depth of tap hole
Tapping is made by controlling the spindle and Z-axis movement as follows .
Forward rota-
I I
(D Spindle stop (J)
tion of spindle
Ns
Rapid
® traverse ®
of Z-axis +R
Cutting
® feed of
Z-axis
l '
©
fm
Reverse rota-
tion of spindle
®
+ Z
- 312 -
Spindle movement
© Spindle revolutions Ns
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Z-axis movement -N,
-R
®
I V -z
\
+Z ~ I
+R
®
I
®
Examine the following items for tapping.

a) Depth of tap hole •.••.......•..•••..•.. Check if the depth is finished as
specified.
b) Expansion or contraction of tapper ••.. . This will affect the threading
accuracy.
2) Tapping and cutting speed
In tapping work, the cu tting speed is general ly limited according to the
kinds of workpieces and tool s .
I Ve = n x d x Ns/1000 I (m/min) (7-1)
where, d: Tap diameter (mm)

Ns: Spindle revolutions (rpm)
Example of tapping conditions

When a steel casting workpiece is tapped by an ordinary tapper :
.••..•..•. • Lower than 8 m/min
When a li gh t alloy workpiece is tapped by an ordinary tapper or
when a cemented carbide tapper is employed; ... .•. . .• . . Lower than 25 m/min
- 313 -
The relation between the tap diameter and spindle revolutions is as
illustrated below.
1000
800 \ ,_
600
A✓~
Spindle
revolu-
tions N,
(rpm)
400
ICutting speed 25 m/min.
/0-;
200
Cutting speed 8 m/min.
0 ' - - - - - - - ' - - - - ' - - - - ' - - . . . . . L . - - - ' - - - ' - - - ' - -,___ _ . _ ~_ __,__~

0 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Tap diameter tl Imm)
3) Feedrate during tapping work

Set the cutting feed rate fm (mm/min) during tapping as follows.
I fm = Ns x p I (mm/min) .............................................. (7- 2)
where, p: Pitch of screw
The relation between the tap diameter (nominal diameter of screw) and pitch
is as shown below.
Nominal diameter Height of engagement

of screw (d) Pitch (p)
(H1)
M2 0.4 mm 0.217 mm
M 2 .6 0.45 0.244
M3 0.5 0 .271
M4 0.7 0.379
M5 0.8 0.433
M6 1.0 0.541
M8 1.25 0.677
MIO 1.5 0.812
Ml2 1. 75 0.947
Ml6 2 1.083
M20 2.5 1.353
M24 Height of engagement H 1
3 1.624
M30 3.5 1.894
M36 4 2.165
- 314 -
4) Tap hole depth control
The hole depth dp (mm) is given by the following formula.
I dp = df + ia I (mm) • ■ ♦ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I ■ ♦ ■ • • ■ ♦ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ♦ ■ ■ ■ • ■ ■ ♦ I ♦ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I I ♦ ■ ■ ■ ♦ ■ ♦ ■ ■ ■ (7- 3)
where, df : Moving distance commanded from a workpiece surface to Z-axis

ia: Machining dist ance of tapper by means of self-propulsion until the
spindle is stopped after being decelerated (This is called flow
quantity)
Tapper screw
pitch p
df
fm
Depth of tap dp
Feed stop
la
/ -
, - - - - - , --- - - -- - - - - - - -- - - - - - -
Flow
quantity
How to obtain flow quantity Qa
Z axis 2-axis stop

-z
Ns
Linear deceleration is assumed
Spindle
Tdl Tds
Tdl: Operation delay time by the time the spindle starts deceleration (sec)
Tds : Deceleration time of spindle (sec)
1 Ns
la= (Tdl +
2 Tds) x 60 x p (mm) (7-4)
To decrease the flow quantity, the operation delay time and deceleration time
must be reduced. This flow quant i ty corresponds to the expansion of the tapper.
It must be controlled to obtain the depth of holes accurately.
- 3 15 -
5) Expansion and contraction of tapper
For the expansion and contraction of tapper, refer to tools maker's
catalogues. Contraction is generally less than expansion, and the spring
pressure increases during contraction.
Accordingly, the finish accuracy of screws is said to be better when
threading is made in the expansion direction of the tapper rather than in the
contraction direction.
The causes of expansion and contraction of the tapper are as described below.
Please examine the motor selection and power magnetic sequence design, so
that tapping can be done with minimized expansion and contraction.
a) Expansion and contraction caused by the difference between the feed rate
and actual spindle revolutions Ns
Expansion and contraction quantity d of tapper caused by asynchronism
between the feed rate and spindle revolutions
Spindle revolutions Ns
Depth of
screw hole
df [mm]
pNs fm positive (expansion of tapper)

pNs fm negative (contraction of tapper)
pNs r: fm x df I (mm) (7-5)
The above relation is contrary when the tapper is lifted.

Particularly be careful with this relation when a hole is deep.
b) Expansion and contraction e:2 caused by the forward/reverse rotation of
~indle and Z-axis feed timing
(__!) Pattern A
frn
Z axis - z
+Z
I -frn
Expansion I
Ns 1 (Assumed as linear
: acceleration/deceleration)
,__T_a_s_ Acceleration
Spindle : time
- -- - -~~1----'QO\xx'Sa------ -
time -Ns
- 316 -
= 21 x Ns
60
x p x (Tds - Tas) (mm) .......... .. .......... .. (7-6)
Tds ~ Tas usually.
(D Pattern B (Z-axis instantaneous reverse rotation)
fm
Z axis -z
+Z
I I
I I fm
I I
--------..
l Expansion I
I
Ns I
I
I
Spindle
-Ns
Contraction
1 Ns fm
Ezb = 2 x 60 x p x (Tds - Tas) + x (Tds + Tas) (mm) (7-7)
60
G) Pattern C
fm Expansion
Z axis -z I +Z
Expansion I I
l.....-1 Tar -fm Tar: Time required until the
Ns I I spindle reaches steady-
I I
I I
state revolution after
I generation of speed
Spindle arrival signal
Speed arrival detection point
Contraction -Ns
1 Ns fm
Ezc 2 x 60 x p x (Tds - Tas) + 60 x Tar .................. (7-8)
6) (D2lam!;::~~:n~~em~~!m!~:m:::e:x~;~:!~: :;:e~o:~~:c:!~:a~fs;~~~~: speed.

@ Control the reverse rotation start time of the Z-axis feed motor as shown
in pattern C until expansion/contraction E2c ~ 0.
Adjust the detection level of the speed arrival signal from the spindle
servo unit as a method.
- 317 -
G) Shorten the acceleration and deceleration time of spindle.
Switch gears from low gear to high gear at revolutions lower than normal
gear switching point for the purpose of shortening the acceleration and
deceleration time of the spindle during tapping work only.
Normal gear switching point
Motor
revolutions
N [rpm]
Spindle revolutions Ns [rpm]
- 318 -
2.9 How to Find Allowable Duty Cycle
When the spindle accelerates and decelerates frequently for machining, the motor
should be used so that the average output value of one cycle of operation does
not exceed the continuous rated output.
Following is the description of the me t hod of ca_lculating its allowable duty
cycle for a typical AC spindle motor .
1) Duty cycle and average output
Motor speed rpm
L 1 cycl e
"'\ Dt
L
tl t3 t4 t5
Pl
Motor output
Acceleration Deceleration
Cutting
P1 , P : Output at acceleration and deceleration

4 (kW)=
3O-minute rated output x 1.2
P Output at no-load rotation (P = 0)
2
P Output during cutting (kW)
3
pl2tl + p22t2 + p32t3 + p42t4
Average output Pav - (8-1)
Dt
Note) As to output P during cutting at motor speed N which is less than base
3
speed Nb, assuming actual cutting output to be Pc (kW), the value is
obtained by the following equation.
Nb
P
3
=N x Pc (kW) .. . .. . . . . ~- . ... . . .. . . .... . ..... . ..... . . ..... . (8-2)
2) How to find allowable duty cycle time Dt:

From eq. (8-1) above, Dt is determined by:
(8-3)
Substitute the continuous rated output value of AC spindle motor used for Pav
(kW) .
- 319 -
Ex: Find the allowable duty cycle time when acceleration and deceleration
are repeated at no load (P2 = P3 = 0) for model 3.
o Continuous rated output: Pav= Pcont = 3.7 kW
o Output at acceleration/deceleration: Pl= P4 = 5.5 kW x 1.2 6,6 kW
o Acceleration time tl = 3 sec
Deceleration time t4 = 3 sec
Under the aforementioned conditions, Dt is found as follows.
1 2 2
Dt 3.l2° X (6 .6 X 3 + 6.6 X 3)
6 62
= ~ x (2 x 3) = 19.08 seconds
In other words, the allowable duty time when acceleration and

deceleration are repeated at no load for model 3 corresponds to 3 .18
times the summation of the acceleration and deceleration times.
3) Allowable duty cycle time Dt for repeated acceleration and deceleration
L
1~ tl
~
~
~ :-It4
L
Pl P4
I I I I
~ ;,I
Dt .
1
Dt (8- 3)
p2
cont
where, Pcont Continuous rated output

P 230 min 30-minute rated output
t 1 + t4 Summation of acceleration time and deceleration time
(8-4)
The Km value of each motor model is shown in the table below.
Model Value of Km
lS 3.10
l.5S 16.29
2S 4.07
3S 3.18
6S 2.68
8S 3.10
12S 2.68
15S 2.19
18S 2.04
22S 2 . 01
- 320 -
2.10 How to Find the Orientation Time
The spindle orientation operation has two systems: the magnetic sensor system
and position coder system. Find the orientation time from a stop for each
sys tem.
1) Magnetic sensor system
Orientation speed
Nori
Orientation end signal (ORAR)
J
L + Jm 2,r .
T x Nori (sec) (10-1)
60
m
where, Nori~ Nb (=1500 rpm)
1
(sec) (10-2)
Nori
60
In this period, the spindle rotates a maximum of one revolution.
Nori= 55 x Kp (rpm) (10-3)
Where, position gain Kp is nearly 5 to 30 for the spindle. For a machine

with compact models 1, 2, approx. 30 may be available for Kp ; however, Kp
is normally 5 to 15 .
c) t31 + t33
3
t31 + t 33 - Kp (sec) (10- 4)
d) t32
For stable control, set this time as follows.
t max = 0.2 (sec) (10-5)

32
e) t
4
The motor operates f or nearly the following time before it nearly stops
af ter the orientation end signal is given .
2
(sec) (10-6)
Kp
- 321 -
Ex: When position gain Kp = 5, the. orientation time t . is as follows at
ori
load inertia JL = 0.0022 kg.m.s L for model 3.
JL + Jm 0.0022 + 0.0022 2n O.lB sec

l) tl = Tm 0.71 X 60 X 55 X 5 =
1 60
0.22 sec
Nori 55 X 5
60
3) t + t = 0.6 sec
31 33
4) t32 0.2 sec
5) t = 0.4 sec
4
The time when the orientation end signal is issued is tori= 1.2 sec.
Also, the orientation time during rotation is the deceleration time plus
(t2max + t31 + t33 + t32 + t4).
2) Position coder system
Orientation speed
Nori
/_ ~
~tli J: t2 I
*
t3 t4
t :,,
tl t2 t3 4
Orientation end signal (ORAR)
JL + Jm 2n
Tm x 60 x Nori (sec) (10-7)
2
Note) The motor gives 2 turns maximum.
Nori
60
Nori= 30 x Kp
Position gain Kp is 5 to 30, and normally 5 to 15.
c) t3
3
t3 =Kp
- (sec)
d) t4
2
- (sec)
t4 =Kp
tori= t + t max + t3 + t4
1 2
- 322 -
APPENDIX 3 EXAMPLE OF COOLING FAN MOTOR OF UNIT
(Used in July, 1990 or earlier)
As an example of a fan motor for cooling, the model #5915PC made by N.M.B. is
shown below. For three-phase fan motors, refer to Chapter 7 "Cooling."
[Specifications]
Max. Max.
Fre- air static Cur- Input
Voltage Speed Noise Weight
Model quency flow pres- rent power
ms/ sure
V Hz min mmAq rpm A w dB kg
200+lO% 16
-15%'
50 s.s 13 255 0 0.14 26 53
5915PC-20W-B 20-04 200+!0% 16 0.8

-15%'
60 6 .0 16 2600 0.17 31 55
220+10% 16
-15%'
[External dimensions)
-
AIR
.....
~
N
0
~ -tit---+-+---'
..... "'
6
2..p4.3 (both sides)
38±0.2
- 323 -
APPENDIX 4 GROUNDING
The S series servo unit employs the plastic "body, therefore ground the unit
according to the following descriptions. When grounding the unit improperly the
motor may fluctuate, noise or the spindle gear may noise due to a noise of the
speed command voltage.
1) Shielded ground line
a) Corrective ground
CNC control circuit Connect the shielded lines.

CNl
D
AC spindle amp.
~--------------- Relay
,_ _
__,
CNC control circuit

CNl
r------------------ - --------------------,
D ~--- ----- ------ ------------- -------- --
AC spindle amp.
Extent the shielded line close to the pin of connector CNl
Note) Use the 2-core shielded line ,
b) Example of improper ground
Ex 1) The shielded line for the speed command voltage is terminated.
CNC control circuit

CNl
- - - - - - - -- - r-- -------
D
--, AC spindle amp.
_Re-la_y-1/ - - - --"
The electric potential of this shielded line is indefinite and the

shielded effective i s not made.
Ex 2) The shielded lines are grounded respectively
CNC control circuit

CNl
- ---- ------- - - ------- ..
D
AC spindle amp.
Relay
-=- A point ..__ __.-= B point
The electri c potential difference between points A and B temporari ly

generates a nd the potential of shielded lines may differ.
- 3 24 -
Ex 3) The shielded line is terminated
CNC control circuit

CNI
AC spindle amp.
The shielded line is terminated and is bundled together with the

power line.
2) Grounding
Magnetics cabinet
CNC control circuit AC spindle amp.
Power terminal
AC spindle motor
CD Connect the G terminal

power terminal .
of the AC spindle amp. to the G terminal of the
® Connect the G terminal

AC spindle amp.
of the AC spindle motor to the G terminal of the
G) Connect the G terminal of the AC spindle amp . close to the position of

the magnetics cabinet. Place the G terminal close to the cabinet as much
as possible to get more effective grounding .
Note 1) Connec t the G terminal of the magnetics cabinet to the ground terminal
according to the technical standard authorized.
Not.e 2) For connecting the G terminal of the CNC to the ground terminal, the
ground terminal to the ground plate and the ground terminal to the G
terminal of the power terminal of the magnetics cab inet, use the thick
cable and connect it close to each other .
- 325 -
Revision Record
AC SPINDLE MOTOR series (S series/P series/VH series) DESCRIPTIONS (8-65012E)
I. The explanation for AC spindle motor S series

(hlgh-speed model) has been added.
2. The explanation for AC spindle servo unit S series
(high-speed model) has been added.
03 '91. 3 3. The explanation for AC spindle motor VH series
has been added.
4. The explanation for built-in sensor signal conversion
circuit has been modified.
5. The explanation for spindle switching control circuit
has been added.
02 '89, I Total revision
01 '87, 11
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

B-65012E03 AC Spindle Motor Series (SPVH) Descriptions 1987

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-65012E03 AC Spindle Motor Series (SPVH) Descriptions 1987

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-65012E03 AC Spindle Motor Series (SPVH) Descriptions 1987

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What models of AC spindle motors are described in the manual?

What models of AC spindle motors are described in the manual?

What specifications are provided for the AC spindle motors?

What specifications are provided for the AC spindle motors?

..

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series

I~~ ~I~ ~I~~II~\

S ':'les name Model name

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR MODEL 1S, MODEL 1.5S,

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to

I. AC SPINDLE MOTORS series

4. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER ....•... . ....•... 14

5. CONNECTIONS ........... .. ............................................. 21

7. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . • . •••. • . . . • . •. . . . . . •. •. ••. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •• 26

II. AC SPINDLE SERVO UNITS series

3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER .......••...•.•.. 42

4. SPECIFICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . . • . • . • • • . . • . . . 47

7. COOLING •........•.......•...•........... . ...... .....•. .•....•..•. .•. . 65

8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND MAINTENANCE AREA •....•.•..............•. . . ... 68

9. CONNECTION •....•...•.....••......•........ , ••...•• , •••.•...•.••.•...• 95

10. DESCRIPTIONS OF INTERFACE SIGNAL ••••.•.•....•••.•..•.••••.••.••••• •• 114

III. AC SPINDLE MOTOR P series

1. GENERAL ............................. .................... ........... . 141

4. OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS ....••.•.••••.•.•...•....•.•.•.•... . .......•.•. 143

8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS .•..•••••••..•.•.. . • • .•••••.•.•.•..•..••••... •. ... 154

IV. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR VH series

3. SPEC I FI CATIONS . • . • • • . • • • • . . . • . • . . • • • . • • • • • • • • . . . • . . . . . • . . • • • . • . . • . . • . 162

4. ORDER SPECIFICATION DRAWING NUMBER .....•.••••• . ..•••.•...•.. •..••. ••• 166

3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION • . . . . • . . • . . . • • . • . • . . . . . . . . . • • • . • 17 2

4. SPECIFICATIONS •.••••..••••.•.•..••.•.• . . .• ••••....•.... ..•.....• .•.. . 178

5. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS •....•••.••.•••..•...•....•••...• .• .. . ••••. ~ . . . . . . 184

8. DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS . • . . • . . • • • . . • • . . • . • • • . . . • . • . • . • • . . . • • . . • . . • • . . 205

9. TWO-MAGNETIC SENSOR ORIENTATION . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . 215

VI. SPEED GAIN SWITCHING CIRCUIT

1. GENERAL . •. .••..•....... .• • . • . . . • . • • . . • • . • . • . • . . • . . • . • . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . 221

3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS • •..•••.•••••..•••..•.........• 221

4. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . • . • • • • • . . • • • • . • • • • • • . . • . • . • . • . • • • . . • . • . • . . • • • • • . . 222

5. DESCRIPTIONS OF INTERFACE SIGNALS • • . • • • . • . . . • • • . • • • . . • . . . • . . . . . . • . • . . 222

VII . BUILT-IN SENSOR SIGNAL CONVERSION CIRCUIT

3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS .....••..••...•...•••••......•. 227

6. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND EXAMPLE OF MOUNTING .•...•••••••••••••.••.•.•• - 232

9. NOTE ................................................................. 243

VIII. OUTPUT CONVERSION CONTROL

1. GENERAL ... .. ...................... ........... ....................... 251

2. COMPONENTS AND ORDER DRAWING NUMBER ••••.•••••••••.••..•••••.•••••••.. 251

7. EXPLANATION OF INTERFACE SIGNAL . • • • • . • • • • . • • • . • • • . • • • • . • • • . • • • . • • . . . . 259

9. EXAMPLE CONNECTION FOR THE ELECTROMAGNETIC CONTACTOR SWITCHING

10. PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO USE ........................................... 265

IX. SPINDLE SWITCHING CONTROL CIRCUIT

2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATION •••....•.•.•.•.••.•.....•....••. 269

4. OUTER DIMENSIONS •..•...•••.•••••••...••...•.......••.......••........ 272

5. CONNECTIONS • • •....•.•.•. . ............•....•........•......•.•...•.•.. 273

8. IMPORTANT POINTS FOR USING SPINDLE SELECTION CONTROL •..••..•.......•. 278

APPENDIX 1 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 281

APPENDIX 2 TECHNICAL DATA • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 286

APPENDIX 3 EXAMPLE OF COOLING FAN MOTOR OF UNIT

APPENDIX 4 GROUNDING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 324

1) AC spindle motor S series

Table 3, 1 (al Specification Table

:------__:els 15 1.55 25 35 65 85 125 155 185 225

O c__ _.,___ _.., ,. ,. ,.____ _ _. rpm